Neom - Ncec - Esia - Airport West Solar PV Plant - Rev00!24!09-2022

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT
ASSESSMENT
Airport West Solar Energy Park
Rev 01, September 2022
Submitted to:
By the consultant:
REVISION C ODE: REV00 PAGE 1 OF 290

©NEOM [2021]. All rights reserved.
Document History
Revision code Description of changes Purpose of issue Date

Rev00 First issue Issued for Submission to September 2022
NCEC
Document Approval
Prepared by Reviewed by Approved by

Name Abderrazzak ZEMZEMI Elyes Othman Ennacer Besghaeir
Job Title Environmental Engineer Environmental Engineer Environmental Consultant
ESIA RE PORT - S OL A R- PAR K- A IRPORT -WEST -NCEC REVISION C ODE: REV00 PAGE 2 OF 290
Table of contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS............................................................................................. 3
LIST OF TABLES ...................................................................................................... 9
LIST OF FIGURES................................................................................................... 11
DEFINITION OF TERMS ......................................................................................... 13
ACRONYMS ............................................................................................................ 15
0 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................................................................. 17
0.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 17
0.2 ESIA rationale ..................................................................................................... 17
0.3 Project Justification ............................................................................................. 17
0.4 Project description summary ............................................................................... 17
0.5 Project Phases .................................................................................................... 18
0.6 Project Baseline .................................................................................................. 18
0.7 Impact summary ................................................................................................. 19
1 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................... 20
1.1 General Information on The Study ...................................................................... 20
1.2 Rationale, Objectives, and Scope of the Study.................................................... 20
1.3 Structure of the Study ......................................................................................... 20
1.4 Permit Applicant Information ............................................................................... 21
1.5 Information on the Service Provider that Prepared the Study .............................. 21
2 INSTITUTIONAL AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK OF THE STUDY ... 23
2.1 Institutional Framework ....................................................................................... 23
2.1.1 Ministry of Environment, Water & Agriculture (MEWA) .................................... 23
2.1.2 The National Centre for Environmental Compliance ........................................ 23
2.1.3 NEOM Regenerative Development Management System ............................... 24
2.1.4 International Finance Corporation Performance Standards on Environmental
and Social Sustainability ................................................................................. 24
2.2 Regulatory Framework ........................................................................................ 27
2.2.1 National Laws, Regulations, Standards, and Requirements ............................ 27
2.2.2 Regional laws, regulations, standards and requirements ................................. 53
2.2.3 Regional Laws, Regulations, Standards and Requirements ............................ 54
2.2.4 International Laws, Regulations, Standards and Requirements ....................... 57
2.2.5 International Conventions and Treaties to which Kingdom is a party ............... 59
3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ACTIVITY ............................................................. 62
3.1 Objectives and Rationale of the Activity .............................................................. 62
3.2 Proposed Project Site ......................................................................................... 62
3.3 Activities Throughout the Stages of the Activity ................................................... 64
3.3.1 Early Works..................................................................................................... 64
3.3.2 Construction .................................................................................................... 64
3.3.3 Operations ...................................................................................................... 65
3.3.4 Decommissioning ............................................................................................ 70
3.3.5 Unplanned Events ........................................................................................... 70
3.4 Project Footprint .................................................................................................. 71
3.4.1 Area Required for the Project .......................................................................... 71
3.4.2 Project Resources and Types and Sources thereof ......................................... 71
3.4.3 Waste (types and methods of disposal thereof) ............................................... 73
3.5 Associated facilities ............................................................................................. 75
3.6 Action Programme .............................................................................................. 87
4 ALTERNATIVES TO THE ACTIVITY .......................................................... 88
4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 88
4.2 Methodology ....................................................................................................... 88
4.3 Alternative To “No Activity (project)”/ “No amendment” ....................................... 89
4.4 Location Alternatives ........................................................................................... 89
4.5 Layout alternatives .............................................................................................. 90
4.6 Technical Alternatives ......................................................................................... 91
4.6.1 Installation system........................................................................................... 91
4.6.2 panel cleaning system ..................................................................................... 92
4.6.3 type of photovoltaic panels .............................................................................. 92
4.6.4 Ground Coverage Ratio (GCR) ....................................................................... 94
4.6.5 DC/AC Ratio ................................................................................................... 95
4.7 Comparison of alternatives.................................................................................. 96
5 DESCRIPTION OF SURROUNDINGS ...................................................... 100
5.1 Information on the Study Area ........................................................................... 100
5.2 Physical Environment........................................................................................ 101
5.2.1 Climate .......................................................................................................... 101
5.2.2 Temperature ................................................................................................. 101
5.2.3 Humidity ........................................................................................................ 102
5.2.4 Precipitation .................................................................................................. 103
5.2.5 Wind.............................................................................................................. 103
5.2.6 Geology ........................................................................................................ 104
5.2.7 Regional soils ................................................................................................ 108
5.2.8 Topography and slopes ................................................................................. 109
5.2.9 Hydrology ...................................................................................................... 111
5.2.10 Hydrogeology ................................................................................................ 120
5.2.11 Air quality ...................................................................................................... 123
5.2.12 Ambient noise ............................................................................................... 127
5.2.13 Land use ....................................................................................................... 129
5.2.14 Landscape features....................................................................................... 130
5.3 Terrestrial biodiversity ....................................................................................... 132
5.3.1 Personnel and survey time ............................................................................ 132
5.3.2 Transect Survey and Limitations ................................................................... 133
5.3.3 Flora survey .................................................................................................. 134
5.3.4 Habitats......................................................................................................... 160
5.4 Archaeological and Cultural Environment.......................................................... 162
5.5 Socioeconomic Environment ............................................................................. 162
5.5.1 Administration, population and demographics ............................................... 162
5.5.2 Educational Status ........................................................................................ 163
5.5.3 Economic Profile ........................................................................................... 163
5.5.4 Social infrastructure ...................................................................................... 164
5.5.5 Traffic and transports .................................................................................... 165
5.5.6 Built assets.................................................................................................... 165
5.6 Sensitive Receptors .......................................................................................... 167
5.6.1 Environment sensitive receptors ................................................................... 167
5.6.2 Ecological sensitive receptors ....................................................................... 167
5.6.3 Socioeconomic sensitive receptors ............................................................... 167
5.6.4 Sensitive receptors’ location .......................................................................... 168
5.6.5 Future Activities within the geographic scope of the project .......................... 168
5.7 Climate and climate change .............................................................................. 169
5.8 Ecosystems services......................................................................................... 171
5.8.1 Natural capital ............................................................................................... 171
5.8.2 Ecosystem services ...................................................................................... 172
6 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION, ANALYSIS, AND ASSESSMENT .................. 174
6.1 Methodology Used for the Identification, Analysis and Assessment of Impacts . 174
6.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 174
6.1.2 Approach....................................................................................................... 174
6.1.3 Determination of Scope ................................................................................. 175
6.1.4 Baseline ........................................................................................................ 176
6.1.5 Identification of potentially significant effects ................................................. 176
6.1.6 Evaluation and Assessment of significance ................................................... 176
6.1.7 Risk / Opportunities Classification ................................................................. 177
6.1.8 Risk / Opportunities Category Matrix for Risk / Opportunities evaluation ....... 178
6.1.9 Consequence ................................................................................................ 178
6.1.10 Likelihood ...................................................................................................... 179
6.1.11 Ranking ......................................................................................................... 180
6.1.12 Outcome Prediction ....................................................................................... 181
6.1.13 Acceptability .................................................................................................. 181
6.1.14 Objectives ..................................................................................................... 182
6.1.15 Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) ............................................................... 182
6.1.16 ENVID (ENVironmental Impact iDentification) ............................................... 182
6.2 Analysis and Assessment of the Potential Impacts............................................ 183
6.2.1 Natural vegetation cover ............................................................................... 183
6.2.2 Air quality ...................................................................................................... 184
6.2.3 Noise and vibration ....................................................................................... 185
6.2.4 Odours .......................................................................................................... 187
6.2.5 Surface water quality ..................................................................................... 188
6.2.6 Groundwater quality ...................................................................................... 189
6.2.7 Hydrology and flood risk ................................................................................ 190
6.2.8 Soil Quality .................................................................................................... 190
6.2.9 Terrestrial Biodiversity ................................................................................... 191
6.2.10 Health and safety (occupational and public) .................................................. 193
6.2.11 Landscape and visual comfort ....................................................................... 194
6.2.12 Land use ....................................................................................................... 196
6.2.13 Waste generation .......................................................................................... 196
6.2.14 Economic and social aspects ........................................................................ 200
6.2.15 Impacts of decommissioning phase............................................................... 202
6.2.16 Unplanned events ......................................................................................... 202
6.2.17 Climate and Climate Change......................................................................... 205
6.2.18 Ecosystem Services ...................................................................................... 205
6.2.19 Human Rights ............................................................................................... 206
6.3 Transboundary Impacts..................................................................................... 207
6.4 Summary of Impacts Pre-Mitigation .................................................................. 207
7 PLANS ....................................................................................................... 210
7.1 Environmental Mitigation Plan ........................................................................... 210
7.1.1 Natural Vegetation Cover .............................................................................. 210
7.1.2 Air Quality ..................................................................................................... 211
7.1.3 Noise and vibration ....................................................................................... 213
7.1.4 Odours .......................................................................................................... 214
7.1.5 Surface water quality ..................................................................................... 215
7.1.6 Groundwater quality ...................................................................................... 216
7.1.7 Hydrology and flood risk control .................................................................... 217
7.1.8 Soil quality..................................................................................................... 217
7.1.9 Terrestrial biodiversity ................................................................................... 219
7.1.10 Community Health and Safety (occupational and public) ............................... 220
7.1.11 Landscape and Visual Comfort ..................................................................... 222
7.1.12 Land Use....................................................................................................... 223
7.1.13 Waste Generation ......................................................................................... 223
7.1.14 Climate and Climate Change......................................................................... 225
7.1.15 Economic and Social Aspects ....................................................................... 225
7.1.15.5 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORT .............................................................. 227
7.1.16 Decommissioning .......................................................................................... 228
7.1.17 Unplanned events ......................................................................................... 228
7.1.18 Archaeology and Cultural Heritage ................................................................ 229
7.1.19 Climate Impacts ............................................................................................ 230
7.1.20 Ecosystem Services ...................................................................................... 230
7.1.21 Human rights................................................................................................. 230
7.2 Environmental Monitoring Plan.......................................................................... 231
7.3 Summary of Impacts Post-Mitigation ................................................................. 238
7.4 Stakeholder Engagement plan .......................................................................... 240
7.5 Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan ................................................. 240
7.6 Environmental Rehabilitation and Remediation Plan ......................................... 240
7.7 STL relocation Plan ........................................................................................... 240
7.7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 240
7.7.2 Requirement for the Plan .............................................................................. 241
7.7.3 Plan Structure ............................................................................................... 241
7.8 Framework of Environmental and Social Management Plan ............................. 242
7.8.1 Objectives and Scope ................................................................................... 242
7.8.2 Intended Users .............................................................................................. 242
7.8.3 Legislative Requirements .............................................................................. 243
7.8.4 Organisational Structure................................................................................ 243
7.8.5 Key Roles and Responsibilities ..................................................................... 243
7.8.6 Environmental Training and Awareness ........................................................ 244
7.8.7 Internal and External Communications .......................................................... 246
7.8.8 Auditing and Inspection ................................................................................. 246
7.8.9 Control of Documents.................................................................................... 251
7.8.10 Structure and Content of the CESMP/OESMP .............................................. 251
8 SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 253
8.1 “Detailed” Alternative in Environmental, Social, and Economic Terms............... 253
8.2 Summary of the Environmental, Social and Economic Losses and Gains that
justify the establishment of the proposed activity .............................................. 253
8.3 Summary of the Method of addressing the adverse impacts and the extent of their
mitigation, improvement, or control. .................................................................. 254
8.4 Summary of the Environmental and Social Management Plan Management Plan
......................................................................................................................... 255
8.5 Roles of the Different Authorities Concerned..................................................... 255
9 ANNEXES .................................................................................................. 257
9.1 Reference List ................................................................................................... 257
9.2 Curriculum Vitae ............................................................................................... 258
9.2.1 Authors of the study ...................................................................................... 258
9.2.2 CVs of the authors ........................................................................................ 259
9.3 Technical Documents of the Project .................................................................. 284
9.4 Cadastral Maps of the Activity Site .................................................................... 285
9.5 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) ................................................................ 285
9.6 Responses to NCEC Comments on the ESIA Scoping Report .......................... 286
9.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan ................................................. 287
9.8 Environmental Rehabilitation and Remediation Plan ......................................... 288
9.8.1 Purpose of the Plan....................................................................................... 288
9.8.2 Procedures and Measures ............................................................................ 288
9.8.3 Monitoring plan.............................................................................................. 288
9.8.4 Reports preparation ...................................................................................... 288
9.8.5 emergency management plan ....................................................................... 289
List of Tables
Table 0-1: Summary of Impacts .................................................................................................. 19

Table 1-1: Permit Applicant information...................................................................................... 21
Table 1-2: Information about the environmental consultant ...................................................... 21
Table 1-3: Authors of the study ................................................................................................... 22
Table 2-1: IFC Performance Standards and their Applicability ................................................. 24
Table 2-2 : GAMEP Environmental Standards .......................................................................... 29
Table 2-3 : Standards for protecting soil from pollution ............................................................. 39
Table 2-4: Ambient Water Quality Standards............................................................................. 43
Table 2-5: Standards Pertaining to Treated Wastewater Prior to Discharge to Coastal and
Marine Waters ............................................................................................................................... 46
Table 2-6: Standards Pertaining to Treated Wastewater Prior to Discharge to Soil, Land, or
Surface Water ............................................................................................................................... 48
Table 2-7: Air Quality Standards for Basic Pollutants contained in Annex 1 of the Executive
Regulations for Air Quality of the current Environmental Law .................................................. 50
Table 2-8 : Noise limits near road area ....................................................................................... 51
Table 2-9 : Permissible noise limits exceptions ......................................................................... 52
Table 2-10 : Measurement noise levels for residential and commercial areas ....................... 52
Table 2-11 :Corrective limits for permitted noise levels at construction site ............................ 53
Table 2-12: Ambient air quality measures (Ambient Air Quality Regional Standards) ........... 53
Table 2-13: Articles of the Convention on the Conservation of Wildlife and their Habitats in
the GCC......................................................................................................................................... 54
Table 2-14: Ambient air quality Standards in GCC (Regional Standards)............................... 55
Table 3-1: Boundaries’ coordinates of Airport-west solar plant site ......................................... 62
Table 3-2: material quantities used in Construction phase ....................................................... 73
Table 3-3 Waste Disposal Methods ............................................................................................ 74
Table 3-4: Standard sound pressure level for construction equipment ................................... 75
Table 3-6: Estimated duration of activity stages ........................................................................ 87
Table 4-1 : Identified criteria and factors .................................................................................... 90
Table 4-2: Summary of the comparison between alternatives ................................................. 96
Table 5-1 : The main features of Airport west solar park site ................................................. 100
Table 5-2: Temperature in Tabuk (2014 – 2022) ..................................................................... 102
Table 29: Intensity data ................................................................................................................. 118
Table 5-4: Summary of Particulate Matter (PM2.5 and PM10) measurements ........................ 123
Table 5-5: Air quality monitoring sampling locations ............................................................... 124
Table 5-6: Summary of gaseous pollutants monitoring ........................................................... 126
Table 5-7: Summary of Noise Measurements .......................................................................... 128
Table 5-8: Examples of Land Use Features within the Project Site ....................................... 130
Table 5-21: Example of Key Landscape Feature within Project Site ..................................... 131
Table 5-9: Survey Activities and Dates ..................................................................................... 133
Table 5-10: Examples of Biotope Types ................................................................................... 136
Table 5-11: Flora of the Tabuk region ...................................................................................... 139
Table 5-12: Flora Species Recorded ........................................................................................ 142
Table 5-13: Description of Quadrats ......................................................................................... 146
Table 5-14: Bird species likely to be present in the region of Tabuk ..................................... 149
Table 5-15: Birds with Confirmed Occurrence.......................................................................... 154
Table 5-16: Mammals in Tabuk Region .................................................................................... 155
Table 5-17: Examples of Observations of Mammal Presence ............................................... 156
Table 5-18: Reptiles in provinces of Tabuk .............................................................................. 157
Table 5-19: Observation of Reptile Presence........................................................................... 159
Table 5-20: Invertebrates found in Tabuk................................................................................. 160
Table 5-22: Demographic Status of Tabuk (2019)................................................................... 162
Table 5-23: Educational status for Saudis nationals (age ≥10 years) in Tabuk (2017) ....... 163
Table 5-24: Tabuk Employment Statistics (15 year & over) (2019) ....................................... 164
Table 5-25: Ecosystem services against each category ......................................................... 172
Table 5-26: Relevance for the assessment of each Ecosystem services ............................. 172
Table 6-1: General Consequence Criteria for Risks ................................................................ 179
Table 6-2: General Consequence Criteria for Opportunities .................................................. 179
Table 6-3: Likelihood Categories and Criteria .......................................................................... 179
Table 6-4: Typical Noise Levels of Principal Construction Equipment................................... 185
Table 6-5: Predicted waste streams generated by the Proposed Development ................... 196
Table 6-6: Waste Classification ................................................................................................. 197
Table 6-7: summary of impacts ................................................................................................. 208
Table 7-1: Environmental Monitoring Plan ............................................................................... 232
Table 7-2: Summary of residual impacts .................................................................................. 238
Table 7-3: CESMP and OESMP Roles and Responsibilities................................................... 243
Table 7-4: Example of Training Requirements ........................................................................ 245
Table 7-5: Required Complimentary Plans and Procedures .................................................. 247
Table 7-6: Proposed Table of Contents for the CESMP/OESMP ........................................... 252
Table 8-1: Summary of preferred alternative ........................................................................... 253
Table 8-2: summary of gains and losses .................................................................................. 254
Table 8-3: Role of different authorities..................................................................................... 256
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: NCEC ESIA Flow process ........................................................................................ 37

Figure 3-1: Airport West Site Boundaries ................................................................................... 63
Figure 3-2: Solar plant Airport West site Location ..................................................................... 64
Figure 3-3: Solar Power Plant layout .......................................................................................... 66
Figure 3-4 : Bifacial modules ....................................................................................................... 66
Figure 3-5 : Inverter or transducer .............................................................................................. 67
Figure 3-6: Shape of the electric circuit ...................................................................................... 67
Figure 3-7 : Transformer .............................................................................................................. 68
Figure 3-8 : The electric circuit .................................................................................................... 68
Figure 3-9 : A model of the Solar Power Plant connection with SEC Network ....................... 69
Figure 11: Proposal of the construction camps and storage areas .................................................... 76
Figure 12: Detail of the main construction camp and main storage area .......................................... 77
Figure 13: Detail of the secondary construction camp...................................................................... 78
Figure 14: Detail of the secondary storage area ............................................................................... 78
Figure 15: Waterproof area in construction camp ............................................................................ 80
Figure 16: Settling basin in construction camps ............................................................................... 81
Figure 17: Proposal of machinery repair and pollutants management area in construction camps
(only if no possible servicing and maintenance of machinery and vehicles in authorized garages).... 82
Figure 18: Holding Tank ................................................................................................................... 83
Figure 19: Chemical toilets .............................................................................................................. 83
Figure 20: Proposal of waste storage area inside Construction Camp zone ...................................... 85
Figure 4-1 : Diagram of the integration of criteria ...................................................................... 90
Figure 4-2: Examples of installation systems ............................................................................. 92
Figure 4-3: Bifacial PV Module (Source: paradise energy solution)......................................... 93
Figure 4-4: Solar panel cell alternatives ..................................................................................... 94
Figure 4-5: Differences of land coverage ratio based on the arrangement of units ................ 95
Figure 4-6: The effect of clipping on reflectors ........................................................................... 96
Figure 5-1: Location of Airport West solar plant (source: google earth) ............................... 101
Figure 5-2: Climate at Tabuk Regional Airport ......................................................................... 101
Figure 5-3: Average High and Low Temperature at Tabuk Regional Airport (source:
weatherpark.com) ....................................................................................................................... 102
Figure 5-4: Humidity Comfort Levels at Tabuk Regional Airport (source: weatherpark.com)
...................................................................................................................................................... 103
Figure 5-5: Average Monthly Rainfall at Tabuk Regional Airport ........................................... 103
Figure 5-6: Wind rose in Tabuk region ..................................................................................... 104
Figure 5-7: Geological Divisions of Saudi Arabia (Source: Saudi Geological Survey, 2016)
...................................................................................................................................................... 105
Figure 5-8: Geologic Map of the Arabian Peninsula (Source: www.sgs.org.sa) ................... 106
Figure 5-9: Local geology of Airport West site (Source: Saudi Geological Survey) ............. 107
Figure 5-10: Distribution of main soil types in NEOM (Baseline survey document by NEOM)
...................................................................................................................................................... 109
Figure 5-11: Topography of Airport West Site.......................................................................... 110
Figure 5-12 : Slopes of Airport West Site ................................................................................. 111
Figure 5-13: Average annual (2002 2012) precipitation over the Arabian (source:
reserachgate.net by Mohamed sultan/University of Michigan) ............................................... 112
Figure 5-14: The spatial variations in elevation in m across the Arabian Peninsula and the
distribution of watersheds, stream networks and depressions (source: www.eos.org). ....... 113
Figure 41: Digital Elevation Model (DEM)....................................................................................... 114
Figure 42: Slope Values in PV Airport West .................................................................................... 115
Figure 43: Project catchment watersheds ...................................................................................... 116
Figure 44: Land use in watersheds Airport West Project ................................................................ 117
Figure 45: IDF curves from the rainfall records collected at Tabuk, provided by MoMRA, for a range
of return periods ........................................................................................................................... 118
Figure 46: Fitted relationships for parameters a and b of IDF formula for Tabuk TB002 station and the
accompanied coefficient of determination .................................................................................... 118
Figure 47: Classification Flood Hazard (DxV) for the RT= 100 years ................................................ 119
Figure 5-22: Aquifer flow and discharge within the Saq-Ram Aquifer System (West) (source:
water.fanack.com) ...................................................................................................................... 122
Figure 5-23: Air Sampling Locations ......................................................................................... 123
Figure 5-24: Locations of Air quality monitoring sampling ...................................................... 125
Figure 5-25: Locations of Camps and other Features within Project Site .............................. 129
Figure 5-26: Locations of Key Landscape Features ................................................................ 132
Figure 5-27: Survey Transects................................................................................................... 134
Figure 5-28: Quadrat Survey Locations .................................................................................... 135
Figure 5-29: Ficus palmata ........................................................................................................ 141
Figure 5-30: Location of HCP Flora Species ............................................................................ 148
Figure 5-31: Locations of HCP Reptiles .................................................................................... 158
Figure 5-32: Habitats in Airport West Solar Park ..................................................................... 161
Figure 5-33: Archaeological sites near Airport-West project site (blue dots) ........................ 162
Figure 60: Airport West Access ...................................................................................................... 165
Figure 5-35 : High voltage line at 140 m east to Airport West site ......................................... 166
Figure 5-36: Airport west location in the project site ................................................................ 166
Figure 5-37: Sensitive receptors in Airport West Solar Park site ........................................... 168
Figure 5-38: Projects next to Airport solar plant....................................................................... 169
Figure 5-39: The average predicted values of temperature and rainfall for Saudi Arabia ... 170
Figure 6-1: Neom Risk Matrix .................................................................................................... 180
Figure 8-1: NEOM Hierarchy of Environmental and Social Risk & Opportunity Controls .... 255
Definition of Terms
Term Definition
Acceptability Decision process applied at the end of risk and opportunity assessment,
that determines whether a suite of predicted outcomes resulting from a
development are demonstrated to have reached ALARP/AHARP and
are consistent with, and meet NEOM’s Environmental Vision, relevant
legislation and international agreements, guidance, etc.
Activity Planned actions undertaken during a development, construction or
operation that may or may not be a driver for change on environmental
or social values.
Area of Influence The area where potential environmental or social sustainability risks may
occur in relation to a proposed development. At a minimum this includes
the defined project boundary, but dependent on the scale, nature and
complexity of the development, the AoI may extend for hundreds of
meters or even kilometres beyond the project area boundary.
As High As Status reached when management or mitigation measures have
Reasonably reduced a predicted outcome to the highest level without incurring
Practicable unreasonable costs for the gains that could be made. Demonstration of
AHARP forms part of the acceptability of a predicted outcome.
As Low As Status reached when management or mitigation measures have
Reasonably reduced a predicted outcome to the lowest level without incurring
Practicable unreasonable costs for the gains that could be made. Demonstration of
ALARP forms part of the acceptability of a predicted outcome.
Associated Facilities Associated facilities, which are facilities that are not funded as part of the
project and that would not have been constructed or expanded if the
project did not exist and without which the project would not be viable
Consequence The potential outcome (positive or negative) of an effect on an
environmental or social value prior to management measures being
applied. Can be certain or uncertain depending on the level of risk.
Cumulative Impact Process used to evaluate the combined predicted outcomes on an
Assessment environmental or social value from several unrelated developments.
Driver Interaction between an activity and an environmental or social value,
with the potential to cause a change (directly or indirectly) from the
baseline of the value. Can lead to positive, neutral or negative effects.
This is a neutral term inclusive of positive as well as negative change
and thus includes risk and opportunity.
Early Works Early works includes technical site studies to support asset design, as
well as establishment of support facilities and initial preparatory
groundworks for proposed developments. Under the MEWA MOU,
NEOM can seek fast track approvals to facilitate project schedules to
allow for early works to commence in advance of a full development
environmental approval being issued by MEWA.
Ecosystem Services Ecosystem services are the benefits that people, including businesses,
derive from ecosystems
Environment The surroundings in which development activities occur, including air,
water, land, natural resources, flora, fauna, humans and their
interrelationships.
Environmental Impact Change to the environment, whether adverse or beneficial, wholly or
partially resulting from an organization’s interactions with the
environment.
Hazard Substance, activity, structure or event that has the potential to do harm
to environmental or social values.
Likelihood The chances of a risk or opportunity happening.
Term Definition
Management Measure Mechanism devised and applied to eliminate a hazard or reduce the
(or Control Measure) level of risk of a hazard from causing harm. Can also be applied to
increase the chances of an opportunity from being realized or
succeeding.
Mitigation A mechanism used to respond to an event that has occurred with the
intent to reduce the negative outcomes or increase the positive
outcomes.
Opportunity The effect of uncertainty on an expected (positive) result (opposite of
risk).
Predicted Outcomes The combined consequence of a risk or opportunity for a given value,
after management measures have been accounted for.
Regenerative A development that regenerates its natural, physical, social and
Development economic capitals to a state beyond sustainability. The terminology
implies a state of net positive impact at a future state and requires a
holistic approach to nature, implementing systems thinking and true cost
accounting i.e. ecosystems services accounting.
Risk The effect of uncertainty on an expected (negative) result. The result is
generally the outcome of a hazard against the likelihood.
Value Environmental or social phenomenon with perceived or inherent value
as defined through legislation, guidance, treaties, social norms etc.
Values span marine, terrestrial and atmospheric biomes, and include, as
a small suite of examples: geologic features; individual plants or
animals; species; genetic diversity; habitats; water quality; air quality;
ecological processes; people; buildings; infrastructure, and business,
etc.
Acronyms
Abbreviation Description
4WD Four-Wheel Drive
AC Alternative Current
AH Anno Hegirae
AHARP As High As Reasonably Practicable
ALARP As Low As Reasonably Practicable
AoI Area of Influence
BDC Beacon Development Company
CBD Convention on Biological Diversity
CMS Convention of Migratory Species
CV Curriculum Vitae
dB Decibel
DC Direct Current
EBS Environmental Baseline Survey
EMP Environmental Management plan
ENVID ENVironmental Impact iDentification
EP Equator Principles
EPFI Equator Principles Financial Institutions
ESIA Environmental and Social Impact assessment
ESMP Environmental and Social Management Plan
GACA General Authority of Civil Aviation
GAMEP General Authority of Meteorology and Environmental Protection
GAMEP-ES GAMEP Environmental Standard
GCC Gulf Cooperation Council
General Environmental Regulations and their Rules for
GERRI
Implementation
GPS Global Positioning System
HCP High Conservation Priority
HSE Health, Safety and Environment
IFC International Finance Corporation
IFC EHS International Finance Corporation Environment, Health And Safety
IUCN International Union for Conservation of Nature
KAUST King Abdullah University of Science and Technology
KPIs Key Performance Indicators
KSA Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
MEWA Ministry of Environment, Water and Agriculture
MoE Ministry of Energy
mph Mile per hour
MW Mega Watt
NCEC National Centre for Environmental Compliance
NCWCD National Commission for Wildlife Conservation and Development
NEV NEOM Environment Department
NREP National Renewable Energy Program
NSR Moise Sensitive Receptor
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PEL Public Environment Law 2001
PME Presidency of Meteorology & Environment
PV Photovoltaic
RDMS Regenerative Development Management System
SAR Saudi Arabia Riyal
SAW Saudi Authority of Wildlife
SCTA Saudi Commission of Tourism and Antiquities
SEC Saudi Electricity Company
SGS Saudi Geological Survey
STL Spiny-tailed Lizard
TSP Total Suspended Particulate
UNFCCC United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change
WHO World Health Organization
WP Waypoint/s
0 Executive summary
0.1 Introduction
This Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) Report support application for
construction of the Airport West Solar Energy Park with a 2,082-megawatt maximum
production capacity in NEOM. The site of this development is located 54 km south-west of the
city of Tabuk.
The solar energy park project aligns within the main strategy of the energy sector in the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The renewable energy policy in the Kingdom is a central component
of the country’s vision 2030.
0.2 ESIA rationale
The Project is considered a Category 3 Project, “Projects with significant environmental

impacts which may surpass the project boundary / site activity negatively impacting
environmentally sensitive areas and receptors” that requires the submission of an ESIA to the
NCEC.
ESIA study is a critical step in the preparation of permitting process, as it identifies the
environmental issues most likely to deal with during all project phases. Before ESIA study a
scoping process was undertaken, which is systematic exercise that establishes the
boundaries of the ESIA and sets the basis of the analyses that will be conducted at each
stage.
0.3 Project Justification
The solar power plant will provide new alternatives for energy and reduce the Kingdom's
dependence on traditional energy source represented by petroleum. The project achieves
several of strategic goals emanating from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia’s 2030 vision and the
global will, including, but not limited to:
• Reducing carbon emissions resulting from the consumption of fossil fuels.
• Preserving the national natural resources.
• Relying on an inexhaustible source of energy, which is the sun.
• Reducing the cost of producing electricity.
• Supporting global efforts to reduce emissions that cause climate change and global
warming.
• Diversifying the sources of Saudi national income by relying on new and clean energy
sources.
0.4 Project description summary
The Project comprises of a solar energy park of a maximum production capacity of 2,082 MW
extended on a 52.6 km2 in the NEOM area. The proposed development is located at 54 km
south-west of the city of Tabuk.
The PV solar technology chosen for this Project consists of the following main components:
• bifacial PV cell: The PV cell is the device that generates electricity when exposed to
solar radiation.
• PV module: The PV module is the set of interconnected photovoltaic cells
encapsulated between a transparent front (usually glass) and a backing support
material then mounted in an aluminium frame.
• Mounting structures: Multiple PV modules are bolted onto a mounting structure which
tracks the sun progress across the sky in an east to west direction.
• PV array: The PV array is the complete power generating plant consisting of multiple
PV modules wired in series and in parallel.
• Inverters: The inverter converts the Direct Current (DC) to Alternative Current (AC)
• Substation: The substation receives all power from the inverters via underground
cables and provides protection and control equipment required to safely manage the
plant and to ensure grid code compliance regulations.
• Transformers: The transformer steps up the AC power from the inverters to match the
grid voltage.
• Stores, offices and control building.
• Access tracks and fencing.
0.5 Project Phases
The Project will be completed in four phases:

• Design and site preparation works
• Construction works
• Operation of the solar park
• decommissioning.
Site preparation and construction will involve the clearance of topsoil, installation of fencing
and levelling of the site and preliminary earthworks. The site will be marked out, safety and
security fencing installed. An access road and internal site access tracks will be constructed.
Key operational activities will include:
• cleaning of the modules
• management and irrigation on green spaces planted inside the plant
• maintenance of all Project Components
• site security monitoring.
The proposed Project is expected to operate for at least 30 years.
0.6 Project Baseline
The Project Site is located on a flat sandy plain partially planted by rock outcrops. The
landscape is natural and does not feature any prominent human interventions. At the same
time, high levels of grazing were observed across the Project Site.
Vegetation cover is limited to groups of perennial shrubs/trees. Some parts of the Project Site
are completely devoid of any vegetation cover while in others, dense cover vegetation was
observed. Burrows and animal tracks were observed in the Project Site which is a sign of an
activity of diversified fauna presence.
Scattered temporary campers and camel and sheep herders were observed all over the site
Based on the above, below are some considerations to be taken during the different phases
of the development of the project:
• Construction at the areas of the highest vegetation cover should be avoided as much
as possible. Removal of trees and any perennial shrubs should also be avoided but if
that should be done a reimplantation of these plants should be performed following
plants relocation plan.
• Restrict activities to allocated construction areas only, including movement of workers
and vehicles to allocated roads within the site and prohibit off-roading to minimize
disturbances
0.7 Impact summary
Table 0-1 summarizes the potential impacts of the Project phases (construction operation and
decommissioning) and their severity
Table 0-1: Summary of Impacts
Environmental aspect Potential Impact
Natural vegetation cover vegetal cover removal
Air quality air quality degradation

Noise and vibration noise environment disturbance
Odours air quality disturbance
Groundwater quality groundwater quality degradation
Hydrology and flood risk natural hydrologic system disturbance
Quality of soil Potential soil contamination
Terrestrial Biodiversity ecosystem disturbance and habitat destruction
Introduction of invasive species ecosystem disturbance and habitat destruction
risk of accidents and injuries during construction and

Health and safety (occupational and
operation, workers conflict with local community, influx of
public)
foreign workers and infectious disease spread
Landscape and visual comfort degradation of general landscape of the site
Land use modification of land use
non-hazardous and hazardous waste generation,

Waste generation
contamination of water and soil if managed badly
Climate change Reduction/increasing of GHGs
Creation of job opportunities

Economic and social aspects
Growth of regional economy
workers conflict with local communities
infectious disease spread
Traffic and transport volume of traffic rise and risk of accidents
Unplanned events Risk of oil/chemicals spill, vehicle accidents
Decommissioning Air quality, noise, traffic, job loss
1 Introduction
1.1 General Information on The Study
This Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) Report support application for
construction of the Airport West Solar Energy Park with a 2,082-megawatt maximum
production capacity in NEOM. The site of this development is located 54 km south-west of the
city of Tabuk.
The solar energy park project aligns within the main strategy of the energy sector in the
1.2 Rationale, Objectives, and Scope of the Study
The Environmental and Social Impact Assessment Report has been prepared to meet the
national requirements to allow new activities as stipulated in the Executive Regulations for
Environmental Permits for the Establishment and Operation of Activities. The study has been
prepared to comply with national guidelines of the NCEC and NEOM guidelines. The study is
also conceived to meet the international guidelines, specifically the International Finance
Corporation. Details of the regulatory framework is given in chapter 2 of the study.
The main objectives of the Environmental and Social Impact Assessment are:
• Identification and analysis of sensitive components in the current environment.

• Review of existing studies; document the current environmental conditions of the
specific site and regional conditions as much as possible to explain the situation of the
environment before starting the project. All potentially affected receptors must be
reviewed
• Determine the type, nature and significance of potential environmental and/or social
impacts during the construction, operation and decommissioning phases
• Identify and recommend practical/feasible mitigation measures early in the design
process to eliminate, reduce, mitigate or avoid any negative environmental and/or
social impacts resulting from the project
• Recommend environmental and social management/monitoring plans for the project
in order to eliminate and/or reduce potential negative environmental and/or social
impacts as specified above.
The current ESIA study is limited to the establishment of the Airport west Solar Park project
and its various components within the site boundaries. The current Environmental and Social
Impact Assessment Report has been prepared for the purpose of obtaining an environmental
permit for construction in accordance with the Regulations on Environmental Permits for the
Establishment and Operation of Activities.
1.3 Structure of the Study
The structure of the report is presented below:
Chapter 1: Provides background on the project. It also explains the objectives of this report
Chapter 2: identifies and presents the local legislative and regulatory framework related to the
environmental aspect of the proposed project and presents relevant international guidelines;
Chapter 3: provides an overview of the project components and a description of the activities
during the various phases of the project;
Chapter 4: provides an analysis of the alternatives considered for the project;
Chapter 5: Provides a description of the surrounding environment
Chapter 6: Provides assessment of potential environmental and social impacts;
Chapter 7: provides an overview of the various management plans that will be implemented
for the proposed project
Chapter 8: provides conclusions on preferred alternatives, a summary of the gains and losses
associated with project implementation, and the roles of the various relevant authorities.
Chapter 9: provides an overview of the stakeholder participation process and a summary of

the public consultation meeting held for the proposed project
Chapter 10: Annexes
1.4 Permit Applicant Information
NEOM will be the owner / operator of the Project. NEOM is an organisation engaged in smart
development building in Saudi Arabia. It aims to build an urban area, which will represent a
sustainable ecosystem with towns and cities, ports and enterprise zones, research centres,
sports and entertainment venues and tourist destinations. NEOM develops projects in design
and construction, education, energy, entertainment and culture, food, health and well-being
and manufacturing sectors.
Details regarding the Project proponent are outlined in Table 1-1
Table 1-1: Permit Applicant information
Project Proponent: NEOM

Address: NEOM Information Technology and Communications
Complex (ITCC)
2nd Floor Building IN-01
Al Nakheel District 12382
P.O. Box 10 Riyadh 11411
Kingdom Of Saudi Arabia
Telephone Number +966 118 365 999
Contact Person: NEOM: Peter Caron
Manager, Approvals
Email: [email protected]
Tel: +966 570 008 264
1.5 Information on the Service Provider that Prepared the Study
AH Environmental Consulting Office has been appointed by the Applicant as Sub-contractor

for the ESIA on the Proposed Development. The ESIA Report has been prepared by AH
Environmental Consulting Office in accordance with the relevant national and international
environmental laws and regulations. Senior international experts from TYPSA company have
been involved in the revision of the ESIA Report.
It should be remembered that Field work surveys (flora, fauna, noise, air quality, etc.) have
been carried out by Beacon Development Company (BDC) of King Abdullah University of
Science and Technology (KAUST) experts.
Table 1-2: Information about the environmental consultant
Service provider Ali Khudair Al-Harbi Environmental Consulting Office
NCEC registration Number 2371
Office address Eastern Province - Khobar - Olaya District
Phone +966 13 881 3898
Fax +966 13 897 8840
E-mail [email protected]
Authors of the study is listed in the Table 1-3. The CVs of the authors are listed in the annexes.
Table 1-3: Authors of the study
Consultant full name Position Task

Mustafa Al-Ramadhan Environmental Engineer Study preparation
Muhammed Ali Al-Harbi Environmental specialist Study preparation
Elyes Othman Environmental consultant Study preparation
Review
Ennacer Besghaeir Environmental consultant
Environmental Engineer and Approval
Atef Al- Rezgui magister degree in
environmental sciences
2 Institutional and Regulatory Framework of the Study
The NEOM project is envisaged to be developed as a Special Economic Zone (SEZ) within
the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. Therefore, national requirements for environmental impact
assessment of projects and regulatory standards for limits of environmental elements such as
noise, air and water chemistry will apply to the overall project development.
NEOM has developed a Regenerative Development Management System, which includes the
development of comprehensive, rigorous, evidence driven, and risk based Environmental and
Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) to provide confidence each individual development and the
NEOM Development as a whole is moving towards its Vision.
In addition, the project has adopted an approach to environmental sustainability which is
based on alignment with the International Finance Corporations (IFC) Sustainability
Framework, principally IFC Performance Standards (PS) 1- 8 on Environmental and Social
Sustainability (International Finance Corporation, 2012).
The present document was produced in accordance with NEOM Technical guidance 1
2.1 Institutional Framework
2.1.1 Ministry of Environment, Water & Agriculture (MEWA)

The Ministry of Environment, Water, and Agriculture (MEWA) is responsible for the regulation
and implementation of all aspects of the country’s policies for environmental, water and
agricultural sectors. The Ministry implements environmental plans and programs across the
Kingdom, with a focus on sustainability and value creation. It has widened its contribution to
the national economy through numerous programs especially in the areas of food security,
water preservation and environmental protection.
The functions and responsibilities of implementing environmental regulation have been

transferred to five national centers, which fall under the control of the Ministry of Environment,
Water and Agriculture:
• The National Center for the Development of Vegetation Cover and Combating
Desertification.
• The National Center for Environmental Compliance.
• National Center for Wildlife Development.
• The National Center for Meteorology.
• The National Center for Waste Management.
2.1.2 The National Centre for Environmental Compliance

The National Center for Environmental Compliance (NCEC) is responsible for the
environmental permitting of new and existing development. The NCEC prepare environmental
standards and impose environmental commitments on the development sector. This includes
the monitor and control of pollution levels and sources. The NCEC are responsible for issuing
the permits to construct and operate this project. This scoping report and the subsequent ESIA
1
Technical Guideline Document on Environmental & Social Assessment Reporting NEOM-NEV-TGD-002,
NEOM Environmental Department, 2020
will satisfy the NCEC requirement set forth in the Executive Regulation for Environmental
Permits for Construction and Operation.
2.1.3 NEOM Regenerative Development Management System

NEOM has developed its Regenerative Development Management System (RDMS), which
includes requirements for comprehensive, rigorous, evidence driven, and risk based
environmental and social impact assessment. The following RDMS documents are relevant
and applicable to the project:
• NEOM Environmental Codes of Practice for Construction (NEOM-NEV-TGD-702)
• Environmental and Social Risk Management Training and Awareness Program

(NEOM-NEV-TRP-801)
• Environmental Communications Procedure (NEOM-NEV-PRC-708)
• Environmental Management of Change Procedure (NEOM-NEV-PRC-702)
• Environmental and Social Compliance Assurance Standard (NEOM-NEV-TGD-

701)
• Environmental and Social Risk and Opportunity Assessment Procedure (NEOM-

NEV-PRC-601)
• Incident Identification, Investigation and Reporting Procedure (NEOM-NEV-PRC-

704)
• NEOM Environmental Management System (EMS) Template and Guidance

(NEOM-NEV-TGD-703)
2.1.4 International Finance Corporation Performance Standards on Environmental and

Social Sustainability
IFC applies the Performance Standards to manage social and environmental risks and
impacts and to enhance development opportunities in its private sector financing in its member
countries eligible for financing. The Performance Standards may also be applied by other
financial institutions choosing to support them in the proposed project. These performance
standards and guidelines provide ways and means to identify impacts and affected
stakeholders and lay down processes for management and mitigation of adverse impacts.
Together, the Client is required to meet the stipulations of all the eight Performance Standards
throughout the life of an investment in the case such an investment is being sought either form
IFC or any other institution which follows IFC standards.
Table 2-1: IFC Performance Standards and their Applicability
IFC Description Objectives Applicability

PS to the
No. project
Assessment This PS aims to assess the existing social and Applicable
1. and environmental management systems of any Contractor
Management or sub-contractor involved in the Project and to identify
of the gaps with respect to their functioning, existence
Environmental and implementation of an environmental and social
and Social management plan (ESMP), a defined EHS Policy,
Risks and organization chart with defined roles and
Impacts responsibilities, risk identification and management
procedures as well as processes like stakeholder
PS to the
No. project
engagement and grievance management.
2. Labour and This PS is guided by a number of international Applicable

Working conventions and instruments on labour and workers’
Conditions rights. It recognises that the pursuit of economic
growth through employment creation and income
generation should be accompanied by protection of
fundamental rights of workers.
The PS covers following themes: human resource
policy and management, workers’ organization, non-
discrimination and equal opportunity, retrenchment,
protecting the workforce and occupational health and
safety. This PS helps to assess the status of the
employees and workers on behalf any contractors.
The project activities will involve hiring of
approximately 800 skilled, semi- skilled and unskilled
labourers during the construction phase and solar park
staff during the operation phase. The project will have
to develop a human resource policy and ensure non-
discrimination and equal opportunity, protection of the
workforce and occupational health and safety.
Therefore, PS 2 is applicable to the Project.
3. Resource PS-3 covers the use of resources and materials as Applicable
Efficiency and inputs and wastes that could affect human health. The
Pollution objective of PS-3 is to avoid or minimize adverse
Prevention impacts on human health and the environment by
avoiding or minimizing pollution from project activities;
to promote more sustainable use of resources,
including energy and water, and to reduce project
related GHG emissions. Key themes covered under
PS-3 are pollution prevention, resource conservation
and energy efficiency, wastes, hazardous materials,
emergency preparedness and response, greenhouse
gases emissions, pesticide use and management.
This PS will assess how Contractor intends to
minimize pollution related impacts, what management
plans and systems are in place, and what measures it
plans to take to conserve and use resources more
efficiently.
The Project construction activities will lead to increase
fugitive dust emissions in the area it is being
developed due to the removing topsoil and vegetation
cover. The project activities will also lead to increase
ambient noise level during the construction phase,
which may impact the nearest campers in the area
and fauna. Furthermore, the project activities will
involve generation of waste. Therefore, PS 3 is
applicable to the Project.
4. Community This PS-4 requires due diligence to anticipate and Applicable
Health, Safety avoid adverse impacts on the health and safety of the
and Security affected community during the project life from both
routine and non-routine circumstances. It also requires
to ensure that the safeguarding of personnel and
property is carried out in accordance with relevant
human rights principles and in a manner that avoids or
minimizes risks to the affected Communities. Key
PS to the
No. project
areas of compliance screened under PS-4 includes
infrastructure/equipment safety, hazardous material
safety, natural resource issues, exposure to disease,
emergency preparedness and response, and security
personnel requirements. The project would affect the
health and safety of the communities adjacent to it
during construction phase.
The Project activities will lead to stress on the Project
access roads and on the area in general.
Transportation of equipment and increased traffic in
the area may lead to accidents and other threats on
community health and safety, therefore PS 4 is
applicable to the project.
5. Land PS-5 requires project proponents to anticipate and Not
Acquisition avoid, or where avoidance is not possible, minimize applicable
and adverse social and economic impacts from land
Involuntary acquisition or restrictions on land use. The key themes
Resettlement covered under this are: compensation and benefits for
displaced persons, consultation and grievance
mechanism, resettlement planning and
implementation, physical displacement, economic
displacement. The PS- 5 also prescribes private sector
responsibility to supplement government actions and
bridge the gap between governments assigned
entitlements and procedures and the requirements of
PS-5.
All the land areas assigned to the Project are property
of NEOM. Furthermore, the project will not lead to
resettlement, physical displacement and economic
displacement Therefore, PS 5 is not applicable to the
Project.
6. Biodiversity The requirements of this Performance Standard are Applicable
Conservation applied to projects (i) located in modified, natural, and
and critical habitats; (ii) that potentially impact on or are
Sustainable dependent on ecosystem services over which the
Management client
of Living has direct management control or significant influence;
Natural or (iii) that include the production of living natural
Resources resources (e.g., agriculture, animal husbandry,
fisheries, forestry). PS-6 screens relevant threats to
biodiversity and ecosystem services, especially
focusing on habitat loss, degradation and
fragmentation, invasive alien species, overexploitation,
hydrological changes, nutrient loading, and pollution.
The key themes covered under PS-6 are: natural
habitat, critical habitat, legally protected areas,
international introduction of alien species, and living
natural resources (natural and plantation forest,
aquatic resources etc.) are sustainably managed.
The project is located in a mosaic of “Natural Habitat”
sand dunes and outcrops.
Some threatened species (IUCN version 2019-1), was
recorded or reported from the study area and the
proposed project is expected to cause habitat loss, PS
6 is applicable.
7. Indigenous This Performance Standard applies to communities or Not
Peoples groups of Indigenous Peoples who maintain a applicable
collective attachment, i.e., whose identity as a group
or community is linked, to distinct habitats or ancestral
territories and the natural resources therein. PS-7
PS to the
No. project
endeavour to ensure that the development process
fosters full respect for the human rights, dignity,
aspirations, culture, and natural resource-based
livelihoods of Indigenous Peoples. Key themes
covered under PS-7 are avoidance of adverse
impacts, consultation and informed participation,
impacts on traditional or customary lands under use,
relocation of IPs from traditional or customary lands,
and cultural resources. No indigenous peoples are
identified in the Project area; therefore, PS 7 is not
8. Cultural For the purposes of PS-8, cultural heritage refers to (i) Applicable
Heritage tangible forms of cultural heritage; (ii) unique natural
features or tangible objects that embody cultural
values; and (iii) certain instances of intangible forms of
culture that are proposed to be used for commercial
purposes. The requirements of PS-8 apply to cultural
heritage regardless of whether or not it has been
legally protected or previously disturbed.
As confirmed during baseline work, archaeological
points of interest were identified. Therefore, PS 8 is
2.2 Regulatory Framework
This section explains the legislative basis for the proposed project outlined in the ESIA Report
and outlines the following information:
• National environmental law & regulation
• IFC / EP requirements
It provides a summary of the environmental legislative framework relevant to the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia. The legislation, guidelines and standards relevant to the development are used
as a basis for screening and evaluating the development’s impacts. These guidelines and
standards are presented as a summary. The full and most recent legislation will be consulted
prior to undertaking the assessment and the implementation of any mitigation or monitoring
plans.
The main environmental regulator with responsibility for the terrestrial environmental
management of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia’s (KSA) is the Ministry of Environment, Water and
Agriculture (MEWA).
The National Center for Environmental Compliance (NCEC) is concerned with preserving and
protecting the environment, preserving its resources, and preserving it from deterioration, by
providing high-quality services that contribute to raising the level of compliance with
environmental regulations and standards.
2.2.1 National Laws, Regulations, Standards, and Requirements
The KSA Law on Environment Impact Assessment and law supporting regulations defines the
legal requirements for the ESIA procedure.
The first comprehensive Saudi Arabian national environmental legislation was enacted on
September 24, 2001, in the form of the General Environmental Regulation, Council of
Ministers Resolution No. 193. It entered into force on October 31, 2002, and its implementation
rules were published on September 30, 2003.
2.2.1.1 The Basic Law of Governance
The Basic Law (Royal Decree No. A/90) is commonly referred to as the Constitution of Saudi
Arabia. Article 32 of the Basic Law states: “The State works for the preservation, protection
and improvement of the environment and for the prevention of pollution”.
2.2.1.2 Public Environment Law 2001 (PEL)
The Public Environmental Law (PEL) was enacted by Royal Decree No. M/34 dated 28/7/1422
H (corresponding to 16 October 2001) and established the general regulatory framework for
the development and enforcement of environmental rules and regulations in the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia. Under this law the General Authority for Meteorology and Environment
protection (GAMEP), previously the Presidency of Meteorology & Environment (PME) has
been assigned with the responsibility for the development and enforcement of environmental
rules and regulations.
The GAMEP is therefore responsible for:
• Conducting environmental studies.
• Documenting and publishing the results of any environmental studies.
• Preparing, issuing and reviewing relevant environmental standards.
• Ensuring compliance with relevant environmental standards.
• Working in conjunction with other governmental agencies, establishing plans to deal
with environmental disasters.
• Promoting general awareness for the protection of the environment.
• Environmental monitoring.
• Updating of environmental standards.
2.2.1.3 General Environmental Regulations and their Rules for Implementation
(GERRI)
The General Environmental Regulations and Rules for Implementation were enacted in
October 2001 and under this law GAMEP is responsible for issuing consent for projects to
ensure compliance with the Public Environment Law and implementing regulations. Under this
regulation, any licensing authority must ensure that an ESIA is prepared for any project that
may have a negative environmental impact.
In respect to the completion of environmental assessments, particular reference should be
made to the GERRI (2001) articles presented in Table 2-2 below.
Owners of “projects”, which are defined as utilities and facilities which may have an effect on
the environment, are required to comply with existing and future environmental specifications,
standards, measurements and guidelines as promulgated by the General Authority for
Meteorology and Environment Protection (GAMEP) previously the Presidency of Meteorology
& Environment (PME) and set out in the appendices of the Implementing Rules. Moreover,
prior to the setting up of a project, an environmental impact assessment study must be
completed and approved by GAMEP.
The detail of the legislation is contained in the appendices of the Implementing Rules, as
follows:
➢ Appendix 1: Environmental Protection Standards.
➢ Appendix 2: Fundamentals and Standards for the Assessment of
Environmental Effects of Industrial and Development Projects.
➢ Appendix 3: Guide to Environmental Accreditation Procedures.
➢ Appendix 4: Hazardous Waste Control Rules and Procedures.
➢ Appendix 5: National Contingency Plan for Combatting Marine Pollution by
Oil and other Harmful Substances in Emergency Cases.
➢ Appendix 6: All Types of Violations and Penalties.
2.2.1.4 GAMEP (NCEC) Environmental Standards

The GERRI were enacted in October 2001, and Appendix 1 of GERRI outlines the
Environmental Protection Standards relevant to facilities in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The
GAMEP (2001) General Environmental Protection Standards for New Facilities (Article 7) are
outlined as:
• All new major facilities as well as major modifications to existing facilities shall be
designed, operated and maintained so as to avoid exceedances of the ambient
environmental standards as promulgated for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia at the time
of approval of the design.
• Each new major facility or major modification of an existing facility shall incorporate the
best available technology for control of pollutant discharges and for the disposal of
wastes resulting from the operation of the facility.
• All new facilities and modifications of an existing facility shall be designed and operated
so as to avoid the discharge of any toxic substance, whether specifically regulated or
not, in sufficient quantities to be harmful to public health.
In 2012, the GAMEP developed several draft supplementary Environmental Standards
revising in part the General Standards for the Environment issued by the GAMEP in Appendix
1 to the GERRI. These Standards are listed in Table 2-2 below.
Table 2-2 : GAMEP Environmental Standards
GAMEP Environmental Standard

Topic
(GAMEP-ES)
GAMEP ES 1 Materials Recovery & Recycling
GAMEP ES 2 Mobile Source Emissions
GAMEP ES 3 Noise
GAMEP ES 4 Air Emissions for Stationary Sources
GAMEP ES 5 Prevention of Major Accidents
Storage and Material Reclamation
GAMEP ES 6
Facilities Design and Operation
Thermal Treatment and Incineration Design and
GAMEP ES 7
Operation
GAMEP ES 8 Waste Acceptance Criteria
GAMEP ES 9 Waste Classification
GAMEP ES 10 Drinking Water Quality
Biological Treatment Design and
GAMEP ES 11
Operation
GAMEP ES 12 Waste Control
GAMEP ES 13 Waste Handling and Storage
GAMEP ES 14 Waste Training
GAMEP ES 15 Waste Transportation
GAMEP Environmental Standard
Topic
(GAMEP-ES)
GAMEP ES 16 Landfill Design
GAMEP ES 17 Industrial and Municipal Wastewater Discharges
Best Practicable Environmental Option for Waste
GAMEP ES 18
Disposal
GAMEP ES 19 Ambient Air Quality
GAMEP ES 20 Ambient Water Quality
2.2.1.5 Environment Law, promulgated by Royal Decree No. (M/165) dated 11/19/1441
AH
The first comprehensive Saudi Arabian National Environmental legislation was enacted in
2001 in the form of the General Environmental Regulation. It entered into force in 2002, and
its Implementing Rules were published in 2003. The Environment Law, promulgated by Royal
Decree No. (M/165) dated 19 Dhu al-Qadah1441 AH (corresponding to 10 July 2020) entered
into force in January 2021, superseding the 2001 Regulation.
Under the General Environmental Regulation, the Presidency of Meteorology and
Environment (the PME), was charged with the general supervision of environmental affairs in
Saudi Arabia and had the responsibility of granting environmental permits. In 2019, the PME’s
functions and responsibilities were transferred to four Centres for the environment sector
development: The National Centre for Environmental Compliance (NCEC), the National
Centre for Vegetation Cover and Combating Desertification, the National Centre for Wildlife
and the National Centre for Meteorology. The Ministry of Agriculture was renamed to the
Ministry of Environment, Water and Agriculture (MEWA) in 2016, and now handles
responsibilities related to environmental sustainability as well.
The current Environment Law has granted the National Centre for Monitoring Environmental
Compliance with full powers to assume the responsibility of protecting the environment in the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and to issue environmental standards and guidelines, including
environmental legislation and standards for various industrial and construction activities. This
Law consisting of 49 articles divided into 9 Chapters aims at protecting the environment, its
development and sustainability, adherence to environmental principles, and the regulation of
the environment sector and related activities and services.
According to Article 8 of the Environmental Law, both the authorized person and the licensee
who engage in activities that may emit emissions or pollutants, or that may affect the
environment; commit to the following environmental requirements, controls, procedures, and
standards; determined by the regulations:
• Take the necessary actions and measures when approaching the environmental
standards exceedance as specified by the regulations.
• Develop programs and devices to monitor, measure and control the quality of
environmental media, in accordance with the regulations.
• Provide the competent authority - on a regular basis - with data and reports related to
emissions or pollutants emanating from its activities; To review and conform them, and
to identify violations of standards, and requirements, in accordance with what is
specified by the regulations.
• Provide the competent authority with an environmental audit study, as determined by
the regulations.
• Rehabilitate environmental environments degraded as a result of the exercise of its
activities, as determined by the regulations.
Finally, the Environment Law, after its entry into force, cancels the following Regulations,
among others:
• Regulation of Saudi Wildlife Authority, issued by Royal Decree No. (M/22) dated
12/09/1406 AH
• Regulation of Trade in Endangered Wildlife and their products, issued by Royal Decree
No. (M/9) dated 03/06/1421 AH
• General Regulations for the Environment, issued by Royal Decree No. (M/34) dated
28/07/1422 AH (GERRI 2001). [NOTE: As an exception to sub-paragraph of GERRI,
the provisions relating to waste contained in the General Environmental Regulation -
issued by Royal Decree No. (M/34) dated 7/28/1422 AH - continue until the issuance
of its provisions and work accordingly]
• Law of Protected Areas for Wildlife, issued by Royal Decree No. (M/66) dated
19/10/1436 AH
The Environmental Law is implemented through Executive Regulations in different areas
including:
• Environmental Inspection and Audit.
• Ozone-depleting Substances and Carbon Compounds.
• Environmental Permits for Establishment and Operation of Activities.
• Environmental Rehabilitation for Degraded Sites and Remediation of Polluted Sites
• Prevention and Treatment of Soil Pollution
• Air Quality
• Control of Violations and Imposition of Penalties
• Noise
• Environmental Services Providers
• Protection of Aquatic Environments from Pollution
• Trade in Wildlife and their Products and Derivates
2.2.1.6 Water law
The Saudi Arabian water Law aims to (in Article 2):
• preserve, develop, and protect water resources; ensure their sustainability; and
manage and regulate such resources, as well as rights related thereto and to
their uses;
• ensure the fair provision of safe, clean, reliable, high-quality water supplies to
consumers at reasonable competitive prices, to meet their needs;
• enhance the private sector’s engagement in activities subject to this Law, and
promote effective governance;
• fulfill consumers’ needs by providing access to clean and safe water that meets
approved specifications in accordance with approved standards, plans, and
programs; and
• ensure the provision of water supplies to the agricultural sector to maintain its
sustainability.
In Article 21
• Wastewater may not be used for any purposes under any circumstances.
• Treated wastewater may not be used for any purpose or activity, or be
discharged, except in accordance with standards and usage priorities approved
by the Ministry.
• Sanitary or industrial wastewater may not be transported or collected, or
disposed of or discharged using the sewage network, tanks, or any other means,
except after obtaining a service provision license.
In Article 22
1. Ministry inspectors may, in coordination with the relevant government agencies, access
farms that use treated water for monitoring and inspection in order to verify compliance
with the terms of the license, and for taking measurements and samples to ensure that
treated water and the products and plants irrigated therewith are free from contaminants
and do not pose a risk to health or the environment.
2. If Ministry inspectors are prevented from accessing farms to carry out their duties, the
Ministry may coordinate with the relevant agencies to take measures necessary to grant
them access.
In Article 23
Tertiary treated wastewater shall not be used for drinking, household purposes, or in food
industries. It may be used for other purposes after ensuring that it is suitable, safe, and
contaminant-free, in accordance with the rules and conditions specified in the Ministry’s
regulations.
In Article 24:
An irrigation system shall, in order to protect water resources from pollution, include an
integrated drainage system to collect and dispose of excess irrigation water in a safe manner,
as specified in the Ministry’s regulations.
In Article 25:
Secondary treated water may be used for restricted irrigation, and in industry, mining,
construction, and other similar activities, after ensuring that it is safe and contaminant-free,
in accordance with the rules and conditions specified in the Ministry’s regulations.
In Article 26:
All government and private agencies shall coordinate with a licensed service provider prior
to connecting wastewater to sewage networks, or prior to collecting wastewater by tanks and
discharging it into a treatment plant in the absence of a sewage network, as specified in the
Authority’s regulations.
In Article 27:
Sludge shall be used in accordance with rules and standards issued by the Ministry for the
protection of public health and the environment.
In Article 28:
1. Issuing a license to establish a facility, granting final approvals and clearances, or

supplying water to a facility, shall require:
a) a suitable wastewater disposal system that can be connected to collection and
treatment systems during planning and execution; and
b) a plant for treatment of urban or industrial wastewater that is licensed by the Authority
and that conforms with the technical standards and requirements specified by the
Authority, in the absence of a sewage network.
2. Authority Regulations shall determine government or private facilities that are governed
by paragraphs (1)(a) and (b) of this Article.
In Article 29:
If sewage networks are available, the owner shall connect to such networks; otherwise, he
shall establish his own wastewater treatment plant, in accordance with the Authority’s
regulations.
In Article 30:
Rainwater, groundwater, agricultural drain water, and the like, or water originating from
construction sites shall not be discharged into the public sewage network without obtaining
the approval of the licensed service provider, in accordance with the license requirements
set by the Authority.
In Article 31:
The owners of oil factories, car wash stations, restaurants, kitchens, and the like shall, after
obtaining the approval of the licensed service provider, install and maintain grease or oil traps
in accordance with the license specifications as determined by the Authority.
In Article 60:
1. The Ministry shall monitor compliance with the quality standards of water used for
agricultural purposes.
2. The Authority shall monitor the quality of water used by a licensed service provider during
production, transfer, distribution, and storage, and shall ensure compliance with the
standards and specifications approved by the Ministry.
3. The provisions of paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article shall not apply to bottled water.
In Article 61:
The Ministry shall issue and update standards, specifications, and requirements for
protecting water resources and the environment from pollution.
In Article 62:
Any action that causes harm to water resources or their infrastructures shall be prohibited,
subject to the Ministry’s regulations.
In Article 63:
The Ministry of Energy, Ministry of Industry and Mineral Resources, and Ministry of Municipal
and Rural Affairs and Housing shall, each within its jurisdiction, take the necessary measures
to prevent the leakage into the water-bearing layers of hydrocarbon and toxic materials
emanating from oil and gas wells, refineries, distribution plants, factories, petrol stations, and
maintenance centers of vehicles and machinery. In the event of any leakage, they shall
notify the Ministry and address its impact on health and the environment.
In Article 64:
A licensee shall maintain a safe distance, as set by the Authority’s regulations, between
wastewater collection networks and water resources, including their transportation and
distribution systems and tanks, and shall take all necessary measures to avoid leakage of
wastewater into water resources or their transportation and distribution systems or tanks.
2.2.1.7 Solid waste law

Saudi Arabia has published a new Waste Management Law on September 15 th, 2021. This law
aims to regulate the transport, segregation, storage, import, export, safe disposal of waste and all
other activities related to it. This law replaces Municipal Solid Waste Management Law enacted by
the Royal Decree no. M/48 of 2013.
All concerned parties must recycle, retrieve resources, and ensure safe disposal in order to
achieve better environmental and economical results.
According to article 11 of this law waste producers must conserve natural resources and materials,
reuse products, reduce waste, store it in the designated areas, and separate it for the purpose of
reuse or recycle.
Article 14 holds the manufacturers/importers an extended responsibility for their products to ensure
financial sustainability in the waste management sector and therefore enforce the concept of
circular economy. The rules and procedures concerned will be determined in the executive
regulation for this law.
Article 16 to 18 prescribe the different responsibilities of waste related service providers. For
example, disposal service providers must adhere to the disposal methods set by the National
Waste Management Center (NWMC). As for hazardous waste transporters, they must use means
of transportation that conform with NWMC standards, place warning labels and ensure the
existence of documentation about the transported hazardous waste.
This law also regulates the import and export of waste as well as dealing with emergency
situations. Article 19 prohibits the import of hazardous waste without a permit. It also prohibits the
import of recycled waste in addition to recycled used products, devices and equipment. This law
will take affect November 14th 2021.
2.2.1.8 Law of Antiquities, Museums and Urban Heritage promulgated by Royal Decree
M/3 dated 9/1/1436 AH
This law states in Article 9 that:
- Archaeological and urban heritage sites shall be preserved when carrying out projects for
planning, expansion, or improvement of urban or rural areas. In addition, easement rights shall
be taken into consideration, including designation of construction-free areas, in coordination
with the Ministry of Municipal and Rural Affairs. Planning projects, in which, or in the vicinity
of which, there are archaeological and urban heritage sites, may not be adopted without the
approval of SCTA (Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities).
- Licenses for construction or renovation in areas adjacent to archaeological and urban
heritage sites may not be issued without SCTA’s agreement
In Article 24 it is stated:
1. Activities may not be carried out within the limits of archaeological and urban heritage sites
without the prior approval of SCTA:
a) Whole or partial demolition.
b) Utility, communication, and road works, as well as any activity or process that may change
the physical appearance of the archaeological and urban heritage sites, or buildings thereon,
or disturb their archaeological layers.
c) New construction or landscaping projects.
2. SCTA shall respond within 60 days from the date of receipt of the application for performing
any of the activities set out in paragraph 1 of this Article.
3. Activities set out in paragraph 1 of this Article shall be subject to SCTA’s control.
4. SCTA shall, in coordination with the Ministry of Interior and the Ministry of Municipal and
Rural Affairs, develop technical and procedural mechanisms for dealing with any dilapidated
heritage buildings.
2.2.1.9 The executive regulations
These Executive Regulations are approved by Ministerial Decision of the Minister of
Environment, Water and Agriculture and based on Article 48 of the Environmental Law and
Cabinet Resolution No. (729) dated 16/ 11/1441 AH. The following is a brief description of the
Regulations that are mainly applicable to the project:
2.2.1.9.1 Executive Regulations for Environmental Permits for Establishment and
Operation of Activities
According to the Executive Regulations for Environmental Permits for Establishment and
Operation of Activities, the provisions of this Regulations shall apply to all persons who own
or operate any activity that has an environmental impact (new or existing) within the territory
of the Kingdom including establishment, modification, addition, expansion or closure.
The National Centre for Environmental Compliance is entrusted with the following tasks:
• Issuing technical standards and controls related to environmental impact assessment

studies in coordination with the competent environmental centres.
• Receiving and reviewing environmental classification forms and environmental impact
assessment studies and issuing relevant decisions.
• Issuing up-to-date indicative lists to classify the various activities in accordance with
the provisions of the regulation.
• Defining and approving the rules, conditions and controls related to environmental
permits and licenses.
• Carrying out field visits to the sites required to be authorized, when needed.
• Monitor the implementation of the environmental management plan during all phases
of any environmentally authorized activity.
• Request and review self-monitoring reports during construction and operation
processes.
• Issuing and renewing environmental permits and licenses and collecting the fees
specified for them.
• Monitoring and supervising the implementation of the requirements of environmental
permits and licenses.
• Inspection, monitoring and detection of violations of these Regulations; Coordination
with the competent authority at the Ministry of Interior when needed with regard to the
work of arresting violators.
• Coordination with other national environmental centres whenever the activity or studies
presented are related to the competencies or powers of these centres.
• Coordination with laboratories, scientific and research centres and experts whenever
the need arises when reviewing environmental impact assessment studies.
• Ensure that all environmental impact assessment studies, analyses, tests and
environmental measurements contained in these studies are provided by a service
provider licensed by the Centre.
The NCEC categorizes or revises the classification of activities according to environmental
impacts into categories specified in this regulation as follows:
• Type and volume of activity.
• Energy used.
• Activity depletion of natural resources.
• Land uses.
• Sensitive receptors in areas surrounding the activity.
• The characteristics of environmental impacts, including:
• The nature of the effects (negative or positive, direct or indirect, cumulative…etc).
• The range of the effects.
• Duration of effects.
• The ability of effects to be reversible and return to normal before effects.
• The possibility of effects.
• Level/level of impacts (global - regional - local).
The head of the Centre shall issue updated indicative lists to classify the various activities in
accordance with the provisions of the regulations.
Activities are classified into three categories according to the environmental impacts resulting
from them and accordingly, their need to conduct an environmental impact assessment study
or not. This classification shall be as follows:
• First category: Activities that are expected to cause minimal impacts on the
environment that do not exceed the limits of the activity site.
• Second category: Activities that are expected to cause moderate impacts on the
environment through the different phases of the activity and these effects can be
reduced and controlled and they do not significantly exceed the limits of the activity
site.
• Third category: Activities that are expected to cause significant environmental and
social impacts. These impacts exceed the boundaries of the activity site and may
negatively affect the sustainability of sensitive areas and receptors.
Referring to the Environment Law, promulgated by Royal Decree No. (M/165) dated 19 Dhu
al-Qadah1441 AH (corresponding to 10 July 2020) the PV solar plant of Airport West project
is classified as a Category Three which calls for a comprehensive environmental impact
assessment.
An environmental permit will be required before starting any construction or modification of
the activity and to operate before operating or practicing any activity.
Figure 2-1: NCEC ESIA Flow process
2.2.1.9.2 The Executive Regulation for Environmental Inspection and Audit

According to the Executive Regulations for Environmental inspection and audit, the provisions
of this Regulations shall apply to all persons who own or operate any activity that has an
environmental impact (new or existing) within the territory of the Kingdom including
establishment, modification, addition, expansion or closure.
The National Centre for Environmental Compliance is entrusted with the following tasks:
• Preparing the methodology for environmental inspection for different activities based
on the international best practices
• Prepare and implement an annual environmental inspection plan
• Inspect, control and penalties
• Inspection, Control and Detecting violations of the environmental law or executive
regulations and coordinating with the competent authority at the Ministry of Interior
when needed with regard to security monitoring work and arresting violators
• Reviewing people's environmental self-inspection reports and ensuring environmental
compliance and the effectiveness of approved self-inspection programs
• Preparing requirements and controls related to environmental audit studies
• Reviewing reports of environmental audit studies and issuing relevant decisions
• Follow up the commitment of people to implement what is stipulated in the
environmental self-inspection reports, environmental audit study reports, and action
plans to implement corrective measures
• Issuance of environmental compliance certificates
• Coordination with other national environmental Center when needed with regard to
inspection work whenever the submitted reports and plans are related to the
competencies or powers of these Center.
Environmental inspection are classified into 5 categories. This classification shall be as
follows:
1- Periodic inspection: It is carried out in accordance with the annual plans for
environmental inspection in order to verify compliance with the rules and regulations
and requirements of licenses and permits.
2- Environmental emergency inspection: It is carried out after the occurrence of any
emergency to ensure that all corrective and precautionary measures have been taken.
3- Inspection to verify the validity of reports and data: It is carried out to verify the
correctness of the information provided through reports and data submitted to the
center
4- Inspection upon receiving environmental complaints or communications: Execution is
carried out after receiving complaints or reports to the center and based on what the
center decides that the complaints or communications require inspection.
5- Inspection in partnership with the relevant authorities: In the event of the formation of
committees from several specialized bodies working to study any cases related to the
environment sector, emergency or environmental disaster related to all participating
parties, or at the request of the supervisory authority.
The center conducts the inspection by sending specialized inspectors to:
• review records and data and keep copies of them

• Take pictures for documentation
• Carry out any operations required for inspection/examination/measurement/or testing
• Take samples of materials / soil / water.
• Ensure that the environmental management plan is implemented
• Detecting violations and taking action
• Document the results of the inspection process and providing companies with a copy
of it to take the necessary corrective measures
Environmental auditing
According to the Executive Regulations for Environmental inspection and audit, both the
authorized person and the licensee who engage in activities that may emit emissions or
pollutants, or that may affect the environment; commit to provide the competent authority with
an environmental audit study, as determined by the regulations in case of renew the
environmental permit to construct or to operate or if required from the center.
2.2.1.9.3 The Executive Regulation for Control of Violations and Imposition of
Penalties
This regulation sets out the method and procedures for detecting violations of environmental
law and regulations, investigating, and proving them by the inspectors. They may request
assistance and support from the security authorities when needed.
Anyone who violates the obligations of law or regulations, as indicated in the penalties tables
attached to the regulations, shall be punished.
The violator must remove the consequences of the violation and rehabilitate the environment
in accordance with the requirements and standards set by the competent authority (Violations
are seized by writing a seizure report that includes information on the location, date, details,
time of seizure, the names of the violators, their nationalities, and their identification numbers,
…etc.)
2.2.1.9.4 The Executive Regulation for Prevention and Treatment of Soil Pollution
The Executive Regulations for Prevention and Treatment of Soil Pollution establish the
provisions related to soil and its protection from pollution Including preventive measures to
prevent pollution and treat soil after pollution. They include “Standards for protecting soil from
pollution” in its Annex (1). Table 2-3 included in Annex 1 is shown below:
Table 2-3 : Standards for protecting soil from pollution
Parameter Unit Value

PH PH Unit 8,5
Cyanide (free) mg/kg 8
Fluoride mg/kg 2,000
Sulphur (elemental) mg/kg 500
Metals
Antimony mg/kg 40
Arsenic (inorganic) mg/kg 26
Barium (non-barite) mg/kg 2,000
Barite - Barium mg/kg 140,00
Beryllium mg/kg 8
Boron (Standard Phase extract) mg/kg 5
Cadmium mg/kg 22
Chromium (Hexavalent) mg/kg 1,4
Chromium (Total) mg/kg 87
Cobalt mg/kg 300
Copper mg/kg 91
Lead mg/kg 600
Mercury (Inorganic) mg/kg 50
Molybdenum mg/kg 40
Nickel mg/kg 89
Selenium mg/kg 2,9
Silver mg/kg 40
Thallium mg/kg 1
Tin mg/kg 300
Uranium mg/kg 300
Vanadium mg/kg 130
Zinc mg/kg 360
Organic
Benzene (C6H6) mg/kg 0,046
Toluene (C7H8) mg/kg 0,52
Ethylbenzene mg/kg 0,073
Xylenes mg/kg 0,99
Styrene mg/kg 0,68
F1 (C6 to C10) mg/kg 640
F2 (C10 to C16) mg/kg 520
F3 (C16 to C24) mg/kg 4,300
F4 (C24 to C50) mg/kg 10,000
Acenaphthene (C12H10) mg/kg 0,32
Anthracene (C14H10) mg/kg 0,0046
Fluoranthene (C16H10) mg/kg 0,032
Fluorene (C13H10) mg/kg 0,29
Naphthalene (C10,H8) mg/kg 0,014
Phenanthrene (C14H10) mg/kg 0,051
Pyrene (C16H10) mg/kg 0,034
Carcinogenic (PAHs mg/kg 1
Benz[a]anthracene (C18H12) mg/kg 0,07
Benzo[b+j]fluoranthene mg/kg
Benzo[k]fluoranthene (C20H12) mg/kg
Benzo [a]payrene (C20H12) mg/kg 0,7
Chrysene (C18H12) mg/kg
Vinyl chloride (C2H3Cl) mg/kg 0,014
1,1-Dichloroethene (C2H3,Cl2) mg/kg 0,15
Trichloroethene (Trichloroethylene, TCE) mg/kg 0,054
Tetrachloroethene (C2Cl4) mg/kg 0,26
1,2-Dichloroethane (C2H4Cl2) mg/kg 0,15
Dichloromethane (Methylene chloride)(CH2Cl2) mg/kg 0,1
Trichloromethane (Chloroform)(CHCL3) mg/kg 0,0029
Tetrachloromethane (Carbon tetrachloride)(CCl4) mg/kg 0,027
Dibromochloromethane (CHBr2Cl) mg/kg 0,91
Chlorobenzene (C6H5Cl) mg/kg 0,61
1,2-Dichlorobenzene (C6H4Cl2) mg/kg 0,097
1,4-Dichlorobenzene (C6H4Cl2) mg/kg 0,051
1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene (C6H3Cl3) mg/kg 0,26
1,2,3,4-Tetrachlorobenzene (C6H2Cl4) mg/kg 0,042
1,2,3,5-Tetrachlorobenzene (C6H2,Cl4) mg/kg 0,37
1,2,4,5-Tetrachlorobenzene (C6H2Cl4) mg/kg 0,19
Pentachlorobenzene (C6HCl5) mg/kg 3,7
Hexachlorobenzene (C4Cl2) mg/kg 3,6
2,4-Dichloropheneol (C6H4Cl2O) mg/kg 0,0029
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol (C6H2Cl3OH) mg/kg 0,19
2,3,4,6-Tetrachlorophenol (C6H3Cl4O) mg/kg 0,039
Pentachlorophenol (C6HCl5O) mg/kg 0,024
Dioxins & Furans mg/kg 0,000004
Polychlorinated biphenyl (PCBs) mg/kg 33
Aldicarb (C7H14N2O2S) mg/kg 0,041
Aldrin (Cl2H8Cl6) mg/kg 5,9
Atrazine and metabolites mg/kg 0,0077
Azniphos-methyl (C10PN3H12S2O3) mg/kg 0,41
Bendiocarb (C11H13NO4) mg/kg 0,14
Bromacil (C9H13BrN2O2) mg/kg 0,009
Bromoxynil (C7H3Br2NO) mg/kg 0,044
Carbaryl (C12H11NO2) mg/kg 1,9
Carbofuran (Cl2H15NO3) mg/kg 0,68
Chlorothalonil (C8Cl4N2) mg/kg 0,0084
Chlorpyrifos (C9H11Cl3NO3PS) mg/kg 49
Cyanazine (C9H13ClN6) mg/kg 0.12
2,4-Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid (C8H6Cl2O3) mg/kg 0.43
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (C14H9Cl5) mg/kg 12
Diazinon (C12H21N2O3PS) mg/kg 2,2
Dicamba (C8H6Cl2O3) mg/kg 0,5
Dichlofop-methyl (C16H14Cl2O4) mg/kg 2
Dieldrin (C12H8Cl6O) mg/kg 0,59
Dimethoate (C5H12NO3PS2) mg/kg 0,0058
Dinoseb (C10H12N2O5) mg/kg 2,7
Diquat (C12H12Br2N2) mg/kg 11
Diuron (C9H10Cl2N2O) mg/kg 1,9
Endosulfan (C9H6Cl6O3S) mg/kg 0,0013
Endrin (C13H8Cl6O) mg/kg 2,4
Glyphosate (C3H8NO5P) mg/kg 0,054
Heptachlor epoxide (C10H5Cl7O) mg/kg 0,039
Lindane (C6H6Cl6) mg/kg 0,31
Linuron (C9H10Cl2N2O2) mg/kg 0,051
Malathion (C10H19O6PS2) mg/kg 0,82
MCPA mg/kg 0,42
Methoxychlor (C16H15Cl3O2) mg/kg 0,046
Metolachlor (C15H22ClNO2) mg/kg 0,048
Metribuzin (C8H14N4OS) mg/kg 0,024
Paraquat (as dichloride) mg/kg 1,1
Parathion (C10H14NO5PS) mg/kg 7,2
Phorate (C7H17O2PS3) mg/kg 0,075
Picloram (C6H3Cl3N2O2) mg/kg 0,024
Simazine (C7H12ClN5) mg/kg 0,033
Tebuthiuron (C9H16N4OS) mg/kg 0,6
Terbufos (C9H21O2PS3) mg/kg 0,08
Toxaphene (C10H8Cl8) mg/kg 3,3
Triallate (C10H16Cl3NOS) mg/kg 0,0077
Trifluralin (CC13H16F3N3O4) mg/kg 0,038
Aniline (C6H5NH2) mg/kg 0,36
Bis (2-ethyl-hexyl)phthalate (C24H38O4) mg/kg 34
Dibutyl phthalate (C16H22O4) mg/kg 0,54
Dichlorobenzidine mg/kg 4,2
Diethanolamine (C4H11NO2) mg/kg 2
Diethylene glycol (C4H10O3) mg/kg 10
Diisopropanolamine (C6H15NO2) mg/kg 14
Ethylene Glycol (C2H6O2) mg/kg 60
Hexachlorobutadiene (C4Cl6) mg/kg 0,036
Methanol CH3OH mg/kg 37
Methylmethacrylate (C5H8O2) mg/kg 1,3
Monoethanolamides (C2H7NO) mg/kg 20
Methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE) mg/kg 0,044
Nonylphenol + ethoxylates mg/kg 14
Phenol C6H6O) mg/kg 0,0028
Sulfonate ((CH2)4SO2) mg/kg 0,18
Tri-ethylene glycol (C6H14O4) mg/kg 100
Radionuclides
Uranium -238 Series (all progeny) Bq/kg 0,3
Uranium - 238 (238U, 234Th, 234mPa, 234U) Bq/kg 10
Thorium-230 Bq/kg 10
Radium -226(in equilibrium with its progeny) Bq/kg 0,3
Lead-210 (in equilibrium with 210 Bi and 210 Po) Bq/kg 0,3
Thorium-232 Series (all progeny) Bq/kg 0,3
Thorium-232 Bq/kg 10
Radium-228 (in equilibrium with 228AC) Bq/kg 0,3
Thorium-228 (in equilibrium with its progeny) Bq/kg 0,3
Potassium-40 Bq/kg 17
2.2.1.9.5 Executive regulations for the protection of aquatic environments from

pollution
The Ministry of Environment, Water and Agriculture announced the start of implementing the
executive regulations for the protection of aquatic environments from pollution in all regions of
the Kingdom, based on the environment system issued by Royal Decree No. (M/165) dated
11/19/1441 AH.
The ministry explained that the regulation applies to all persons and activities related to aquatic
environments and aims to define the scope of the work of the National Center for Controlling
Environmental Compliance with regard to protecting aquatic environments from pollution, by
proposing standards, controls and requirements, and preparing and implementing plans
aimed at reducing pollution of aquatic environments.
Mitigating its effects, proposing programs, studies and research related to aquatic
environments, periodic monitoring and evaluation of environmental indicators, determining the
procedures and measures to be taken when people approach exceeding standards related to
aquatic environments, approving rules and requirements related to licenses or permits for
environmental works or activities that have environmental impacts, and issuing Permits and
licenses, collecting the financial compensation, organizing various activities for environmental
guidance, in addition to inspection and control of violations, imposing penalties, and
coordinating with the concerned authorities to enforce the regulation.
The Executive Regulations for the protection of aquatic environments from pollution establish
the provisions related to water (coastal waters, Surface water and underground water) and its
protection from pollution Including preventive measures to prevent pollution. They include
“Ambient water quality standards” in its Annex (1) (see Table 2-4).
Table 2-4: Ambient Water Quality Standards
Coastal Water Surface Water Ground Water

Component / Indicator Unit Normal High value Industrial (Unsuitable for (Potable unless
Drinking) NBL* specified)
Physical Standards
Color N/A 5 5 - -
Temperature Δ(1) Celsius 3 2 4 NBL* NBL*
Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/L NBL* NBL* NBL* 5,000 NBL*
Turbidity 3 2 5 30 NBL*
Chemical Standards
Aldrin mg/L 2.2x10-6 2.2x10-6 2.2x10-6 2.2x10-6 2.2x10-6
Aluminium mg/L 0.2 0.2 1 0.2 0.2
Ammonia mg/L 0.1 0.05 1 0.1 0.3
Arsenic mg/L 0.05 0.05 0.069 0.15 0.0075
Barium mg/L 0.5 0.5 1 0.5 1
Benzene mg/L 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.002
Biological Oxygen mg/L 15 10 20 10 -
Demand (BOD)
Cadmium mg/L 0.008 0.008 0.04 0.000025 0.003
Calcium mg/L NBL* NBL* NBL* NBL* NBL*
Carbon Tetrachloride mg/L 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.005
Chlordane mg/L
4x10-6 3.2x10-7
0.00009
4.3x10-6 3.1x10-7 e
Chloride mg/L NBL* NBL* NBL* NBL* NBL*
Chlorine mg/L 0.0075 0.0075 0.013 0.019 0.01
Chloroform mg/L 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.06
Chromium mg/L 0.05 0.002 0.05 0.05 0.037
Cobalt mg/L 0.05 0.05 1 0.05 0.05
Chemical Oxygen Demand mg/L 25 20 40 25 -
(COD)
Copper mg/L 0.003 0.003 0.0135 0.05 1.5
Cyanide (free) mg/L 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.001
Dichloro-diphenyl- mg/L 1.7x10-5 1.7x10-5 1.7x10-5 1.7x10-5 1.7x10-5
trichloroethane (DDT)
Dieldrin mg/L 4x10-6 4x10-6 4x10-6 4x10-6 4x10-6
Dissolved Oxygen mg/L Minimum: 5 Minimum: 5 Minimum: 4 Minimum: 5 N/A
Endrin mg/L 6 x10-6 6 x10-6 6 x10-6 8.6 x10-5 3 x10-5
Fluoride mg/L 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.4 0.2
Furans mg/L 1x10-6 1x10-6 1x10-6 1x10-6 1x10-6
Heptachlor mg/L 5x10-6 5x10-6 5x10-6 5x10-6 5.9 x10-9
Hexachlorobenzene mg/L 2.9x10-7 2.9x10-7 2.9x10-7 5x10-5 2.9x10-7

Iron mg/L 0.5 0.1 1 0.5 0.2
Lead mg/L 0.008 0.005 0.21 0.01 0.0075
Lindane mg/L 1.2x10-5 1.2x10-5 1.2x10-5 1.2x10-5 0.0002
Manganese mg/L 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.05
Mercury mg/L 0.0004 0.0004 0.0001 0.00007 0.00075
Mirex mg/L 1x10-6 1x10-6 1x10-6 1x10-6 1x10-6
Methyltert-butylether (MtBE) mg/L 5 5 5 10 0.02
Nickel mg/L 0.05 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.02
Oil & Grease mg/L 2 Maximum: 1 3 3 0
Polycyclic Aromatic mg/L 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.0002
Hydrocarbon (PAH)
Polychlorinated Biphenyls mg/L 1.9x10-6 1.9x10-6 1.9x10-6 1.9x10-6 1.9x10-6
(PCBs)
Pentachlorophenol mg/L 0.00004 0.00004 0.005 0.019 0.00003
pH (2) pH 6.5 - 8.5 6.5 -8.5 6.5 -8.5 6.5 -9 6.5 -9
Maximum: Δ0.2 Maximum: Δ0.1 Maximum: Δ0.3
Total Petroleum mg/L 0.3 0.2 0.5 0.3 0.2
Hydrocarbons
Phenols mg/L 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.005
Silvex (2,4,5-TP) mg/L - - - - 0.05
Total Organic Carbon mg/L 10 10 15 10 NBL*
(TOC)
Salinity % 0 0 3 NBL* NBL*
Selenium mg/L 0.071 0.071 0.29 - 0.007
Silver mg/L 0.0019 0.0019 0.2 0.0032 0.0032
Sodium mg/L NBL* NBL* NBL* 150 150
Sulfate mg/L NBL* NBL* NBL* 200 NBL*
Sulfide mg/L 0.002 0.002 1 0.002 0.002
Tetrachlorodibenzodiox mg/L 3x10-8 3x10-8 3x10-8 3x10-8 3x10-8
in (TCDD)
Toluene mg/L 0.002 0.001 0.002 0.002 0.002
Toxaphene mg/L 2x10-7 2x10-7 2.1x10-5 2.1x10-6 7x10-7
Trichloroethane mg/L 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001
Vinyl Chloride mg/L 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.001
Xylenes mg/L 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005
Zinc mg/L 0.08 0.08 0.09 0.12 0.02
Microbiological Standards
Cyanobacteria mg/L 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 -
pH (2) pH 6.5 - 8.5 6.5 -8.5 6.5 -8.5 6.5 -9 6.5 -9
Maximum: Δ0.2 Maximum: Δ0.1 Maximum: Δ0.3
Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons mg/L 0.3 0.2 0.5 0.3 0.2
Phenols mg/L 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.005
Silvex (2,4,5-TP) mg/L - - - - 0.05
Total Organic Carbon mg/L 10 10 15 10 NBL*
(TOC)
Salinity % 0 0 3 NBL* NBL*
Selenium mg/L 0.071 0.071 0.29 - 0.007
Silver mg/L 0.0019 0.0019 0.2 0.0032 0.0032
Sodium mg/L NBL* NBL* NBL* 150 150
Sulfate mg/L NBL* NBL* NBL* 200 NBL*
Sulfide mg/L 0.002 0.002 1 0.002 0.002
Tetrachlorodibenzodiox mg/L 3x10-8 3x10-8 3x10-8 3x10-8 3x10 -8
in (TCDD)
Toluene mg/L 0.002 0.001 0.002 0.002 0.002
Toxaphene mg/L 2x10-7 2x10-7 2.1x10-5 2.1x10-6 7x10 -7
Trichloroethane mg/L 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001
Vinyl Chloride mg/L 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.001
Xylenes mg/L 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005
Zinc mg/L 0.08 0.08 0.09 0.12 0.02
Cyanobacteria mg/L 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 -
Ecoli Number / Maximum: 500 Maximum: 250 Maximum: 500 Maximum: 0
100 ml 600
Intestinal Enterococci Number / Maximum: 200 Maximum: 100 Maximum: 200 Maximum: 230 0
100 ml
(*) NBL: Natural Background Level, not affected by any human activity, of the component in nature. Note: The NBL does not necessarily have to be lower than the levels that
are considered safe for humans or wildlife species.
(1) Differences in Temperature (ΔT): It is the maximum temperature difference between the mixing zone – measured on the mixing zone’s borders which are determined in
accordance with Appendix (5) of this Executive Regulations – and the water near the mixing zone – measured outside the industrial coastal water, for example, where the mixing
zone is in the nearby public or high-value coastal water. In case the mixing zone is in a non-industrial coastal water, the temperature difference between the direct source of
discharge and the mixing zone’s borders is measured. The Center may propose amendments to the requirements for measuring differences in temperature in ambient water, for
the Ministry’s approval.
(2) Differences in Acidity Level (Δ pH): It is the maximum difference in acidity level between the mixing zone - measured on the mixing zone’s borders which are determined
in accordance with Appendix (5) of this Executive Regulations – and the water near the mixing zone – measured outside the industrial coastal water where the mixing zone is,
for example, in the nearby public or high-value coastal water. In case the mixing zone is in a non-industrial coastal water, the difference in acidity level between the direct source
of discharge and the mixing zone’s borders is measured. The Center may propose amendments to the requirements for measuring differences in acidity level in ambient water,
for the Ministry’s approval.
The regulation specifies in its annex (2) and annex (3) respectively the standards pertaining
to treated wastewater prior to discharge to coastal and marine waters (Table 2-5) and
standards Pertaining to Treated Wastewater Prior to Discharge to Soil, Land, or Surface Water
(Table 2-6).
Table 2-5: Standards Pertaining to Treated Wastewater Prior to Discharge to Coastal and Marine
Waters
Component Unit Average Interval Parameter

Average Value
(Maximum for
any
Sample)
Physical Standards
Fat Oil and Grease (FOG) (Total mg/L Sample (2)
Extractable)
Turbidity Turbidity Unit Sample (5)
∆ Temperature (1) ∆ °C Sample (5)
Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/L 30 days 25 (40)
Chemical Standards
Biological Oxygen Demand mg/L 30 days 10 (25)
(BOD5)
Chemical Oxygen Demand mg/L 30 days 20 (50)
(COD)
Dissolved Oxygen (DO) mg/L Sample (Minimum: 2.0)
Ammoniacal Nitrogen (NH3, NH4- mg/L 30 days 1.9
N)
Nitrate Nitrogen (NO3-N) mg/L 30 days 10
Phosphate (PO4) mg/L 30 days 1
Free Chlorine mg/L Sample (Minimum: 0.1)
Phenols (Total) mg/L Annual Average of 0.1
Monthly Samples
pH - Sample (6.5 - 9)
Aluminum `(Al) mg/L Annual Average of 5
Monthly Samples
Arsenic (As) mg/L Annual Average of 0.036
Monthly Samples
Barium (BA) mg/L Annual Average of 1
Monthly Samples
Cyanide (Cy) mg/L Annual Average of 0.05
Monthly Samples
Cadmium (Cd) mg/L 30 days 0.005
Chromium (Cr) mg/L Annual Average of 0.01
Monthly Samples
Cobalt (Co) mg/L Annual Average of 0.05
Monthly Samples
Copper (Cu) mg/L Annual Average of 0.5
Monthly Samples
Fluoride (F) mg/L Annual Average of 15
Monthly Samples
Iron (Fe) mg/L 30 days 1
Mercury (Hg) mg/L Annual Average of 0.001 (0.005)
Monthly Samples
Lead (Pb) mg/L 30 days 0.008
Manganese (Mn) mg/L Annual Average of 0.2
Monthly Samples
Nickel (Ni) mg/L Annual Average of 0.008
Monthly Samples
Selenium (Se) mg/L 30 days 0.07
Zinc (Zn) mg/L Annual Average of 0.08
Monthly Samples
Total Coliform Bacteria Most 30 days 1000
Probable
Number per
100
ml
Enterococci bacteria (per 100 ml) Colony- 30 days 35
forming
Unit per 100
ml
E. Coli (per 100 ml) Colony- 30 days 126
forming
Unit per 100
ml
Differences in Temperature (Δ Temperature):
a. In cases of suction and discharge of cooling water: It is the maximum temperature difference
between sucked and discharged cooling water.
b. In cases of discharge of treated wastewater: It is the maximum temperature difference
between discharged treated wastewater and the mixing zone’s borders in ambient water, in
accordance with Appendix (5) of this Executive Regulations.
The Center may propose amendments to the requirements for measuring the differences in
temperature of treated wastewater in accordance with the coastal and marine water classifications
and their characteristics, for the Ministry’s approval.
Table 2-6: Standards Pertaining to Treated Wastewater Prior to Discharge to Soil, Land, or Surface
Water
Component Unit Average Parameter

Interval Average Value (Maximum for any
Sample)
Soil / Land Surface Water
Physical Standards
Fat Oil and Grease (FOG) mg/L Sample 0 (5)
(Total Extractable)
Total Suspended Solids mg/L 30 days 35 (50) 25 (40)
(TSS)
Total Dissolved Solids mg/L Sample (2000) (2000)
(TDS)
Turbidity Turbidity Sample (5) (5)
Unit
∆ Temperature2 ∆ °C Sample NBL3 (NBL*, provided that
the temperature in any
part of the waterbody
within 15 meters from
the downstream of
treated wastewater
does not exceed 40
degrees Celsius)
Chemical Standards
Biological oxygen demand mg/L 30 days 25 (40) 15 (20)
(BOD5)
Dissolved Oxygen (DO) mg/L Sample (NBL*) (Minimum: 2)
Ammoniacal Nitrogen mg/L 30 days 5 1.9
(NH3, NH4-N)
Nitrate Nitrogen (NO3-N) mg/L 30 days 15 10
Phosphate (PO4( mg/L 30 days 30 20
Free Chlorine mg/L Sample (0.1 – 0.5) (0.1 – 0.5)
Phenols (Total) mg/L Annual 0.002 0.002
Average of
Monthly
Samples
pH Sample (6 – 8.4) (6 – 8.4)
Aluminum (Al) mg/L Annual 5 5
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Arsenic (As) mg/L Annual 0.1 0.1
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Beryllium (Be) mg/L Annual 0.1 0.1
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Boron (B) mg/L Annual 0.75 0.75
Average of
Monthly
Samples
2
Differences in Temperature (ΔT): It is the maximum temperature difference between treated wastewater being
discharged and the receiving water. The Center may propose amendments to the requirements for measuring
temperature differences in treated wastewater in accordance with the types of surface water (sewage, ponds, etc.)
and their characteristics, for the Ministry’s approval.
3
NBL: Normal Background Level, not affected by any human activity, of the component in nature. Note: The NBL
does not necessarily have to be lower than the levels that are considered safe for humans or wildlife species.
Sample)
Cadmium (Cd) mg/L 30 days 0.1 0.01
Chromium (Cr) mg/L Annual 0.1 0.1
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Cobalt (Co) mg/L Annual 0.05 0.05
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Copper (Cu) mg/L Annual 0.4 0.2
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Fluoride (F) mg/L Annual 1 1
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Iron (Fe) mg/L Annual 5 5
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Mercury (Hg) mg/L Annual 0.001 0.001
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Lead (Pb) mg/L Annual 0.1 0.1
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Lithium (Li) mg/L Annual 2.5 2.5
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Manganese (Mn) mg/L Annual 0.2 0.2
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Molybdenum (Mo) mg/L Annual 0.01 0.01
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Nickel (Ni) mg/L Annual 0.2 0.2
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Selenium (Se) mg/L Annual 0.02 0.02
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Vanadium (V) mg/L Annual 0.1 0.1
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Zinc (Zn) mg/L Annual 4 2
Average of
Monthly
Samples
Sample)
Total Coliform Bacteria Most 30 days 2000 1000
Probable
Number per
100 ml
Viable Oval Nematode Live Oval 30 days 1 1
(Number/L)
2.2.1.9.6 Standards and specifications for types of water

This standard stems from the water law issued by Royal Decree No. (M/159) dated 11/11/1441
AH, and from its objectives related to this regulation are the following:
1- Ensuring the provision of safe, clean, reliable, high quality and competitive water
supplies at reasonable competitive prices, achieving justice among consumers, with
each person having access to water to meet his needs.
2- Enhancing the participation of the private sector in the activities subject to the law
and promoting effective governance.
3- Every person has access to clean, safe, water that conforms to the approved
specifications; to satisfy his natural needs, based on justice; In accordance with
approved standards, plans and programs.
The standards establish the provisions related to required effluent quality for restricted and
unrestricted use. This includes the following:
• Standards for the quality of unbottled drinking water
• Non-potable water quality standards
• Treated wastewater quality standards
• Commercial wastewater quality standards- to municipal collection systems
• Sludge standards
2.2.1.9.7 The executive regulation for Air Quality
The Executive Regulations for Air Quality establish the provisions related to air quality and its
protection from pollution. They include “Air Quality Standards for Basic Pollutants” in its Annex
(1) and “Air Quality Standards for Hazardous Pollutants” in its Annex (2), excluding accidents
and natural conditions such as dust storms, forest fires, volcanoes, etc. and cases decided by
the Centre related to accidents and internal disasters. Table 2-7 included in Annex 1 is shown
below:
Table 2-7: Air Quality Standards for Basic Pollutants contained in Annex 1 of the Executive
Regulations for Air Quality of the current Environmental Law
Pollutant Measurement Permissible Average time

micrograms/m3 transgressions
(µg.m-3) 4
Carbon Monoxide 40,000 Once a year hour
CO 10,000 Twice a month 8 hours
Nitrogen dioxide 200 24 per year hour
NO2 100 - annual
Sulphur dioxide 441 24 per year hour
4
Values are based on a standard temperature of 25°C and a pressure of 1 atmosphere.
Pollutant Measurement Permissible Average time
micrograms/m3 transgressions
(µg.m-3) 4
SO2 217 3 per year 24 hours
65 - annual
Ozone O35 157 25 days annually, 8 hours
averaged over 3 years
suspended particles 340 12 per year 24 hours
(<10 µm) PM106 50 - annual
suspended particles 35 12 per year 24 hours

(<2.5 µm) PM2.57 15 - annual
Lead in Total 0.15 Average over 3 months 3 months
suspended particles with no irregularities
Pb (in TSP)
Table 2-7 above provides the relevant values for each important air quality parameter for the
executive air quality regulation 2020. The executive air quality regulation 2020 are
straightforward and apply to all circumstances. However, the IFC standards require a certain
level of interpretation due to various ‘interim’ and ‘guideline’ values being specified rather than
fixed limits. The WHO guidelines provide interim targets for countries that still have very high
levels of air pollution to encourage the gradual cutting down of emissions.
2.2.1.9.8 The executive regulation for noise
The provisions of the Noise Executive Regulations shall apply to all persons in residential,
commercial, industrial, and environmentally sensitive areas, roadsides, and construction sites;
It does not include indoor noise.
Emissions from the different operating areas of the project must comply with the standards of
operational noise as described in the environmental standards of noise allowed in proximity of
roads.
Table 2-8 : Noise limits near road area
Evening time (dB) Daytime (dB)

65 70
5
To calculate the 8-hour ozone value and to assign it to the appropriate day, the following rule is applied: The
maximum daily concentration for 8 hours must be determined by checking the running averages for 8 hours,
calculated from the hourly data and updated hourly. Each average 8 hours calculated is assigned to the day it
expires, meaning that the first calculation period for any day will be the period from 5 pm on the previous day to 1
am of the day. The last calculation period for any day is from 4 after noon to 12 o’clock at night.
6,4
Calculation of excesses: The contributions from natural sources can be assessed by measurements, modelling,
and remote sensing. These contributions are subtracted from the air quality monitoring results, thus calculating
exceedances.
Table 2-9 below shows the exceptions to the application of the permissible noise limits. The
National Center for Environmental Compliance also specifies any other exceptions it deems
appropriate.
Table 2-9 : Permissible noise limits exceptions
Notes Exceptions
all the time Prayer call
all the time military activities
all the time Airports, commercial and private aircraft,
including helicopters
all the time Railways

During operational activities commercial port activities
during festivals Festivals
Subject to the evaluation of the center Major disruptions, emergencies or closures
Subject to a permit as specified by the Excesses allowed by the center

regulations
The provisions of the Executive Regulations for Noise shall apply to all persons in residential,
commercial, industrial, and environmentally sensitive areas, roadsides, and construction sites,
not including indoor noise. Article 4 contains the Measurements of Noise Levels for residential
and commercial areas, including the following categories:
a. includes low-density residential areas in addition to iconic areas, including tourist

attractions and recreational parks, and areas around hospitals, schools and
homes for the elderly, nurseries, and environmentally sensitive areas
b. Includes residential areas of medium density
c. Includes high-density residential areas and areas that include a mixture of
residential and commercial activities
d. Includes commercial areas, including warehouses and financial centres.
It is not permitted to exceed the noise levels established for residential and commercial areas,
except with the permission of the NCEC, which are shown in the next table:
Table 2-10 : Measurement noise levels for residential and commercial areas
Category Daytime Night-time

LAeq, T (dB) LAeq, T (dB)
A 50 40
B 55 45
C 60 50
D 65 55
Article 7 sets the limits for permitted noise levels at construction sites so that the noise level
standards set out in this Regulation are allowed to be exceeded during construction works
from 7 am to 6 pm, as indicated in the following table:
Table 2-11 :Corrective limits for permitted noise levels at construction site
Duration of the construction activities Correction of permitted noise limits

LAeq, T (dB)
Up to 2.5 hours 10
2.5 to 8 hours 5
Above 8 hours 0
2.2.2 Regional laws, regulations, standards and requirements

Ambient air quality standards in the countries of the Cooperation Council for the Arab
States of the Gulf
The list of ambient air quality standards shows the limits of pollution levels that cannot be
exceeded in the surrounding air environment in the countries of the Cooperation Council for
the Arab States of the Gulf in order to preserve human health from the risks and damages that
may be caused by pollutants emitted from stationary and mobile sources. This regulation also
aims to explain the standards and to find the basis and mechanism for applying air quality
standards and measures (Table 2-12).
Ambient air quality standards are applied in all countries of the Cooperation Council for the
Arab States of the Gulf. The entity responsible for the environment in the country is the
competent authority that has the right to interpret and define the meaning and scope of these
standards, and it also has the right to review, amend and update the standards base whenever
the need arises.
Ambient air quality National Standards prevail over Ambient air quality regional standards.
Table 2-12: Ambient air quality measures (Ambient Air Quality Regional Standards)
Pollutant Measurement (Standard) average Measuring method

million microgram/m3 period
ppm
Sulfur Dioxide SO2 0.169 441 One hour UV-Fluoresence
0.083 217 24 hours
0.076 65 One year
Hydrogen Sulfide H2S 0.140 200 One hour UV-Fluoresence
0.030 40 24 hours
Nitrogen Dioxide NO2 0.350 660 One hour Chemiluminescence
0.050 100 One year
0.120 235 One hour UV-Photometry
Ozone O3 0.08 157 8 hours
Inhalable suspended - 340 24 hours
minutes PM10 - 80 One hour
Carbon Monoxide CO 35 40,000 One hour Non-Dispersive IR
9 1000 8 hours
Non-methane 0.24 160 3 hours GC-FID\PID
hydrocarbons
Lead Pb NA NA 24 hours Gravimetry + AAS
1.5 3 Months
Sulfate SO4 - 23 24 hours Gravimetry + Ion
Chromatgraph
Fluorides F - 1.0 one Colorimetric
month
Ammonia NH3 0.8 - One hour Chemiluminescence
2.2.3 Regional Laws, Regulations, Standards and Requirements
2.2.3.1 Convention on the Conservation of Wildlife and their Natural Habitats in the
Gulf Cooperation Council
The Convention is the first legal instrument binding the six member States of the Gulf
Cooperation Council (GCC) to coordinate their activities toward the conservation of wildlife
and natural habitats. This Convention, which was signed on 30 December 2001 in Muscat,
came into force in April 2003. The Convention consists of thirteen Articles and three
Appendices broadly dealing with Conservation of biodiversity and the natural environment
within the member States through a number of agreed measures. The articles most relevant
to the development of the solar plant are listed in Table 2-13.
Table 2-13: Articles of the Convention on the Conservation of Wildlife and their Habitats in the GCC
Article Description
Article 2 [Protection of 1. Enact the necessary legislative laws to ensure conservation, and where
Habitats] necessary, rehabilitation and sound management of enough areas of natural
habitats suitable for wildlife, particularly the species (or sub-species which are
geographically isolated) or endemic species in any state that is party to this
Convention.
2. Give priority to verification that the natural habitats being conserved are
managed in a way that safeguards the realization of the objective of such
conservation. This shall include the following:
a. Banning or restricting human activities which lead to the: (i) distortion of the
nature of such habitats; (ii) pollution or poisoning them or; (iii) deterioration,
or threatening with deterioration, of the biodiversity of such habitats or their
environmental productivity.
b. Adopting appropriate measures to restore the biodiversity and productivity
of the habitats which have been subjected to deterioration.
3. Co-ordinate and exert efforts, with other parties, to conserve the natural
habitats in a proper way, particularly when:
a. Such conservation is on a common border area.
b. These habitats are important for the migratory species included in Appendix
(II) and Appendix (III) of this Convention.
Article 3 [Protection of 1. Each party to this Convention shall enact the necessary legislation to conserve
Wildlife Species] the species of wildlife included in the three appendices attached to this
Convention, as follows:
A) Flora species included in Appendix (I).
i) conserving such species, wherever they exist in natural habitats or
whenever it is necessary to re-distribute them; and
ii) banning or regulating the uprooting or felling any parts thereof or
collecting their seeds except save for authorized scientific or
research purposes.
B) The fauna species included in Appendix (II):
i) conserving such species, wherever they exist in natural habitats or
whenever it is necessary to settle them; and
ii) banning all forms of hunting or deliberate killing, destruction or
collecting of eggs or causing their disturbance, particularly during
seasons of propagation and breeding of their young.
C) The fauna species included in Appendix (III): Verifying that any
exploitation of such species is done in a rationalized way ensuring that
the survival or existence of any of such species in nature is not
threatened, by adopting appropriate measures, such as:
i) banning hunting or designating seasons when hunting is allowed,
and introducing systems ensuring the rationalization of the levels of
such exploitation; and
ii) banning and/or regulating the exploitation of such groups for the
purpose of affording the opportunity to them to recover their
numbers in a satisfactory manner.
2. Each party to this Convention shall adopt all the necessary legislative and
administrative measures in order to:
Article Description
A) Register all the species included in Appendix (I), Appendix (II) and
Appendix (III), which are allowed to be owned in a legitimate way.
B) Regulate the method of breeding such species and enhance their
breading in captivity.
C) Ban or regulate the release of such species to the wild.
D) Ban or regulate all forms of trading, locally, regionally, or internationally,
in the species included in Appendix (I), Appendix (II) and Appendix (III)
or in their products or parts.
3. Ban the owning of the animals’ species included in Appendix (III) or killing
them, by any means, which may lead to their extinction, or through the use of
any of the permitted tools without obtaining a permit specifying the conditions
whereby their ownership is regulated or specifying such tool. Such permits and
licenses shall be issued by the concerned authorities in the states which are
parties to the Convention.
4. The party states shall, in addition to the measures provided for in this
Convention, coordinate their efforts to conserve the migratory populations
from those included under Appendix (II) and Appendix (III).
2.2.3.2 Regional Standards for Air Quality
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia has agreed also to apply the ambient air quality standards (Table
2-14) that are applied in all countries of the Cooperation Council for the Arab States of the
Gulf. The entity responsible for the environment in the country is the competent authority that
has the right to interpret and define the meaning and scope of these standards, and it also
has the right to review, amend and update the standards base whenever the need arises.
Ambient air quality National Standards prevail over Ambient air quality regional standards.
Table 2-14: Ambient air quality Standards in GCC (Regional Standards)
Measurement (Standard)
average
Pollutant million Measuring method
microgram/m3 period
PPm
0.169 441 One hour
Sulfur Dioxide SO2 0.083 217 24 hours UV-Fluoresence
0.076 65 One year
0.140 200 One hour
Hydrogen Sulfide H2S UV-Fluoresence
0.030 40 24 hours
0.350 660 One hour
Nitrogen Dioxide NO2 Chemiluminescence
0.050 100 One year
0.120 235 One hour
UV-Photometry
Ozone O3 0.08 157 8 hours
Inhalable suspended - 340 24 hours
minutes PM10 - 80 One hour
35 40,000 One hour
Carbon Monoxide CO Non Dispersive IR
9 1000 8 hours
Non-methane
0.24 160 3 hours GC-FID\PID
hydrocarbons
NA NA 24 hours
Lead Pb Gravimetry + AAS
1.5 3 Months
Gravimetry + Ion
Sulfate SO4 - 23 24 hours
Chromatgraph
one
Fluorides F - 1.0 Colorimetric
month
Ammonia NH3 0.8 - One hour Chemiluminescence
2.2.3.3 General Regulations of Environment in the GCC states 1997
The direct connection between the development and environment stability, should be
governed by rules and regulations to guarantee the continuity of both development and
environmental elements including environmental rules in the frame of sustainable
development. Based on this, the Supreme Council of the GCC has agreed on certain
measures, during its sixth session in Muscat (Oman), in 1985. On its second clause, a
resolution called for, “Setting up a comprehensive system for the protection of the environment
incorporating the basic rules for the protection of the environment”. The general regulations of
environment in the GCC states comprised of 20 articles is implemented in 1997 and composed
of 20 articles. The most relevant articles to the Project are: the most
Article (6): The use of the Best Available Technology:
The licensing authority should make sure that new projects and major alterations to existing
projects use the best available technology for control of pollution and prevention of
environmental deterioration. Existing projects should use technologies that ensure compliance
with the environmental quality standards wherever they exist to prevent occurrence of any
tangible negative effects on the environment. The concerned authority may develop special
standards that take into consideration the type and age of the project and specify any suitable
procedures that such a project may follow.
Article (8): Environment Evaluation of Project
The licensing authority should ensure that environmental assessment studies for projects are
carried out at the feasibility study stage in accordance with the principles and procedures
specified by the concerned authority and should obtain the agreement of the concerned
authority to the result of these studies before licensing the project.
Article (10): Conservation of the living Species
The concerned authority (the body responsible for coordination with the concerned authority),
in coordination with the responsible authorities or through them, should issue the rules and
regulations related to the conservation of wild and domestic life, particularly those threatened
with extinction and implement those rules and regulations. These include:
a. Banning or restriction of hunting wild animals.

b. Banning or restriction of cutting or removal of trees, shrubs and herbs.
c. Regulation of cutting firewood and production of charcoal.
d. Regulation of local trading in living species.
e. Regulation of the import of living species as animals, plants or their parts or products
from countries where such species do not enjoy sufficient protection.
f. Establishment and management of nature reserves.
g. Conservation of biological resources of local domesticated animals and local plants of
economic value and improving them.
2.2.3.4 Others GCC laws on environmental protection
Furthering to the policies and general principles of the environment protection adopted by the
Supreme Council and supporting the efforts of the GCC States in enacting environmental laws
and legislation that aim at protecting man's health from the adverse effects of water, air and
soil pollution, several reference laws have been developed within the framework of the joint
environmental action. The most significant of those laws are the following:
1. The General Environment Protection Law: A comprehensive framework incorporating

the basic rules for environment conservation and protection. The law was adopted by
the Supreme Council (Muscat, 1995).
2. The Common Law for the Environmental Assessment of Projects: The Law aims at
observing the environmental impact of the various projects to prevent their adverse
effects on environment, natural resources and development. The law was adopted by
the Supreme Council (Muscat, 1995).
3. The Common Law for Handling Radioactive Substances: The Law aims at protecting
man's health and environment from the hazards of radiation and radioactive
substances and applying the acceptable limits of radiation pollution in foodstuff and
animal fodders. The law was adopted by the Supreme Council (Kuwait, 1997)
4. The Common Law for Waste Management: The Law aims at protecting man's health
and the various environmental components from the hazards of the solid and toxic
waste through sound management. The law was adopted by the Supreme Council
(Kuwait, 1997).
5. The Common Law for the Management of Hazardous Chemicals: The Law aims at
controlling the practices of the Management of Hazardous Chemicals at the GCC
States. The law was adopted by the Supreme Council (Muscat, 2001).
6. Coordination of procedures among Member States for trans-border handling of
hazardous waste for the purpose of processing, recycling or disposal. These
procedures aim at enabling Member States to utilize the existing facilities at any
Member State for processing or recycling of hazardous waste. These procedures were
adopted by the Supreme Council in1997.
7. The Common Law for the Management of Healthcare Waste: The law aims at
developing an adequate approach for controlling the production, sorting, storage,
handling, processing of healthcare waste, and disposing them in a safe manner in the
GCC States. The law was adopted by the Supreme Council (Muscat, 2001).
8. The environmental criteria and standards for the quality of air and water and the
controls thereof; the objective of these criteria and standards is to identify the pollution
levels at the internal and external environment in the GCC States. These criteria and
standards were adopted by the Supreme Council (25th session, Manama, 2004).
9. The Common Reference Law for Controlling the Ozone Depleting Materials: Objective
of the Law is to eliminate the use of Ozone depleting materials and substituting them
with safe alternatives according to Montreal Protocol and amendments thereof. The
law was adopted by the Supreme Council (Abu Dhabi, 2005).
2.2.4 International Laws, Regulations, Standards and Requirements

2.2.4.1 International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance Standards
Given that the project is likely to attract private sector finance, it is assumed that an ESIA
would need to assess the environmental impacts in accordance with the International Finance
Corporation (IFC) Performance Standards. For projects located in non-OECD countries (as is
the case for KSA), the ESIA should refer to the IFC Performance Standards and IFC
Environmental Health and Safety Guidelines, which provide general and sector specific
guidance.
All IFC projects or projects where IFC Performance Standards (updated 2012) are adhered to
must meet with the following Performance Standards on Environmental and Social
Sustainability:
• Performance Standard 1: Assessment and Management of Environmental and Social
Risks and Impacts.
• Performance Standard 2: Labour and Working Conditions.
• Performance Standard 3: Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention.
• Performance Standard 4: Community Health, Safety and Security.
• Performance Standard 5: Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement.
• Performance Standard 6: Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Management
of Living Natural Resources.
• Performance Standard 7: Indigenous Peoples; and
• Performance Standard 8: Cultural Heritage.
In addition to meeting the requirements under the Performance Standards, projects must also
comply with applicable national laws, including those laws implementing host country
obligations under international law.
The IFC has prepared a series of Environmental Health and Safety Guidelines, which provide
general and sector specific guidance. These documents provide details of the required levels
and considerations when undertaking an ESIA for a project. The following would specifically
be referred to as part of the preparation of an ESIA for the project:
• IFC General EHS Guidelines (2007);
• IFC EHS Guidelines for Tourism and Hospitality Development (2007);
• IFC EHS Guidelines for Electric Transmission and Distribution
• IFC EHS Guidelines for Waste Management Facilities
• IFC EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation
On applying these Guidelines, the IFC expect that when host country regulations differ from
the levels and measures presented in the EHS Guidelines, projects will achieve whichever is
more stringent. If less stringent levels or measures are appropriate in view of specific project
circumstances, a full and detailed justification for any proposed alternatives is needed as part
of the site-specific environmental assessment. This justification should demonstrate that the
choice for any alternate performance level protects human health and the environment.
2.2.4.2 Equator Principles
In October 2002, the IFC convened a meeting of banks in London to discuss environmental
and social issues in project finance. It was decided to try to develop a banking industry
framework for addressing environmental and social risks in project financing. This led to the
drafting of the Equator Principles. On June 4th, 2003, 10 banks from seven countries signed
up to the Equator Principles, a voluntary set of guidelines for assessing and managing
environmental and social risks in project financing. To date, in excess of 60 financial
institutions operating in more than 100 countries worldwide have adopted the Equator
Principles. As a result, the Equator Principles have become the industry standard for
addressing environmental and social issues. During March to May 2006, the Equator
Principles Financial Institutions (EPFIs) engaged in a substantive review of the Equator
Principles. The revised principles became effective from July 6th, 2006, although have
recently been superseded by a third revision on 4th June 2013. This revision is referred to as
‘Equator Principles III’ (EP III).
The EPs are updated periodically. The latest iteration, EP4, was released on 18 November
2019. It came into effect for all EPFIs on 1 October 2020. This revision is referred to as
‘Equator Principles 4 (EP 4).
EP 4 ensures a strengthened framework for both social and environmental aspects and will
result in benefits for Equator Principles Financial Institutions e.g. improved transparency in
reporting, and focus on emerging social and environmental concerns.
The key points to note are as follows:
• The Equator Principles apply to all new project financing that has a total capital
cost of $10 million or more across all industry sectors (the previous threshold was
$50 million);
• For projects with potentially significant social and environmental impacts
(Category A and B), the borrower must complete and disclose a Social and
Environmental Assessment (previously called an Environmental and Social
Impact Assessment). The ESIA must now comprise a detailed assessment of
social and environmental impacts including labor, health and safety; and
• In the context of the project, the ESIA report must address the relevant potential
impacts and risks.
The Equator Principles is a risk framework for identifying, assessing and managing
environmental and social risks in project finance transactions. This framework is based on the
IFC Performance Standards and the World Bank Group EHS Guidelines. Equator Principles
Financial Institutions (EPFIs) have adopted the Equator Principles in order to ensure that the
Projects financed are developed in a manner that is socially responsible and reflects sound
environmental management practices. The principles comprise a set of ten broad principles
that are underpinned by the environmental and social policies, standards and guidance of the
IFC. The Equator Principles are as follows:
• Principle 1: Review and Categorization.
• Principle 2: Environmental and Social Assessment.
• Principle 3: Applicable Environmental and Social Standards.
• Principle 4: Environmental and Social Management System and Action Plan.
• Principle 5: Stakeholder Engagement.
• Principle 6: Grievance Mechanism.
• Principle 7: Independent Review.
• Principle 8: Covenants.
• Principle 9: Independent Monitoring and Reporting; and
• Principle 10: Reporting and Transparency.
When a Project is proposed for financing, the EPFI is required to categorize the Project based
on the magnitude of its potential risks and impacts. This screening is undertaken using the
following categorization scheme of the IFC:
• Category A: Projects with potential significant adverse environmental social risks
and/or impacts that are diverse, irreversible, or unprecedented.
• Category B: Projects with potential limited adverse environmental social risks and/or
impacts that are few, generally site-specific, largely reversible and readily addressed
through mitigation measures; and
• Category C: Project with minimal or no adverse environmental and social risks and/or
impacts
PV Solar plant Project is considered to be a Category A project.
2.2.5 International Conventions and Treaties to which Kingdom is a party
The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, represented by the National Center for Monitoring
Environmental Compliance, has paid great attention to means of controlling and controlling
pollution sources. The National Center for Monitoring Environmental Compliance (as the focal
point for environmental issues) actively contributes within the system of the international
community through international environmental conventions and treaties and protocols
regulating international efforts.
International conventions and treaties to which the Kingdom is a party are detailed as follows.
2.2.5.1 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC)
The United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change stands for UNFCCC of the
United Nation Framework Convention on Climate Change is an international agreement that
has been ratified by 191 countries and has committed to developing national strategies to
address global warming.
The most important commitments under the United Nations Framework Convention on
Climate Change are the following:
• Emission reporting.
• National Programs: The agreement requires all parties to implement national programs
and measures to control greenhouse gas emissions
• The obligations of the industrialized countries.
• Technology exchange.
2.2.5.2 COP21- Paris Climate Agreement
One of the most important objectives of this agreement is to take into account the development
and special needs of the weakest countries. In addition to the financial obligations of
industrialized countries, these countries must facilitate technology transfer and, in general,
adaptation to a decarbonized economy.
In the area of transparency, the Agreement establishes a system to follow up on the
implementation of national commitments, with a degree of flexibility with regard to developing
countries, in order to follow up on the implementation of the efforts made by the parties.
2.2.5.3 United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification
The United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification in Countries Experiencing Serious
Drought and/or Desertification, an agreement to combat desertification and mitigate the effects
of drought through national programs of action that includes long-term strategies supported
by international cooperation and partnership arrangements.
2.2.5.4 Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals
The Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals is an
intergovernmental treaty concluded in 1979 under the auspices of the United Nations
Environment Program in Bonn, Germany, and entered into force in 1983. The treaty provides
a global basis for the conservation and sustainable use of migratory animals and their habitats.
2.2.5.5 International Plant Protection Convention
The International Plant Protection Convention is a 1951 multilateral treaty overseen by the
Food and Agriculture Organization that aims to provide coordinated and effective action to
prevent and control the introduction and spread of pests of plants and plant products. The
Convention extends beyond the protection of cultivated plants to the protection of natural
plants and plant products.
2.2.5.6 Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and
Flora
The Treaty on International Trade in Species of Wild Fauna and Flora in Threatened with
Extinction, also known as the “Washington Convention,” which was signed in Washington, DC
on March 3, 1973, and entered into force in 1975. It is considered one of the most important
international treaties for preserving wild species from the danger of extinction.
2.2.5.7 Convention on Biological Diversity
The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD) entered into force on 29 th December 1993, with
3 main objectives: the conservation of biological diversity; the sustainable use of the
components of biological diversity; and the fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising
out of the utilization of genetic resources. Dedicated to promoting sustainable development,
the Convention was conceived as a practical tool for translating the principles of Agenda 21
into reality. It recognizes that biological diversity is about more than plants, animals and micro-
organisms and their ecosystems, but about people and our need for food security, medicines,
fresh air and water, shelter, and a clean and healthy environment in which to live.
2.2.5.8 Montreal Protocol
The Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer is the landmark
multilateral environmental agreement that regulates the production and consumption of nearly
100 man-made chemicals referred to as ozone depleting substances (ODS). Those chemicals
damage the stratospheric ozone layer, Earth’s protective shield that protects humans and the
environment. Adopted on 15 September 1987, the Protocol is to date the only UN treaty ever
that has been ratified every country on Earth (all 198 UN Member States).
2.2.5.9 Stockholm Convention
The Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutant is a global treaty to protect human
health and the environment from chemicals that remain intact in the environment for long
periods, become widely distributed geographically, accumulate in the fatty tissue of humans
and wildlife, and have harmful impacts on human health or on the environment.
2.2.5.10 Vienna Convention
The Vienna Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer is a framework convention that
lays out principles agreed upon by many parties (however does not require countries to take
control actions to protect the ozone layer (this came later in the form of the Montreal Protocol).
The Convention aimed to promote cooperation among nations by exchanging information on
the effects of human activities on the ozone layer, and in doing so, the creators hoped
policymakers would adopt measures to combat those activities responsible for ozone
depletion.
3 Description of the Activity
3.1 Objectives and Rationale of the Activity
The Project will result in crucial positive environmental and economic impacts on the strategic
and national level, given goals in renewable energies sector that KSA set in Vision 2030. Such
positive impacts underpin rationale for the Project. These include the following:
• The Project allows for more sustainable development and shows the commitment of
the Kingdom to reduce its dependence on fossil energy and meeting the set targets for
renewable energy sources.
• The Project will contribute to increasing energy security through reliance on an

indigenous, inexhaustible energy resource.
• The Project will produce clean energy which will contribute to lowering electricity
generation costs when compared to the current costs associated with liquid fuels.
• Generating electricity through PV power is rather pollution-free during operation.

Compared with the conventional way of producing electricity in the KSA, the clean
energy produced is expected to reduce consumption of liquid fuels for electricity
generation in Saudi Arabia and will thus help in reducing greenhouse gas emissions
as well as air pollutant emissions and protect the environment.
3.2 Proposed Project Site
The area is adjacent to Douba – Tabuk road (Route 80) and the planned new international
airport that is now under development to the southeast.
Neom provided with the defined site boundaries for the development that delimit an extension
of 52.6 km2.
As per the tender documentation, the land that is controlled by NEOM and the coordinates of
Airport West location are the following:
Table 3-1: Boundaries’ coordinates of Airport-west solar plant site
Point Latitude Longitude

1 28.096591 36.096589
2 28.057957 36.050007
3 28.058687 36.027499
4 28.068343 36.027023
5 28.068115 36.015944
6 28.101536 36.015416
7 28.10218 36.040869
8 28.127974 36.023321
9 28.142456 36.101901
Figure 3-1: Airport West Site Boundaries
Figure 3-2: Solar plant Airport West site Location
3.3 Activities Throughout the Stages of the Activity
3.3.1 Early Works

Early works comprise the planning and pre-construction phase involving the conceptualization
of the project and has following components:
• Site Selection.
• Site surveys as topographic, geotechnical investigations, micro-siting studies, power
evacuation arrangements.
• Approvals/clearances/ permits.
• Design and finalization of contractors.
• Mobilization of contractors
3.3.2 Construction
The proposed construction of solar development involves the following activities:
• Contractor mobilisation.
• Site preparation activities such as clearance, excavation, filling, levelling etc.
• Construction of external connecting road and internal access roads.
• Construction of labour camp, site office, equipment and supplies storage areas, fuel
storage areas and waste pits.
• Construction of Foundation of the PV module
• Transportation of equipment including PV module, mounting structure, supply
materials, and fuels.
• Completing internal electrical connections of PV module.
• Erection of internal electrical lines.
• Establishment of pooling sub-station; and
• Commissioning of the complete PV plant.
3.3.3 Operations
During the operation of the proposed solar power plant involves the following activities:
• Obtaining the regulatory permit and approval from competent authority prior start the
operation.
• Regular remote monitoring of the complete PV plant
• PV module washing.
• Inverter maintenance.
• Preventive and corrective maintenance, including replacement of broken PV modules.
• Checking the electric connection.
The project consists Solar Power Plant with maximum production capacity of 2,082 MW. The
development site will cover an area of approximately 52.6 km 2. The expected period of Solar
Park service is 30 years. The following illustration shows a schematic representation of a
typical solar PV plant. The main components required are:
✓ Photovoltaic solar modules (PV), to convert sunlight.
✓ Structure for PV modules.
✓ DC converter inverter (DC) to alternating current (AC).
✓ Transformers to increase the AC voltage to match the current of the network and to
enable communication with it.
✓ Electrical substations, to enable isolation and protection of the power plant.
3.3.3.1 Solar System

The Solar Power Park will utilize Photovoltaic (PV) technology and consist of PV arrays which
will be mounted on tracking systems which will allow the arrays to track the movement of the
sun in one direction. The modules will be connected in series through combination boxes to
form a chain in order to increase the AC voltage and reduce energy losses.
3.3.3.2 Solar modules

The estimation of the energy yield was made using the photovoltaic system of the proposed
site taking into account the bifacial solar photovoltaic modules. The 52.6 km 2 area is allocated
for solar panels. Bifacial modules achieve a better collar-electric conversion performance at
similar project size and more production at a barely higher installation cost. The number of
modules is estimated to be 3,912,720 units.
Figure 3-3: Solar Power Plant layout
Figure 3-4 : Bifacial modules
3.3.3.3 Inverter
A solar inverter or PV inverter is a type of electrical converter which converts the variable direct
current (DC) output of a photovoltaic (PV) solar panel into a utility frequency alternating current
(AC) that can be fed into a commercial electrical grid or used by a local, off-grid electrical
network. The inverter can also implement a variety of functions to increase the productivity of
the power unit by increasing voltages, monitoring performance, recording data, providing
protection and disconnecting in the event of problems in the network or in order to connect
with the photovoltaic units. Each solar table (group of cells) was connected to a solar inverter.
The Airport solar plant will be equipped with a total number of 274 inverters.
Figure 3-5 : Inverter or transducer
Figure 3-6: Shape of the electric circuit
3.3.3.4 Transformers
Transformers are an essential component in the production and distribution of solar energy.
Transformers are electrical devices that convert voltage to different levels. Since PV modules
and insulators typically operate at low voltages, transformers are required to convert the
voltage to a level suitable for distribution corresponding to the grid voltage.
Figure 3-7 : Transformer
Figure 3-8 : The electric circuit
3.3.3.5 Connecting with the network

Figure 3-9 shows the connection of the solar park with electricity Networks in NEOM.
Figure 3-9 : A model of the Solar Power Plant connection with SEC Network
3.3.4 Decommissioning
The solar plant site, after having remained in operation for the lifecycle estimated at 30 years,
will keep in operation. However, it is not yet decided if the project would approach for
upgradation/expansion. Once the project life is completed:
• The solar modules will either be revamped or replaced or disposed as per the
applicable legislation.
• If decommissioned, all components including foundations and internal roads of the
project will be removed and the site will be restored to its preconstruction state.
3.3.5 Unplanned Events

Solar parks are not typically associated with significant emergency risks however there is the
potential for unplanned events to occur during the construction and operation of the Project;
this includes:
• Environmental incidents such as hydrocarbon or chemical spills.

• Vehicle accidents.
• Natural disasters such as flooding and fire/explosion; and
• Medical emergencies such as injury, illness, or fatalities
3.4 Project Footprint
3.4.1 Area Required for the Project
The allocated area of the project is 52.6 km2. It is expected that all project activities will be
within the limits of this area, so it is expected that the project's footprint will be limited to these
limits. Project boundary and coordinates are displayed in Table 3-1 and Figure 3-1.
Layout of the solar park is given in annexes
3.4.2 Project Resources and Types and Sources thereof
3.4.2.1 Water requirement and resources
There are no water sources available on site and water will be supplied using tankers and
stored on site in large tanks. During construction, the water will be used for
construction/operation activities as well as for drinking purposes.
3.4.2.1.1 Water requirement in construction phase
During the project construction phase, water is required for preparing RCC foundations
(Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC)) for module mounting structures, building control room
and security rooms, and domestic purpose such as drinking and washing by the construction
workers and staff. Water is also used for dust suppression.
3.4.2.1.1.1 Potable water
General Authority for Statics in The Kingdom has reported in 2017 that average daily water
consumption per capita ranges between 102 L per day per capita (in Jazan) and 381 L per
day per capita (in Eastern region). These statics cannot be applied in Project site since
workers' accommodations will be off-site and they will be active on-site during working hours.
the water demand for construction workers on the site is expected to be much lower than the
typical human water consumption rate in the area as mentioned by statics.
Based on previous experience in similar construction sites, the average consumption is

consumption per person is estimated at around 35 litres per day, including 3 to 5 litres for
drinking water. Then, the peak of water demand during construction for 900 workers in-place
can reaches 31.5 m3 per day.
Drinking water can be purchased as bottled water from the nearest market. water for other
domestic purposes will be brought to Project Site by Tankers.
3.4.2.1.1.2 Water demand for dust suppression
According to experience dust suppression water needed for dust suppression is about 1 gallon
per square meter per day or 4 litres per square metre per day. This value is typical. Real
values depend on weather conditions, soil type and many other factors.
Based on this typical value, daily water demand for dust suppression is estimated to be as
follow:
Water demand for dust suppression = ((52.6 km 2 x 106) x 70%) x 4 L/m2/day/ (36x30) =136
m3 per day.
In this calculation we have taken in account that :

• The working area during the construction phase is equal to 70% from the total area
(52.6 km2) and;
• The daily working area during the construction during the construction phase is almost
34000 m3 per day.
3.4.2.1.1.3 Water demand for civil works
The total quantity of concrete estimated for civil works in this project is 600 m3. Considering
that 1 m3 of concrete requires 150 litres of water to be prepared, the total water demand for
the project is estimated to 90 m3 i.e., a continuous of 84 litres per day.
To this demand, it is added approximately 1000 m3 per month for equipment washing and
other miscellaneous civil works.
Water will be brought to project site by tankers.
3.4.2.1.2 Water requirement in operation phase
3.4.2.1.2.1 Water for PV module cleaning
During operation and maintenance phase. Water could be used is used in cleaning of panel
(wet cleaning). The cleanness of panels significantly influences their performances to produce
electric power.
Research made on relationship between cleanness and performance in desert climate had
shown that, the PV panel, which kept dusty for 20 days, produced 5% less power. Power
losses of 7% and 13% were observed for 30 days and 90 days of dusted panels, respectively.
Many researchers proposed cleaning of PV modules between 8 to 35 days based on their
geographical location, energy wasted due to soiling, and cost associated with cleaning. A
module cleaning frequency of, at least, 10 times a year is recommended.
Due to water scarcity in the region, cleaning by dry techniques is largely favoured against wet
cleaning. Then the water demand for panel cleaning is considered nil.
3.4.2.1.2.2 Water for domestic use
Water will be required for domestic purposes by the operations staff and workers. The daily
water demand for the 150 personnel working on site is 5.2 m3/day. Considering a rejection
rate of 80% the daily domestic wastewater flow rate will be estimated to 4.2 m3/day.
3.4.2.2 Construction Material Requirement
3.4.2.2.1 Construction phase
The major raw materials required for the construction phase are fencing material, construction
materials like cement, sand, aggregate and bricks that will be sourced from local areas. Solar
modules for the project along with associated structures will imported. The quantiies of
materials used are estimated in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2: material quantities used in Construction phase
Material Quantity
Concrete 400 m3
Rebar 400 metric tons
Sand 400 metric tons
Bricks 1500 m2
Tiles 1300 m2
Paints 1300 litres
3.4.2.2.2 Operation and Maintenance phase
There will not be major requirement of raw materials during operation except for maintenance
purpose excepted consumable spares.
3.4.2.3 Power Requirement
3.4.2.3.1 Construction Phase
Power requirement during the construction phase is estimated to 5000 kWh/day. The power
will be supplied by the SEC network. For emergency supply Diesel Generators (DG) will be
used. It is estimated that 3 D.G. sets of capacity 35 kVA each will be used during construction
phase. The quantity of fuel needed in this phase is estimated to 150 litres per day.
3.4.2.3.2 Operation Phase
Based on initial assessment, power requirement during daytime would be met through self-
supply. During shutdown power will be supplied by the SEC network or Emergency Generators
DG sets would also be kept at the control room for emergency power backup.
3.4.3 Waste (types and methods of disposal thereof)
In general, all waste (solid and liquid) will be appropriately collected and disposed in
accordance with applicable national requirements.
3.4.3.1 Domestic wastewater
During construction and operation, wastewater will be generated from human uses and
portable toilets. Wastewater will be collected in designated septic tanks that will be regularly
emptied and cleaned by an approved contractor. The expected daily amount of wastewater
during the construction and operation phases is approximately equal to 80% of the water
demand for each phase.
3.4.3.2 solid waste
During the construction phase, solid waste usually includes construction waste (backfill,
discarded concrete, empty drums) and municipal solid waste (paper, cardboard, plastic, other
packaging materials and food waste). Municipal waste will be collected in designated locations
on site and disposed by a specialized contractor at the nearest landfill. Construction waste will
be reused as much as possible in construction activities, or alternatively it will be disposed at
landfill.
Another source of solid waste is damaged photovoltaic panels if present during installation.
For damaged panels, it will be handled by a qualified panel recycling contractor. The final
management style will be chosen at a later stage during the construction phase.
During the operation of the solar plant, a limited number of wastes will be generated, and most
likely it will include oils, greases, etc. which will be disposed off-site in accordance with relevant
national legislation. Another expected source of waste is damaged photovoltaic panels, if any.
The management method will be to dispose of damaged panels, if any; similar to the method
used during the construction phase. The final management method will be chosen early in the
operational phase. Table 3-3 shows the estimated quantities of waste and their disposal
methods.
Table 3-3 Waste Disposal Methods
Type of waste Method of Disposal (Landfill, Incineration Expected quantities

or Recycling/Reuse)
Construction phase
Excavation and soil waste Soil will be reused as much as possible in Less than 10,000 tons
construction activities or it will be disposed
of by an approved contractor in a licensed
landfill
Construction waste includes It will be disposed of by an approved Less than 10,000 tons
ready-made concrete and contractor at a licensed landfill
bricks
Waste packing materials, It will be reused as much as possible or sold less than 500 tons
including papers, cardboard for recycling.
and glass
food waste It will be disposed of by an approved less than 200 tons
contractor at a licensed landfill.
Materials contaminated with It will be disposed of by an approved less than 1,000 tons
hydrocarbons including oils contractor at a licensed landfill.
and cloth rags contaminated
with oils
Solvents and paints It will be disposed of by an approved less than 50 tons
contractor at a licensed landfill.
Electrical equipment and It will be disposed of by an approved less than 50 tons
batteries contractor at a licensed landfill.
Damaged photovoltaic PV panels will be carefully installed to Cannot be
panels reduce the number of damaged panels. It determined at this
will be handled by a qualified plate stage, but quantities
recycling contractor are expected to be
limited
Operation Phase
food waste It will be disposed of by an approved Less than 2 tons/year
contractor at a licensed landfill
Substances polluted with It will be disposed of by an approved less than 1 ton/ year
hydrocarbons less than contractor at a licensed landfill
including oils and rags
Solvents and paints It will be disposed of by an approved Less than 1 ton/year
contractor at a licensed landfill
Residues of chemical It will be disposed of by an approved less than 1 ton/ year
residues or expired contractor at a licensed landfill
Damaged photovoltaic PV panels will be carefully cleaned to Cannot be
panels reduce the number of damaged panels. It determined at this
will be handled by a qualified plate stage, but quantities
recycling contractor are expected to be
limited
3.4.3.3 gaseous emissions
It is expected that dust and gaseous emissions generation will occur during the construction
phase. Furthermore, heavy equipment will produce exhaust emissions from diesel engines,
and this will lead to a temporary rise in the concentrations of sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides
and carbon dioxide. Carbon monoxide is produced as a result of incomplete combustion of
gasoline in engines. It is expected that no emission will be generated during the operation
phase. In addition, the project is expected to reduce greenhouse gas emissions by 4 million
tons of carbon dioxide equivalent.
3.4.3.4 Noise level rise
Equipment and machinery are the potential source of noise during construction, Table 3-4
shows the maximum sound pressure level for some construction equipment expected to be
used according to the noise database of the British Department for Environment, Food &
Rural Affairs used to predict noise levels during construction and on open sites.
Table 3-4: Standard sound pressure level for construction equipment
Equipment Equivalent sound pressure level –LAeq

dB
crawler excavator (truck loading - 85
unloading)
soil grading machine 86
dump truck 79
During operation, transformer terminals, inverters, and transformers are the potential noise
source. Noise levels vary depending on the specifications of the substation. The average noise
level for a substation is 80 to 100 dB (S. Shin et al., 2014). The noise from the transformer is
expected to be limited and less than 60 dB. Furthermore, the project will also include
transmission lines may make droning sounds that occur during periods of high humidity.
Although this noise is audible to those very close to transmission lines, it dissipates quickly
with distance and is easily masked by natural noise and is therefore not considered a
significant noise source.
3.5 Associated facilities
3.5.1.1 Temporary utilities and facilities
The temporary facilities will be set up at the beginning of construction stage and it will be in
site or adjacent to the site by the Sub-Contractor. The temporary facilities will comprise site
office, warehouse, workshop, open storage, and utility areas, etc., as required.
The Sub-Contractor makes sure that all areas and locations of construction site for temporary
facilities will conform to the local regulation and all site temporary facilities will be removed
after completion of the project.
Two temporary construction camps will be operation during the whole construction phase, one
main and another secondary. The construction camps will include the stockpiles, facilities for
workers, machinery & equipment, concrete batch plant, waste storage, holding tank &
chemical toilets, offices and other auxiliary facilities. In addition, there will be some specific
and delimited zones for materials and waste storage scattered around the implementation
area site. (See figure below).
Figure 10: Proposal of the construction camps and storage areas
The construction camps will be defined in detail by Contractor according to the number of
employers, the duration and schedule of the works, the volume of materials, the volume of
wastes and all the necessary temporary auxiliary installations. The camps will be marked to
be visible day and night. The perimeter of the campsites will be indicated by stakes and plastic
tape. The sites will include all the necessary safeguards for environmental protection and
safety for workers. All construction waste, debris, and scraps will be removed after the project
is finished, and the camps will be properly decommissioned. After decommissioning, these
locations must be restored to the client's satisfaction.
Adequate location of construction camps
Construction camps and specific zones for materials and wastes´ storage have been placed
in areas which are acceptable from environment, cultural and social point of view. These sites
have not been established in the vicinity of environmental and social sensitive places like
areas with High Conservation Priority Species, key ecological areas, and camps, in order to
avoid environmental impacts and social conflicts.
The proposed main construction camp is located in the middle part of the plot. This potential
area will be able to occupy up to 22,500 m2, and all infrastructures will be established inside
its perimeter, including the concrete batch plant. A holding tank will be installed for wastewater
generation. A waterproofed area will be constructed for the location of the machinery. Work
access will be through an existing road. A potential main storage area of 24,908 m2 for
materials and wastes has been proposed next to this camp. A waterproof concrete floor screed
will be constructed for wastes storage.
Figure 11: Detail of the main construction camp and main storage area
The proposed secondary construction camp is located in the East part of the plot. The
boundary of this potential zone, which might cover up to 22,500 m2, will be the location of all
infrastructure. Temporary chemical toilets will be installed for wastewater generation. A
waterproofed area will be constructed for the location of the machinery. Work access will be
through an existing road. A potential secondary storage area of 47,508 m2 for materials and
wastes has been proposed near this camp, next to the HV SET. A waterproof concrete floor
screed will be constructed for wastes storage.
Three additional storage areas with different sizes with waterproof floor for wastes will be
located in the North, middle and South of the plot.
Road access
Figure 12: Detail of the secondary construction camp
Figure 13: Detail of the secondary storage area
There are no sensitive receptors in the closest zones of the proposed construction camps and
storages areas. In addition, areas with High Conservation Priority Species and key ecological
areas will not be affected because they are located far from these auxiliary facilities.
If the Contractor proposes different areas for the location of the construction camps and
materials and wastes´ storage, these zones must be acceptable from environment, cultural
and social point of view.
The Contractor will be fully responsible for designing, coordinating, and getting the approval
from any necessary authorities for the final implemented construction camps location.
3.5.1.2 Laydown and Storage Facilities
Materials and equipment will be laid down and stored in storage facilities, such as warehouse
and laydown area. Materials will be unloaded and stored according to manufacturer’s manuals
and requirements.
The materials that are noticed to be stored indoor, such as valves, and instruments, etc., will
be kept in warehouse, while boxed equipment with a water proofing, pipe with suitable
capping, cable and other equipment/materials can be kept in the laydown area.
Laydown area with a proper compaction and security system will be located inside plant site
boundary.
Waterproof Area in Construction Camps

A waterproof area has been considered in both construction camps.
To avoid that a volume of water is polluted with fuels, oils, etc., in the zone of auxiliary facilities
a specific area for the location of the machinery will be conditioned, which will also avoid the
soil pollution by a possible spill of these elements. This area must be waterproofed and must
have a specific collection zone.
The waterproofed area will be constructed with a concrete slab placed on a compacted surface
to avoid breaking the slab by different places.
This waterproofed area is estimated to have dimensions of 8 x 4 m, capable of covering the
projected surface of the engine space of the machines that will be used. (See figure below).
This waterproofed area will be constructed with gradients towards the centre of it that allow
collecting and storing the possible accidental spillage of oil or grease. The gradient towards
the inside of the slab of the longest side will be 4%. This area will have a central ditch with a
capacity of 200 l (volume of an oil container that can be spilled by accident during handling).
Contractor must ensure that workers have been trained on handling of fuels and spill control
procedures.
Figure 14: Waterproof area in construction camp
Network perimeter drainage and Settling basin

To avoid the risk of accidental pollution around the areas designed for storing and parking
machinery and ancillary facilities a network perimeter drainage, or side ditch, for retaining the
surface water runoff around will be built before the start of work operations. This network
perimeter drainage will drive the wastewater to a settling pond or basin sand trap type
degreaser to avoid reaching the next wadi, as detailed in the following sketch. Considering the
amount of rain wash water that these worksites will receive, the side ditches or perimeter
drainage trenches will have at least 1.5 m width and 0.5 m depth and will have to be maintained
in perfect operating conditions during all the work periods.
The water collected in the settling pond will be managed by specialized companies in the
management of hazardous waste.
Figure 15: Settling basin in construction camps
3.5.1.3 Office
Required office with sanitary block will be located inside plant site boundary as per the project
requirements.
3.5.1.4 Accommodation facilities
Required accommodation facilities with sanitary block may be located and operated in off-site
areas as needed and according to project requirements.
3.5.1.5 Catering facilities
Required catering facilities with sanitary facilities for Contractor & Subcontractor will be located
either within the Plant area or be installed in off-site areas.
3.5.1.6 Warehouse and workshop facilities
Required warehouse and workshop will be located inside/outside plant site boundary as
needed.
Authorized garages for maintenance of machinery and vehicles
Repair work, servicing and maintenance of machinery and vehicles will be carried out in
authorized garages. If not possible, the Contractor should use designated areas for repair and
maintenance of vehicles. Repair work, servicing and maintenance of machinery will be carried
out in a proper area, which will have the following structures: Installation of concrete slab of at
least 10x8 m, with a central drain that leads rainwater through an appropriate referral to a final
host deposit with a minimum capacity of 7,000 litres. The machinery to be repaired and
pollutants will have to rest upon the concrete slab. The water collected in the reservoir will be
managed by specialized companies in the management of hazardous waste. They must
become independent of the slab runoff from the rest of the site installations by elevating the
slab on the surrounding soil, as detailed in the following sketch.
Contractor must ensure that workers have been trained on handling of fuels and spill control
procedures.
Figure 16: Proposal of machinery repair and pollutants management area in construction camps (only if no possible
servicing and maintenance of machinery and vehicles in authorized garages)
Holding Tank and Chemical toilets. Fulfilment of legal framework and standards
regarding wastewater discharge
A Holding Tank for wastewater generation will be located inside the main construction camp
Figure 17: Holding Tank
Temporary storage into authority-approved holding tank will be used during construction
phase. This tank could be used during operation phase because it has been located near
operator´s offices.
Chemical toilets or comparably effective units will be used for discharges of sanitary
wastewater. Chemical toilets will be located inside the secondary construction camp zone and
along work site.
Chemical toilets will be periodically emptied by licensed company and their sanitary
wastewaters will be considered as a hazardous waste.
Figure 18: Chemical toilets
Concrete Batch Plant

Preferentially, concrete will be obtained from commercial houses. If not possible, the
Contractor will install a concrete batch plant in the main construction camps.
Specific mitigation measures related to the concrete batch plant will be taken into account:
• Conveyors must be designed and constructed to prevent fugitive dust emissions. This
may include covering the conveyor with a roof, installing side protection barriers, and
equipping the conveyor with spill trays, which direct material to a collection point.
• Water sprays and effective air extraction and filtration system should be installed to
suppress dust generated during mixer truck loading.
• Use of solid wind breaks for the wind speed that affects particle uptake near the pile
from stockpiles.
• An approved fabric filter incorporating a fabric-cleaning device should be installed on
each cement storage silo. The quality of the filter media and the design characteristics
of the filter system must be capable of ensuring that the maximum concentration of
solid particles in residual gases does not exceed 100 mg/m3.
Waste storage
Contractor must comply with Waste Handling and Storage Standard because this National
Standard (2012) guides the handling and storing waste in good operating practices, in
managing effective waste storage and segregation systems, and in detecting, containing, and
cleaning up any leaks that may occur.
A waterproof concrete floor screed will be constructed for wastes storage.
Storage areas will be made inaccessible to animals and visitors. Waste storage area will be
clearly marked and signed with regard to the quantity and hazardous characteristics of the
wastes stored therein. It is very important the proper accumulation, maintenance, and
housekeeping of this storage area. Different types of solid wastes will be kept separate.
Waste storage area will be constructed in such a way that any spillage or loss of containment
of a particular waste type cannot spread to any other waste types. Storage area drainage
infrastructure will ensure all contaminated runoff is contained.
The total maximum storage capacity of the storage area will be clearly and unambiguously
stated in writing. Storage containers will be of sufficient size and number to contain all solid
wastes generated between collections. Containers will be stored in such a manner that leaks
and spillages cannot escape over bunds or the edge of the sealed drainage areas. Secondary
containment will be provided if the storage area cannot be isolated from the drain or run off
area. A generator of hazardous waste may accumulate up to a total of 0.2 m3 of waste, at or
near the point of generation. If a process will generate more than this volume at one time, the
waste must be transferred to the main waste storage area or removed off-site.
Fire prevention systems and pollution control equipment will be provided for storage facilities
where necessary, to prevent fires or the releases of hazardous materials to the environment.
Waste storage area will be located inside the construction camp zone, far from water bodies
and drainage ditches and on hard-core to minimise the risk of soil contamination. A proposal
of waste storage area is shown in the figure below.
Figure 19: Proposal of waste storage area inside Construction Camp zone
3.5.1.7 Electricity
Required electric power during construction stage will be arranged by the Contractor as
needed and project requirements.
3.5.1.8 water
Required water during construction stage will be arranged by the Contractor as needed and
project requirements.
3.5.1.9 Temporary telephone, fax and other communication systems
Required communication line during construction stage will be provided by Contractor.

Contractor will prepare and provide all temporary equipment which will be used for operating
of site office, such as telephone, facsimile, and other communication systems as needed.
3.5.1.10 temporary fence
Plant construction area, temporary office, warehouse, and workshop area may will be fenced
off.
3.5.1.11 Security - site guard
Contractor shall comply with site security requirement as project requirements. To assure site
security and safety, Contractor will operate 24 hours the site security system. Basically,
security agents will be located in security gate house, and periodic/un-periodic control will be
executed in the Site.
3.5.1.12 Extinguishing system / temporary protection
The project should be followed to ensure that adequate fire precautions are adopted
throughout the Project.
CO2 or Dry Chemical Powder portable firefighting equipment will be provided in all site offices
and explosives and combustibles storage areas. Portable firefighting equipment shall be
provided on electrically powered moving plant on the site. Subcontractors are responsible to
ensure they have suitable and sufficient equipment in place.
All Contractor’s fire extinguishers are to be checked & serviced by a competent person on a
minimum of six (6) monthly bases. A register of inspections must be kept by the HSE
department. Subcontractors must maintain records of these inspections and may be
requested to demonstrate compliance at any time.
Smoking is prohibited in all site offices, lunchrooms, toilet / wash facilities, and enclosed work
areas. Smoking will also be prohibited in work areas identified and sign posted as hazardous
areas, e.g., Chemical/flammable liquid storage areas, general fire risk. Smoking areas shall
be setup where personnel may smoke in controlled areas only.
Portable firefighting equipment must be positioned adjacent to a work area where hot work is
being undertaken. The fire-point is positioned adjacent to the buildings and hot work area on
site.
3.5.1.13 First aid and medical facilities during construction
The project will have the first aid preparation from the commencement of site setup. In
addition, the project should have an onsite medical facility for the treatment of minor injuries
and illness when the employees have reached at the total number which Saudi Authorities
has defined.
The detail management on the competent personnel and facilities should be specified in
accordance with the regulations of KSA Authorities.
3.5.1.14 safety plan
Safety plan for site will be expanded after conducting safety review. But following system will
be prepared at least in site to prevent HSE incidents:
• Emergency and evacuation alarms.
• Fire guard sites and equipment.
• Medical first aid points.
• Communication and training.
3.5.1.15 waste disposal plan
It is formal requirement for developers to produce a Site Waste Management Plan.

Nevertheless, it is recognized that construction, operation and demolition stages all have the
potential to generate waste. The applicant will adopt good construction and management
practices to ensure waste is minimized as far as possible and that the storage, transport and
eventual disposal of waste have no significant environmental effects. Management and
collection of the waste streams will be carried out under the requirements of the kingdom
waste regulatory regime. The project description will set out the waste management measures
that will be adopted during construction, operation and decommissioning to avoid any
significant adverse effects on the environment or people from the handling and disposal of
waste.
Contractor will set up non-hazardous waste collection points at the specific points on the
construction site and in the storage areas. This will consist of segregated containers. All
Subcontractors and personnel will deposit their waste materials in the appropriate container.
All engaged organizations and Subcontractors will be encouraged to minimize the use of
materials and consumables, especially packaging materials, and to re-use or recycle any
generated waste as much as is reasonably practical. Contractor will then arrange for the
removal form site via a waste management subcontractor which is nominated by Owner.
Contractor will make effort to get as much of the generated waste materials recycled, reused
wherever possible to avoid landfill disposal. And these steps will be monitored and recorded
by Contractor.
3.6 Action Programme
The programme of construction, operation and decommissioning of the solar plant of Airport
West is presented in Table 3-5:
Table 3-5: Estimated duration of activity stages
Project phase Duration

Detailed design / feed 8 months
Site preparation and construction work 36 months
Operation 30 years
Shutdown and decommissioning 1,5 years
4 Alternatives to the Activity
4.1 Overview
This chapter will provide an overview of the justification for the proposed development and
describes the feasible project and design alternatives that have been considered at this stage
of the development. The consideration of alternatives is based on the preliminary design and
is assessed against the international lending and client requirements. This includes
consideration to the application of Best Available Techniques (BAT) to the development in
accordance with the requirements National Center for Environmental compliance (NCEC) in
addition to NEOM standards and to International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance
Standards.
The consideration of alternatives also considers IFC Performance Standard 3 and the
requirements for Resource Efficiency (Greenhouse Gases and Water Consumption) and
Pollution Prevention (General, Hazardous Materials Management and Pesticide Use and
Management). The objectives for this Performance Standard are as follows:
• To avoid or minimize adverse impacts on human health and the environment by

avoiding or minimizing pollution from project activities.
• To promote more sustainable use of resources, including energy and water; and,
• To reduce project-related Greenhouse Gas (GHG) emissions.
4.2 Methodology
This step aims to describe the proposed alternatives for the project and determine the most
appropriate and least impactful on the environment. This step includes a study and analysis
of many technical aspects of the project, including the location and design of the project and
the technology used in the operation process. The alternatives evaluation methodology is
based on making a comparison between the various proposed alternatives for the project and
comparing the following aspects:
• Proposed project site alternatives,

• Economic feasibility and associated costs,
• The pros and cons of each alternative,
• Financial efficiency, including costs, environmental management,
• The degree of impact on the environmental, economic and social aspects,
• Technology used and possible project designs,
• Consistency and not conflict with future development plans in the region,
• Possible build and run processes,
• Consumption of natural resources, especially energy and water,
• Administrative, legal and technical difficulties associated with the implementation of
each alternative,
• Risks related to the implementation of each alternative.
4.3 Alternative To “No Activity (project)”/ “No amendment”
The Proposed development aligns within the main strategy of the energy sector in the
The Government of Saudi Arabia has set out far reaching policies which are designed to
enable Saudi Arabia to meet the challenges of future climate change and remove its reliance
on oil income. These policies are set out in Saudi Arabia’s Vision 2030 document.
The no-project alternative represents the option of not undertaking the proposed activity or
any of its alternatives. It provides the baseline against which the predicted impacts and risks
can be assessed. Although the no-project alternative would not result in any environmental
impacts on the site or surrounding area, it would also not bring any positive impact to the local
area in terms of socio-economic benefits, job creation and skills development. The local area
will not benefit from economic benefits associated with the Saudi Arabia’s NREP and
investment in socio-economic development.
The no-project alternative will not contribute to the Saudi Arabia’s long-term strategy of
diversifying energy mix and will not reduce the Kingdom’s dependence on oil and gas and its
greenhouse gas emissions as part of the Paris Agreement. It will also reduce chances to
create jobs and limit economic development in the region, and then opposes Vision 2030’s
goals.
Although the predicted negative impacts of the proposed activities (e.g. vegetation clearance,
disturbance of habitat, noise and dust generation, etc) would not occur on the proposed site,
the no-project alternative may result in other and less environmentally friendly land uses to be
developed on the site.
Based on the evaluation of the no-project alternative, it seems most likely that the overall
positive impacts of the proposed activities would outweigh negative impacts if the proposed
mitigation measures and management actions are implemented. The project would help to
diversify the local economy and result in significant positive economic spin-offs primarily
because of the expenditure injection and jobs associated with it. Risks and negative impacts
would primarily arise at a local scale and site level and will be managed and controlled if the
recommendations made are well followed.
4.4 Location Alternatives
The site selection is the first step to determine the most relevant project features and setting
up the main design criteria for the projects. In order to select the most optimal site for the
future development of Airport west solar power plant, A methodology based on criteria and
factors to facilitate the spatial site selection is adopted. To assess the suitability of land for the
project, technical criteria are used including access to land and land use and socio-economic
criteria including Community interest, proximity to the distribution network distance to roads,
distance to power lines, distance to substations and environmental criteria including protected
areas, land use, hydrology, risk of dust, topography and sensitive ecologically areas outcrops,
relevant flora and wadis Site selection criteria are summarized in the Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 : Identified criteria and factors
identified criteria Factors

Accessibility
Community Interest
1 Socio-economic Slope
Proximity to electric
transmission
Used land
2 Environmental Protected Area
Flora & Fauna
Climate
Land use
3 Technical
topography, geotechnical and
hydrological suitability
Figure 4-1 : Diagram of the integration of criteria
4.5 Layout alternatives
According to preliminary hydrology study of the site, it has been appeared that the site is out
of flooding risk. No layout alternative was adopted.
4.6 Technical Alternatives
The photovoltaic plant is designed to reduce the cost of energy generated, while using
industry-proven photovoltaic technology. The proposed project design is based on standard
PV plant configurations and industry best practices and has been combined with the results
of optimization studies to define several key project parameters. A number of considerations
such as mounting system and panel cleaning are considered as detailed below.
4.6.1 Installation system

The PV installation structure is a critical component of the proposed project, due to its impact
on production capacity, as well as on operational costs. There are two alternatives to the
installation system:
• Fixed tilt mounting system

• uniaxial tracking system
For a fixed-tilt mounting system, the photovoltaic panels remain in a fixed position, usually
tilted toward an ideal angle, and the array is oriented in an east-west direction. For a monoaxial
tracking system, the photovoltaic panels are positioned in a north-south alignment, oriented
toward a single axis (+60°/-60°) to track the sun from east to the West. Figure 4-2 shows
examples of mounting systems.
Solar panels fixed without tracking system
Solar panels installed with tracking system
Figure 4-2: Examples of installation systems
4.6.2 panel cleaning system

In desert areas with a high proportion of dust in the air with little rain, dust deposition on the
surface of the panels is inevitable.
Cleaning these panels is a must to achieve maximum efficiency in the generation of electricity
from the solar cells. Various manual and automatic cleaning techniques are available.
Cleaning expenses in a solar power plant represent nearly half of the operation and
maintenance cost (Khadka et al., 2020). There are two alternatives to cleaning photovoltaic
panels:
• Water-based cleaning systems: They are best suited when water is abundant. Routine
cleaning is required from time to time, so that no precipitated particles or bird droppings
are allowed to remain for a long time on the panels. These systems create a rain-like
environment in a solar plant where hoses spray water directly onto the panels; Water
falls off the panels due to the inclination of the panels and the effect of gravity.
• Waterless/dry cleaning systems: Suitable in dry places such as deserts where water
is not available and deposition on the surface of the panels is caused by dust
accumulation only. In the waterless cleaning technique, a brush, usually dust-repelling,
rotates or moves along the surface of the board to sweep away the dust. This system
is less complicated as there is no need to store water and pump it at high speed on
the board.
4.6.3 type of photovoltaic panels

The alternatives considered for the type of PV modules are:
• monofacial
• bifacial
Unlike single-sided PV modules, bifacial modules absorb solar energy from both sides; front
and back panel. This allows the photovoltaic cell to collect a greater amount of solar
radiation, thus producing more energy (Figure 4-3)
Figure 4-3: Bifacial PV Module (Source: paradise energy solution)
The benefits of bifacial units vary greatly according to the conditions of the installation site,
and specifically the surface in which they are installed. When the two-sided units are installed
at sufficient distances and on a highly reflective surface (e.g., a white ceiling or on the floor
with light-colored stones), production can be increased by up to 25% due to the additional
radiation captured from the lower face. Conversely, narrow spaces and dark ground can nullify
these gains. The other two alternatives to the PV module are (Figure 4-4):
• full cell
• half cut cell
Figure 4-4: Solar panel cell alternatives
Half-cell modules are solar cells split in half to improve module performance and durability.
When the number of solar cells is halved, their current is halved, which reduces electrical
resistance (i.e.: higher yield). Smaller cells are not subjected to significant mechanical
stresses, which reduces cracking. Half-cell units perform better during daily operation due to
their lower power temperature coefficient, lower shading effects on power generation, reduced
hotspot hazards, and enhanced mechanical load tolerance. Some manufacturers use triple
cut cells, but this is not a standard/standard manufacture on the market yet. There is a trend
in the market towards half-cell technology due to increased power output and reduced losses
in case of shading.
4.6.4 Ground Coverage Ratio (GCR)

The PV module spacing, and tilt angles determine the land utilization ratio as shown in Figure
4-5, which is calculated by dividing the module length (A) by the distance from the primary
edge of the module to the primary edge of the adjacent module(B):
GCR = A/B
The ground coverage ratio (GCR) is used in modelling only arrays with one-axis tracking,
which includes both the 1-axis tracking and 1-axis backtracking array types. The GCR defines
the ratio of the module surface area to the area of ground that the array occupies. A GCR of
0.5 means that when the modules are horizontal (or level) half of the surface below the array
is covered by the modules. A GCR of 1 indicates that there is no space between the modules,
and a GCR of 0 means that there is infinite space. This parameter is important because
shading can occur between neighboring rows of modules in arrays of this type, and so the
GCR is used to estimate the losses due to this shading.
Figure 4-5: Differences of land coverage ratio based on the arrangement of units
In general, reducing the distance between rows of PV modules reduces net power due to
increased shading. Choosing the percentage of land utilization depends on the required
energy production and the availability of land. Various values of the land coverage ratio for the
proposed project were considered and ranged from 0.20 to 0.5. The energy lost by increasing
the ground coverage ratio from 0.20 to 0.5 is 11.4%.
4.6.5 DC/AC Ratio

The DC/AC ratio is the ratio between the power of the units and the power of the inverters.
When this ratio is one (1), the unit power and the inverter power are the same. Since solar
radiation varies throughout the day, there are moments when inverters generate much less
energy than they are capable of.
By increasing this ratio, the amount of energy generated during the day is increased, even if
there are moments when the solar field generates more energy than the transformer can
produce. This excess DC power is lost from the photovoltaic field due to the clipping effect,
but the increase in power compensates for these losses. The use of the inverter and
transformer during operation near the maximum effective range (between 85-95% of the
nominal load) can be increased by compensating for losses by increasing the peak DC power
above the nominal AC power of the inverter.
Other losses, such as those caused by temperature and degradation, can be compensated
for by increasing the DC/AC ratio.
However, increasing the DC/AC ratio above 1 will cause the PV generation to exceed the rated
power of the inverter, requiring a power constraint imposed by the inverter called the “clipping
effect” (Figure 4-6).
Figure 4-6: The effect of clipping on reflectors
The effect of the DC/AC ratio on the net power generated by the PV plant has been simulated
and a detailed energy standard cost analysis has been performed. The ratios considered
ranged from 1.20 to 1.35.
4.7 Comparison of alternatives
Table 4-2 shows a summary of the comparison of the alternatives mentioned above.
Table 4-2: Summary of the comparison between alternatives
Alternatives advantages disadvantages Chosen Justification

alternative
“No-project” There are no No power generation
environmental Loss of job
impacts as no opportunities
construction or • investment
operation loss
activities will be
carried out.
Project • Power Limited 🗸 The overall
creation generation environmental positive impact
• Reducing impacts during the generated by the
greenhouse different stages proposed project is
gas emissions Especially during significantly more
by 3.56 million construction. significant than
tons of carbon However, the effects Limited negative
are greatly mitigated effects, if any. As
dioxide as described in such, the “no
equivalent Section 3.7. project” alternative
• Providing job (no to create the
opportunities proposed project)
• Investing and is not a feasible
strengthening alternative, as it
the local will lead to the loss
economy of expected
investment and
employment as
well as the loss of
opportunities to
generate clean
energy, contrary to
the goals set for
the NEOM project
and the Saudi
National Program
for Renewable
Energy.
Project site • The area is The presence of The project The project area
designated for some shepherds in site has been has been officially
photovoltaic the proposed site selected with designated for
projects was observed during the boundaries similar
• Availability of the field visit; shown in developments
land for However, grazing is Section 7.3 for (solar photovoltaic
planned generally a seasonal the proposed fields) as part of
development activity. development Vision 2030 to
• The site is maximize the
easily potential of the
accessible and renewable energy
easily industry in the
connected to Kingdom of Saudi
the local Arabia.
electricity Their
network. characteristics are
• The level of suitable for
irradiation at creating the
the project site proposed project.
is strong, with a
global
horizontal
radiation of
2,300 kWh per
square metre.
• The specific
location is not
culturally
significant
Alternatives of technology
Installation system
Fixed tilt The operation and Reduced annual 🗸 Convenient
mounting maintenance cost power generation alternative due to
system is lower compared rate limited space and
to the single-axis requires less
tracking system. maintenance
monoaxial For the same Operation and
tracking power rating, the maintenance cost is
system annual output of higher compared to
the monoaxial fixed tilt mount
tracking system is system.
about 11% higher
than that of the
fixed-tilt mounting
system.
Panel cleaning system
Water Based Automated • Requires the
Cleaning technology does presence of
Systems not require the sprinklers
presence of and water
equipment and tanks on site
workers dedicated • It requires
for this purpose the use of
and the possibility water of a
of damage certain
The panels are quality to not
few. leave
sediments
on the
panels
• It requires
the presence
of water
always on
the site
Waterless/Dry No need to • The need for 🗸 • Reducing the
Cleaning consume water or specialized use of natural
Systems use additional personnel to resources and
equipment, for operate the ease of
example a water system implementation
treatment plant • Slight At this early
increase in stage of the
fuel project, an
consumption alternative to
for the use of waterless/dry
trucks cleaning
systems, i.e
brushing the
panels, is
preferred.
However, the
final selection
will be made
before the start
of the activities
and will take into
account the
technical and
environmental
aspects
Solar Panel Type
monofacial common The power output is
technology lower compared to a
two-sided unit.
bifacial Energy production The benefits of 🗸 Higher energy
can be increased bifacial units vary production
by up to 25% greatly according to
site conditions
full cell common Lower performance
technology and durability
compared to the half-
cell
Half cell Better and more 🗸 Improved
durable performance and
performance durability
compared to full
cells
Ground Not applicable Not applicable 0.3 For the proposed
Coverage project, a land
Ratio (GCR) coverage ratio of
0.3 was chosen as
an ideal
compromise
between land use
and energy
production. As a
result, the
distance between
the different rows
is 15.38 meters.
Given the length
of the PV
modules, the
distance between
the modules
When in the
horizontal position
it is 10.77 metres.
DC/AC ratio Not applicable Not applicable 1.25 The results of the
data analysis
indicated that for
the Airport West
solar project, the
DC/AC ratio of
1.25 is the optimal
value.
5 Description of Surroundings
A detailed description of the elements of the environment in the project area is provided by
collecting and documenting information from available sources and field visits to the project
area. Information collected to describe the project environment includes but is not limited to:
• Physical environment: surface and ground water resources, air quality, soil, area
geology, land use, and water quality.
• Biological environment: biodiversity, flora and fauna, migratory birds and animals,
natural reserves, vulnerable areas, and endangered animals.
• Economic and social environment: community structure, community employment,
family structure, public safety, heritage resources, and antiquities.
According to the documents provided by NEOM baseline surveys was undertaken in order to
identify the environmental components specific to the site of Airport West. We describe below
the methods adopted for these surveys as it was described by the NEOM Documents.
5.1 Information on the Study Area
The proposed site for the development of Airport-West solar park is located 58 km west to
Tabuk City and 80 km from the Red Sea. The current nearest road which runs along north and
west side of the site is the Road 80. It is only 1 km far to the north. This Project is located
inside the area reserved to NEOM. The closest villages are:
•Nearby villages: Shigry (South: Approximately 20 km away from the site)

•Closest large city: Tabuk (Northeast: Approximately 60 km away from the site)
The study area is a land that is under the management of the authority of NEOM. Figure 5-1
shows the area and the location of the main closest cities.
Table 5-1 : The main features of Airport west solar park site
Solar
Site available
Power Latitude Longitude General location
extension (km2)
plant
Airport- 58 km away from Tabuk
52.6 28.105621° 36.062760°
West city
Figure 5-1: Location of Airport West solar plant (source: google earth)
5.2 Physical Environment
5.2.1 Climate
In Tabuk region, the summers are long, sweltering, arid, and clear and the winters are short,
cold, dry, and mostly clear. Over the course of the year, the temperature typically varies from
5°C to 39°C and is rarely below 1°C or above 42°C (according to data recorded from 2014 to
2022) (source: weatherpark.com).
Figure 5-2: Climate at Tabuk Regional Airport
5.2.2 Temperature
The hot season lasts for four months, from May to October, with an average daily high
temperature above 34°C. The hottest month of the year in Tabuk is July, with an average high
of 38°C and low of 24°C.
The cool season lasts for three months, from December to February, with an average daily
high temperature below 22°C. The coldest month of the year is January, with an average low
of 5°C and high of 18°C (period of record from 2014 to 2022).
Figure 5-3: Average High and Low Temperature at Tabuk Regional Airport 8(source:
weatherpark.com)
Table 5-2: Temperature in Tabuk (2014 – 2022)
Average Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
High 18°C 20°C 24°C 30°C 34°C 37°C 38°C 38°C 36°C 31°C 24°C 19°C
Temp. 11°C 13°C 17°C 23°C 27°C 30°C 32°C 32°C 29°C 24°C 17°C 12°C
Low 5°C 7°C 10°C 15°C 19°C 22°C 24°C 24°C 21°C 17°C 11°C 6°C
Source: weatherpark.com
5.2.3 Humidity
The perceived humidity level in Tabuk, as measured by the percentage of time in which the
humidity comfort level is muggy, oppressive, or miserable, does not vary significantly over the
course of the year, remaining a virtually constant 0% throughout.
8
The daily average high (red line) and low (blue line) temperature, with 25th to 75th and 10th to 90th percentile
bands. The thin dotted lines are the corresponding average perceived temperatures.
Figure 5-4: Humidity Comfort Levels at Tabuk Regional Airport (source: weatherpark.com)
5.2.4 Precipitation
Tabuk does not experience significant seasonal variation in the frequency of wet days (i.e.,
those with greater than 1.00 millimeters of liquid or liquid-equivalent precipitation). The
frequency ranges from 0% to 2%, with an average value of 1%.
Among wet days, we distinguish between those that experience rain alone, snow alone, or a
mixture of the two. The month with the most days of rain alone in Tabuk is January, with an
average of 0.5 days. Based on this categorization, the most common form of precipitation
throughout the year is rain alone, with a peak probability of 2% on January.
Figure 5-5: Average Monthly Rainfall at Tabuk Regional Airport
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Average
3.5 1.7 1.0 1.4 1.1 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.1 1.2 1.7 1.4
Rainfall (mm)
Source: weatherpark.com
5.2.5 Wind
The average hourly wind speed in Tabuk experiences mild seasonal variation over the course
of the year.
The windier part of the year lasts for five months, from January to June, with average wind
speeds of more than 3.6 meters per second. The windiest month of the year in Tabuk is March,
with an average hourly wind speed of 4.0 meters per second.
The calmer time of year lasts for almost 7 months, from June to January. The calmest month
of the year in Tabuk is September, with an average hourly wind speed of 3.3 meters per
second. Wind rose from 1973 to 2021 is given by Figure 5-6 (source: Iowa state university)
Figure 5-6: Wind rose in Tabuk region
5.2.6 Geology
5.2.6.1 Regional Geology
The geology of Saudi Arabia extends in age from the Precambrian era to the present day and
forms part of a larger unit that includes the Arabian Peninsula and is known as the Arabian
Plate (www.sgs.org.sa). Based on the Saudi Geological Society classification system, Saudi
Arabia can be divided into four distinct geological divisions as shown in Figure 5-7:
• Arabian Shield.
• Arabian Platform.
• Harrats.
• Red Sea Rift Basin.
In addition to these divisions, Vincent (2008) identifies the two major sand seas (i.e. Rub’ al
Khali and An Nafud) as a fifth geological division. These sand seas are located on the Arabian
Shield.
Figure 5-7: Geological Divisions of Saudi Arabia (Source: Saudi Geological Survey, 2016)
The development site is located on the Arabian Platform (Figure 5-7). The Phanerozoic
Arabian platform is comprised of cover rocks of clastic, calcareous and evaporitic successions
dipping gently eastward away from the Arabian shield (Figure 5-8 - www.sgs.org.sa). These
sedimentary successions cover almost two-thirds of the total area of Saudi Arabia (Vincent,
2008). The Phanerozoic cover rocks of the Arabian Shield belong to the Paleozoic (540-250
Ma), Mesozoic (250- 65 Ma), and Cenozoic (65 Ma to Recent), and crop out as relatively flat
lying beds of sedimentary rocks such as sandstone, siltstone, limestone, and evaporites (salt
deposits), and volcanic rocks. The rocks were deposited uncomfortably on the underlying
Precambrian basement, in riverbeds, in glacial valleys, and in shallow seas, or were extruded
from subaerial volcanoes (www.sgs.org.sa).
The youngest deposits in the region include coral limestone and unconsolidated sand, silt,
gravel, and sabkha, which accumulated in the sand seas of Ar-Rub al Khali and An Nafud,
filled dried-up lake beds and wadis.
Figure 5-8: Geologic Map of the Arabian Peninsula (Source: www.sgs.org.sa)
5.2.6.2 Local geology
The north-western part of Saudi Arabia, bordering the Red Sea, consists of three major
geomorphologic units:
• A coastal plain of Cenozoic marine and continental deposits.

• Highland zone of Precambrian stratiform and intrusive rocks.
• Hesma plateau, developed on sub horizontal Cambrian sandstones.
Figure 5-9: Local geology of Airport West site (Source: Saudi Geological Survey)
a) Coastal plain is 1 to 10km wide in the Al Muway-lih quadrangle and overlies Tertiary and
Quaternary reef limestone and clastic sedimentary rocks. Raised beaches with maximum
elevations of about 10m above sea level are common. It is narrowest in the vicinity of Duba
and widest in the south where it merges with the alluvial deposits of Wadi Damá and Wadi Al
Murr, and with the Azlam basin, which contains Cretaceous and Tertiary sedimentary rocks.
The coastal plain extends offshore as a 10 to 25km wide continental shelf studded with coral
reefs and also several coral islands, of which the most prominent are Umm Qusur in the north
and An Nu´man man in the south.
b) Highland zone 50km wide extends inland from the coastal plain to the scarp of the Hisma
plateau. The zone consists of a western plateau area and an eastern mountain belt and
contains intermontane basins such as Wadi Shulaysiyah in the east and the connected Al
Lahyanah and Wadi Ghawjah alluvial basins in the west-central area.
The plateau area is 40km wide in the north but narrows to 5km in the south and has an average
summit level of 250 to 300m. It is a deeply dissected by wadis trending west and southwest.
Remnants of gravel sheets on the plateau are presumably of Tertiary age, indicating that the
plateau is probably an early Tertiary feature. It may pre-date deposition of the Miocene
Raghama formation and fringes the coastal plain.
c) A small part of the regionally extensive Airport West plateau lies in the northeast part of the
quadrangle.
The plot aim of our studies is located closed to the Highland zone, in the existing intermontane
basins formed between Cambrian sandstones formations and Monzogranite formations and
basalt floods complexes that are in this area.
Many runoff channels are crossing the area coming from existing sharp wadis formed in the
highland rock formations. Due to the poor existing regional drainage flood areas appears all
along of these existing basins (mainly in the south).
The areas of study are partially covered by the Quaternary siliciclastic surficial deposits,
composed by aeolian sand sheets and dunes. This formation is usually interbedded with
another quaternary deposits (Alluvial fan and flood plain deposits).
Available information on geology from bibliography appears to be enough for the ESIA study.
Geotechnical analysis and groundwater quality analysis have been carried out by TYPSA.
5.2.7 Regional soils

Due to water limiting factors, plant growth in arid areas such as NEOM is restricted in terms
of spatial coverage and biomass. Soil formation is dependent upon organic matter from plants,
therefore soils within arid areas are poorly formed and are usually high in mineral content.
Areas of better formed soils may develop in low-lying areas, where soils tend to be deeper
due to colluviation (loosely consolidated material at the base of hillslopes) and alluviation (clay,
silt, sand or gravel carried by water and deposited in areas where water flow velocity
decreases). The climate (temperature variations and wind in particular) as well as the lack of
vegetation and biological activity are factors influencing the types of soils found in NEOM.
Physical weathering is prominent in arid climates, where accumulation of lime, gypsum and
salt often occur. Soils within the NEOM region generally have high levels of calcium carbonate
due to the calcareous sediments and rocks and the lack of leaching by rainfall. Low amounts
of rain generally penetrate the soil over a small depth, creating a limited wetting front in the
upper part of the soil and hence, only surface layers tend to show horizon differentiation. Soil
depth and stoniness are important factors determining the feasibility of mechanisation, the soil
moisture storage capacity and the arability of soils. Mountain areas generally have high levels
of shallow and stony soils. Mountainous terrain and rocky outcrops represent approximately
40% of NEOM. This kind of soil have no agriculture value and will be suitable for developing
similar project on it.
Figure 5-10: Distribution of main soil types in NEOM (Baseline survey document by NEOM)
Soil characteristics gathered from previous studies elaborated on NEOM are sufficient. Until
this stage of the study no severe soil pollution was identified nor a polluting activity were found
around the site. Then, no more soil investigation would be necessary.
5.2.8 Topography and slopes
5.2.8.1 Topography
The topography of the site was analyzed from data available on Google Earth software. the
site is dominated by a regular and flat topography in the middle.
On the other side, going towards the two site ends to the south-west and north-east, the
topography becomes a little tormented with a high point on each side. the site is located in a
way between two small hills.
Figure 5-11: Topography of Airport West Site
5.2.8.2 Slope
Slope and elevation are very important technical criteria to assess the site. Slope shows the
gradient of Earth’s surface, which can be an important factor in civil works issues relevant to
construction and deployment of solar plant. Analysis of site slopes
the analysis has shown that the slopes are very low and are an excellent factor for different
civil works.
Figure 5-12 : Slopes of Airport West Site
5.2.9 Hydrology
5.2.9.1 Hydrology in Solar Photovoltaic Plants
In Solar Photovoltaic power plants, the hydrology must be considered when designing a
drainage system that will prevent the plant from flooding within its operational lifetime. This
must be evaluated thoroughly, taking a variety of aspects into consideration.
Guidelines and instructions in NEOM flood and urban stormwater design should be applied in
this case.
A detailed hydrological assessment will be developed earlier and will be exclusively dedicated
to this end. However, some preliminary considerations can be explored with available data.
5.2.9.2 Local Hydrology
The project site is in NEOM, so it is also in the northwest of Saudi Arabia. This area is very
dry, with average rainfall of around 12mm/year. This is close to the minimum values that can
be expected in the Arabian Peninsula. The area where the project site is located drains into
an internal depression where groundwater is present (the Saq-Ram Aquifer System). This
should have little to no negative impact in a solar photovoltaic project as foundations are
superficial. The existence of this aquifer could have a good impact on development of such
project by extraction of water needed from drilled wells.
Figure 5-13: Average annual (2002 2012) precipitation over the Arabian (source: reserachgate.net by
Mohamed sultan/University of Michigan)
Figure 5-14: The spatial variations in elevation in m across the Arabian Peninsula and the distribution
of watersheds, stream networks and depressions (source: www.eos.org).
5.2.9.3 Site Hydrology
Digital Elevation Model (DEM)

The delimitation of the watersheds was made with the support of the available cartography
obtained from: https://search.earthdata.nasa.gov, that contains Digital Elevation Models
(DEM) with a 12.5 x 12.5 m resolution of the project area. With this, the natural land slope
values and the configuration of streams were determined. Roads, highways and drains where
taken into consideration to determine anthropic alterations on the terrain surface present
inside and outside the site area. Through a geospatial analysis, each watershed area was
determined and analyzed, this will help us to estimate the flow design required for each type
of drainage structure.
Figure 15: Digital Elevation Model (DEM)
The identification of natural drainage paths and main streams was performed to arrange the
watersheds. As second step of the process, the physiographic characteristics of each
watershed were obtained: area, length, maximum elevation, minimum elevation and slope of
the main stream.
The slopes found within the defined watersheds have a very low profile. The terrain under
analysis is mostly flat. Figure 4 shares a map of Slope watershed values; the projection
displays slope values between 5 and 10 % inside the PV plant area.
Figure 16: Slope Values in PV Airport West
Watersheds and physiographic characteristics

The watershed sizing factor determines the peak flow that could be expected. Larger
watershed will collect water from larger catchment areas, this will result in high volume runoffs.
Generated watersheds for Airport West PV plant have a range minor to 100 km2. The basin
highest elevation area is at the central part of Airport West property, where the watershed can
be seen.
The following figure shows the defined watersheds:
Figure 17: Project catchment watersheds
The Table shows physiographic characteristics of each defined watershed and their main
streams. Larger watersheds supply larger volumes of water; therefore, we expect high water
flow in STREAM-AIR-04 main stream.
Area Length
Watershed 2
Main Stream
(km ) (km)
WS-AIR-01 18.38 STREAM-AIR-01 6.72
Present Land Use
The current Land Use was assessed by using Landsat imagery obtained using Geographic
Information Systems and Google Earth. For Airport West PV Plant watersheds, there are two
types of Land Use. The predominant land use types are bare soil, followed by hilly with
average slopes of 10 to 30%, see Figure 6.
According to data collected during a field visit, the characteristic lithology in the area
corresponds to reddish aeolian sands.
Figure 18: Land use in watersheds Airport West Project
Rainfall intensity
Intensity-duration-frequency curves (IDF curves) are a mathematical function that relates the
rainfall intensity with its duration and frequency of occurrence. These curves are commonly
used in hydrology for flood forecasting and should be used to analyze the flood risk in the
project’s site area.
The IDF curves used in this report are extracted from the academic article “Development of
intensity– duration–frequency curves for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia” published by the
Department of Hydrology and Water Resources Management in November 2016.
The accuracy of these data has been tested using the report “Second Edition NEOM
Stormwater and Pollutant Runoff Management Guidelines” provided by NEOM and published
in October 2020. Both distributions are found to show similar behavior, so the reliability of the
data is proved
Figure 19: IDF curves from the rainfall records collected at Tabuk, provided by MoMRA, for a range of return periods
The data obtained between 1975 and 1995 at Tabuk Weather station was considered. The
relationships of the fitting parameters of the IDF equation for that station is given in the next
table:
Figure 20: Fitted relationships for parameters a and b of IDF formula for Tabuk TB002 station and the accompanied
coefficient of determination
Using the above equation, the intensities for various rainfall event durations were generated
for five return periods (RP).
However, this project only considers a 100-year RP for this flood analysis.
Performing an analysis and calculations for other return periods should only show the risk
level that can be considered for less extreme and more frequent events.
Table 3: Intensity data
Intensity (mm/h)
Watershed
I (TR25) I (TR50) I (TR100)
WS-AIR-01 13.85 16.42 19.14
WS-AIR-02 12.75 15.14 17.66
WS-AIR-03 6.17 7.38 8.67
WS-AIR-04 9.00 10.72 12.55
WS-AIR-05 7.07 8.44 9.90
Flood Hazard
The results for the flood risk map were obtained with a geospatial analysis by multiplying the
raster of flood flows and velocity values for a return period of 100 years.
The results show the areas where Airport West PV plant infrastructure will be placed. Part of
the surveyed area is classified as low flood risk zone (H1). The high flood risk zones (H4) are
located in the flood spots distributed within the center of the site area due to the existing ground
level irregularities.
Figure 21: Classification Flood Hazard (DxV) for the RT= 100 years
Conclusions
A hydrological study has been carried out for the Airport West solar energy plant, within the
NEOM project, to study the hydrological behavior of the site during different rainfall episodes.
Below it is presented the results of the studies:
• The terrain can be considered flat with several outcrops rocks along all the surface.
Near the outcrops the slope increase, in particular at the east part of the area. Due to
the topography, there are five main basins inside the plant. Those watersheds, formed
within the Airport West area, drain water outside the site. Because of this condition the
flooding model only considers the hyetographs.
• There is a highway that goes through Airport West in the central part of the plant from
northwest to southeast. This element is made by cutting so it represents a zone of
preferent flow. The runoffs at the central, northern, and southern basins are gathered
at the highway.
• At the central, northern, and south zones of the property there are multiple water
accumulations that can be up to 4 ha wide with depths between 1.00 m and 5.00m.
However, the runoff’s velocities do no exceed 0.3 m/s.
• The south and west zones of the site have a good runoff going southeast. Given the
topography of the area, the runoffs can be guided through gravity outside the property.
Waterlogging in this area is low and does not exceed 0.30 m in depth, so it is not
considered to be high risk.
• The basin limits are inside the plant, so the effluent expected will be relatively
negligible. Despite that, it is important to study the possibility of the erosion of the
terrain because of the high velocity of the runoffs.
• The main hazard for the plant is the presence of the water accumulations on the central
zone, so, with the aim of defining the best solution to it, an alternatives analysis will be
carried out.
5.2.10 Hydrogeology
5.2.10.1 General Hydrogeology
The Arabian Peninsula can be divided in the predominantly Precambrian igneous and
metamorphic Arabian Shield in the western portion and in the Arabian Platform in the eastern
portion, covered by basin sediments with a thickness sometimes exceeding 10.000 m and
forming one of the largest aquifer systems in the world.
The area of Neom is characterized essentially by the presence of aquifers in bedrock and
superficial formation; the main characteristics are given below.
5.2.10.2 Local hydrogeology
The project site is located in the exploitable area of Saq-Ram Aquifer System which have the
following characteristics:
5.2.10.2.1 Aquifer geometry
The system comprises 3 hydraulically connected layers. It is mostly confined although some
parts are unconfined. The thickness of the aquifer system, including aquitards, varies from
2500m to 250m.
5.2.10.2.2 Hydrogeological aspects
The dominant aquifer lithology is sedimentary rocks – sandstones. The system normally
receives a recharge of about 90Mm³/annum of freshwater that may increase to nearly 400
Mm³/annum due to extreme events. The freshwater percolates through a recharge area of
approximately 35 000 km².
Primary type of porosity is predominant that allows low vertical connectivity between layers.
Transmissivity values recorded across the aquifer states range between 3,700 and 90 m²/d
with an average of 1,300 m²/d.
5.2.10.2.3 Linkages with other water systems
There is evidence for a limited amount of recharge in high plateau and escarpment areas
through the sandstones outcrop. The main and final discharge zone for the system is the Dead
Sea (In Jordan) but some discharge also occurs en-route in the form of springs and baseflow
in deeply incised wadis that eventually discharge into the Dead Sea.
The existence of this aquifer could have a good impact on development of such project by
abstraction of water needed from drilled wells.
The Saq-Ram Aquifer System is represented in Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22: Aquifer flow and discharge within the Saq-Ram Aquifer System (West) (source:
water.fanack.com)
According to hydrogeology, more investigations, via boreholes, should be accomplished to

assess the real state of groundwater in the site and the real risks to face during project
construction and operation.
5.2.11 Air quality
5.2.11.1 Particulate matter PM2.5 and PM10
Measurements of PM10 and PM2.5 were taken in two points in the site having the following
geographic coordinates (latitude, longitude) (see Figure 5-23):
• PV-NAQ3 : latitude : 28.12975 N, longitude = 36.08969 E

• PV-NAQ4 : latitude = 28.0948 N, longitude = 36.02332 E
Figure 5-23: Air Sampling Locations
Sixty-second spot measurements of PM10 and PM2.5 were taken using an Aerocet 531S
particulates meter which was zeroed prior to taking the measurements. A copy of the
manufacturer’s certificate of calibration is included in appendices.
Results of these measurements are recapitulated in the Table 5-4 below.
Table 5-4: Summary of Particulate Matter (PM2.5 and PM10) measurements
Date Time Weather Results KSA WHO

Site Ref. (μg/m3) Standards Standards
Wind Cloud Temp Wind PM10 PM2.5 (μg/m3; (μg/m3; daily
(m/s) cover (°C) Direction daily average)
(%) average)
PV- 10.6.22 12:30 3 0 33 NE 115.2 26.8
NAQ3 19.6.22 23:45 1 0 27 W 65.9 14.2
PM10 = 340 PM10 = 45
PV- 9.6.22 13:05 4 0 33 NE 45 18.1 PM2.5 = 35 PM2.5 =15
NAQ4 19.6.22 23:05 1 0 27 W 41.6 13.5
Date Time Weather Results KSA WHO
Site Ref. (μg/m3) Standards Standards
Wind Cloud Temp Wind PM10 PM2.5 (μg/m3; (μg/m3; daily
(m/s) cover (°C) Direction daily average)
(%) average)
Results exceeding the benchmark standards are indicated in red and indicate exceedance of WHO standards.
None of the results exceeded the national daily standards (MEWA, 2020a) for PM10 or PM2.5.
The international guideline values used, World Health Organisation (WHO) daily guidelines
for air quality (World Health Organization, 2021), which are lower than the Saudi national
standards, were exceeded for PM10 on three out of four occasions and for PM2.5 on two out
of four occasions. While these are only spot (instantaneous) measurements they likely
indicative of longer-term PM levels. The air quality measurements were in line with expected
conditions in the region where PM concentrations may, at times, be elevated due to the wind,
arid climate and low vegetation cover.
5.2.11.2 Gaseous pollutants
Monitoring results of (O3, CO, NO2, SO2, O3) were available in documentation provided by
NEOM. These results were obtained from a long-term (May to September 2021) daily
monitoring campaign covering NEOM area undertaken by Amec Foster Wheeler Energy and
Partners Engineering Company (Known as “Wood”). Measurements are undertaken by Air
Quality Monitoring Station (AQMS). Three stations of measurement whose coordinates are
given by Table 5-5 were close to three sites of Sharifa, Airport West and Hasma. Results
obtained was compiled and compared against NCEC air quality standards (See Table 5-6).
Table 5-5: Air quality monitoring sampling locations
Point ID Latitude Longitude

The line PAQ sampling No. 11 28.138797° 35.947167°
Figure 5-24: Locations of Air quality monitoring sampling
Table 5-6: Summary of gaseous pollutants monitoring
NCEC Proposed Number of

Averaging maximum Allowed number
# Pollutant Standards (µg.m- exceedances Comments
Period average of exceedances
3) observed
1 1-hour 20585.00 40,000 0 1 time per year Compliant to NCEC standard
2 Carbon monoxide (CO) 8- hour 4035.22 10,000 0 2 times per month Compliant to NCEC standard
3 1- hour 351.87 200 1 24 times per year Compliant to NCEC standard
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) Measurements covered only 5 months
4 1-year 3.62 100 0 -
(May to Sept 2021)
5 1- hour 481.14 441 1 24 times per year 1 time exceedance in 5 months
6 Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 24-hour 35.48 217 0 3 times per year Compliant to NCEC standard
7 1-year 2.881 65 0 - Compliant to NCEC standard
25 days per year
8 8- hour 190.85 157 15 averaged over 3 Measurements covered only 5 months
Ozone (O3) years (May to Sept 2021)

5.2.12 Ambient noise
Ambient noise measurements, both diurnal and nocturnal, were undertaken at the same two
locations where Particulate Matter (PM2.5 and PM10) where taken (see Figure 5-23).
Noise measurements were conducted using a Cirrus Research CR: 1710 mounted on a tripod.
The noise meter was calibrated using an external calibrator prior to commencing
measurements. Wind speed was also measured during the monitoring period using an
anemometer.
The noise meter was set to measure dBA with a fast response. Following the Implementing
Regulation for Noise under Environmental Law, issued by Royal Decree No. M/165, dated
19/11/1441 (MEWA, 2020), daytime is defined as the period between 07:00 and 20:00, and
night-time is defined as the period between 20:00 and 07:00. At each location, noise was
measured for a period of 15 minutes once during daytime, and once during night-time.
Monitoring results for noise measurements are shown in Table 5-7. No results of
measurements taken exceeded the benchmark national standards for medium density
residential areas (MEWA, 2020) nor the International Finance Corporation (IFC) noise
standards for residential housing (IFC, 2007) (both 45 dBA - day and 55 dBA night-time). The
recorded noise sources were influenced slightly by the wind and feral dogs.

Table 5-7: Summary of Noise Measurements
LAeq LAFmax LAFmin LAF10 LAF50 LAF90 KSA/ IFC

Site Ref. Date Time Period Wind dB(A) Benchmark Main Noise
N/E (m/s) standard Sources
dB(A)
PV-NAQ3 10.6.22 12:30 Daytime 3 40.6 67.7 24.3 40.8 34.6 29.1 55 Wind
28.12975 N 19.6.22 23:45 Nighttime 1 22 53.6 15.6 20 20 20 45 Dogs
36.08969 E
PV-NAQ4 9.6.22 13:05 Daytime 4 40.8 62.3 26.4 43.5 30.6 28.3 55 Wind
28.0948 N 19.6.22 23:05 Nighttime 1 23.9 41 19.4 25.1 23.2 21.5 45 -
36.02332 E

5.2.13 Land use
The Project site did not include any major settlements (villages or towns); however, there were
numerous camps, varying in size and make up, with structures such as tents, buildings,
livestock enclosures and mobile homes all observed. Some of the camps appeared permanent
rather than temporary and are possibly recreational camps for use by the public. Some of the
camps were clearly associated with livestock rearing and herding. There was a weather station
along a constructed gravel road to the south-west of the site.
There was an access road, initially tarmac and later gravel, running north to south across the
middle of the site. There was a disconnected power line in the north-eastern corner of the site,
Examples of land use features are presented in
Table 5-8 and Figure 5-25 provides the locations of key land use observations that were
recorded during the survey.
Figure 5-25: Locations of Camps and other Features within Project Site

Table 5-8: Examples of Land Use Features within the Project Site
Waypoint
Type Long. /Lat. Descriptive Photo
Image Bearing
28.12448
Recreational camp 36.0298
28.10134
Nomadic Camp 36.04381
28.07538
Recreational Camp 36.02773
Land use survey seems to be sufficient and has identified all sensitive receptors represented
essentially by campers, although their limited number and very random distribution.
5.2.14 Landscape features
Key landscape features on the Project site included the following (Table 5-9) and
• A complex of small Sandstone outcrops in the north-western portion of the site.
• Area of sandstone bedrock at the surface amongst dunes, most likely linked to the
outcrops above.
• Small drainage wadi (also in north-west) with a few small and mature Acacia trees; and
• Large free standing sandstone mesa / outcrop on the eastern side of the access road
of the site.
Table 5-9: Example of Key Landscape Feature within Project Site
Waypoint Long. Lat.

Type Descriptive Photo
Image Bearing
Sandstone WP 262
outcrop 36.0323 / 28.1211
Sand dunes with WP 268

sandstone
36.0394 / 28.1079
bedrock at surface
WP 313
36.0685 / 28.1166
Sandstone mesa
Waypoint Long. Lat.
Type Descriptive Photo
Image Bearing
Sandy wadis with

mix of small and WP 263
mature Acacia 36.0313 / 28.1191
trees East
Figure 5-26: Locations of Key Landscape Features
Landscape survey seems to be sufficient and have identified the most important landscape
feature that distinguish the site.
5.3 Terrestrial biodiversity
5.3.1 Personnel and survey time

The Airport West baseline surveys were conducted by Robert Mortimer (Senior Environmental
Specialist) and Tariq Othman Aljohany (Field Technician). The survey included flora, fauna,
landscape & landuse, degradation and archaeological features. Noise and air quality
measurements were taken by Tariq Othman Aljohany. Survey dates are detailed in Table 5-10.
Results are reported in the “Rapid Environmental Baseline Survey report (83152-NEOM-
TREP-30JUN22-195-REV01, June 2022).
Table 5-10: Survey Activities and Dates
Survey Site Survey Activities Dates

Fauna, landscape, heritage rapid surveys,
floral quadrats and diurnal noise and 9th and 10th June 2022
Airport West particulate monitoring
Nocturnal noise 19th June 2022
5.3.2 Transect Survey and Limitations

The location of survey inspection routes / transects are depicted in Figure 5-27. The survey
team drove or walked along transects while documenting features of interest. Survey transects
were walked or driven by 4WD at less than 20 km/h. Where features of importance were
identified or key habitat areas were observed while driving, the survey team left the car to
inspect areas on foot. Features of interest were photographed, using a Nikon Coolpix W300
compact camera (close up and landscape images), and a Sony DSC-RX10 M3 camera (zoom
images); locations were recorded using a handheld Garmin GPSMAP 64sx global positioning
system (GPS) device, and waypoint (WP) field notes were taken. Flora and fauna species that
could not be identified in the field, were photographed to assist post-survey species
identification.
Figure 5-27: Survey Transects
5.3.3 Flora survey

5.3.3.1 Flora Quadrats
Quadrats were placed within homogenous habitat types as identified in the field making use
of the broad scale habitat mapping provided by NEV. Quadrats were not placed in locations
where it was not physically possible to stake out and delineate, e.g. rock outcrops and steep
slopes. Site condition recordings were used to compliment quadrat data in homogenous
biotypes and better record species richness for the Project site.
Flora abundance was overall estimated for a given location and is subject to observer
judgement. Abundance was recorded making use of the DAFOR scale (Kent & Coker, 1992),
where for each species within the quadrat, the relative abundance of the plant at that point is
recorded as follows:
• D - Species is "Dominant" in a given area;

• A - Species is "Abundant" in a given area;
• F - Species is "Frequent" in a given area;
• O- Species is "Occasional" in a given area; and
• R - Species is "Rare" in a given area.
Once an area for a quadrat had been selected, the four corner points were determined using
a tape measure. These were then staked out using tent pegs and a tape was placed around
the boundary. The quadrat size was 10 m by 10 m.
At each quadrat, a form was completed recording a series of attributes including species
presence and abundance. Field data was later extracted and transferred into a data matrix.
All photographic landscape shots and soils were taken using a Nikon Coolpix W300 with GPS
and photograph direction enabled. Photographic profiles of plants which could not be
immediately identified in the field were also taken – this avoided the need to collect voucher
herbarium specimens.
In addition, the positions of species of ecological importance were also recorded. The method
used for determining whether a tree was mature consisted of measuring the trunk diameter at
breast height (approximately 1.5 m high) and trees with a trunk diameter of 15 cm or above
were classified as mature. However, in some instances, trees display a growth form where
many relatively thin branches extend from the ground; these trees were also considered
mature and were recorded.
Figure 5-28: Quadrat Survey Locations
5.3.3.2 Limitations
Recorded features should be considered a sample, representative of the site characteristics
and conditions and do not represent all features present.
5.3.3.3 Vegetation Communities
Biotopes of the Project Site included sand sheets in the form of plains and dunes with some
areas of bare gravel plain intrusions. Topography of the site varies from flat to rolling dune
hills over the large majority and rocky hills in the east and scattered outcrops and rocky, shale
exposures in the form of ridges. A single, small drainage wadi was recorded on site.
The site had low vegetation coverage, with the gravel plain biotopes almost completely devoid
of vegetation. The prominent vegetation growth form on the site was dwarf shrubs.
Examples of the biotopes encountered during the survey are shown in Table 5-11.
Table 5-11: Examples of Biotope Types
Biotopes Associated Vegetation Waypoint Longitude Latitude Descriptive Photo

Image Bearing
Haloxylon
salicornicum
4130 Artemisia WP 273
Sand sheets and dunes monosperma Cleome 36.0230 /
with dwarf shrub cover ambylocarpa Kickxia 28.0946
aegyptiaca North
Centropodia forskalii
Stipagrostis sp.
5130 Haloxylon WP 273

Gravel plains with sparse salicornicum Retama 36.0292 /
vegetation raetam Zygophyllum 28.0626
sp. North
Stipagrostis sp.
Citrullus colocynthis
Retama raetam
Lycium shawii
Haloxylon salicornicum
Lavendula coronopifolia

Image Bearing
Asparagus horridus
Ephedra foliate
Trichodesma africanum
Echinops glaberrimus
Plantago ovata WP 313
6210 Asphodelus sp. 36.0685 /
Sandstone plateaus Stipa cf. parviflora 28.1166
North
Polygala schwartiziana
Tricholaena teneriffae
Pennisetum ciliare
Plantago ovata
Asphodelus sp.
Stipagrostis ciliata
Helianthemum lippii
Pycnocycla sp.
Eremobium aegyptiacum
Artemisia
monosperma Retama
raetam Polycarpaea
robbairea
Stipagrostis sp.
6220 Haloxylon WP 305
Escarpments, lithified sand salicornicum 36.0926 /
dunes, rocky exposures Euphorbia retusa 28.1111
Morettia parviflora North
Zygophyllum
arabicum Haloxylon
salicornicum
Euphorbia retusa
Stipagrostis obtusa
Chenopodium sp.
Image Bearing
Vachellia gerrardii
Retama raetam
Haloxylon
salicornicum
Euphorbia retusa
6230 Kickxia aegyptiaca WP 263
Wadis with sandy or Polycarpaea
gravelly floors, and robbairea Seetzenia East
channelized drainage lanata Teucrium
channels oliverianum Morettia
parviflora Paronychia
arabica Zygophyllum
arabicum
5.3.3.4 Flora
5.3.3.4.1 Flora desk study

The flora of Saudi Arabia reflects the geographical position of the Arabian Peninsula between
Africa, Asia and Europe. Thus, the plant environment has many homologous groups with two
out of the eight global terrestrial environments. The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia is generally an
arid country with a few exceptional semi-humid regions located on the southwestern shelf and
divided into three units according to biogeography: desert-Sindhi, Somali-Masur, Afro-
Mountain. The following table (Table 5-12) presents the flora diversity of the Tabuk region.
Table 5-12: Flora of the Tabuk region
No. Scientific name No. Scientific name

1 Ifloga spicata 71 Haloxylon salicornicum
2 Maerua crassifolia 72 Helianthemum lippii
3 Savignya parviflora, 73 Heliotropium crispum
4 Schimpera arabica 74 Heliotropium europaeum
5 Silene villosa 75 Hygrophila auriculata
6 Ziziphus spina-christi 76 Hyoscyamus desertorum
7 Plantago ciliata 77 Hyoscyamus muticus
8 A. annularis 78 Hyoscyamus pusillus .
9 Acacia raddiana 79 Juniperus phoenicea
10 Acacia tortilis 80 Kickxia floribunda
11 Acacia tortilis 81 Kickxia scoparia
12 Aeluropus lagopoides 82 Launaea spinosa
13 Aerva javanica 83 Lavandula coronopifolia
14 Aizoon canariense 84 Lavandula Pubescens
15 Alkanna orientalis 85 Lotus glinoides
16 Anthemis melampodina 86 Lycium depressum
17 Artemisia herba-alba 87 Lycium shawii
18 Artemisia judaica L. 88 Lycium shawii
19 Artemisia sieberi 89 Malva neglecta
20 Artemisia monosperma 90 Medicago laciniata
21 Asphodelus tenuifolius 91 Monsonia nivea
22 Astragalus eremophilus 92 Morettia canescens
23 Astragalus palaestinus 93 Morettia parviflora
24 Astragalus schimperi 94 Moringa peregrina
25 Astragalus spinosa 95 Neurada procumbens
26 Astragalus spinosus 96 Ochradenus baccatus
27 Astragalus tribuloides 97 Ononis natrix
28 Astragalus tribuloides 98 Otostegia fruticosa
29 Atractylis carduus 99 Parietaria alsinifolia
30 Bellevalia flexuosa 100 Peganum harmala
31 Bromus sericeus 101 Pharagmites australis
32 Caralluma europaea 102 Picris cyanocarpa
33 Caylusea hexagyna 103 Plantago amplexicaulis
34 Centaurea procurrens 104 Plantago boissieri
35 Centaurea sinaica 105 Plantago ciliata

36 Cistanche salsa 106 Polycarpaea robbairea
37 Citrullus colocynthis 107 Pulicaria incisa
38 Cleome amblyocarpa 108 Pulicaria undulata
39 Cleome arabica 109 Reseda muricata
40 Colchicum ritchii 110 Reseda pruinosa
41 Colchicum tunicatum 112 Retama raetam
42 Convolvulus buschiricus 114 Rhanterium epapposum
43 Crotalaria aegyptiaca 115 Rumex cyprius
44 Cutandia memphitica 116 Salsola tetrandra
45 Deverra tortuosa 117 Salsola spp.
46 Diplotaxis harra 118 Scorzonera tortuosissima
47 Echinops glaberrimus 119 Seetzenia lantana
48 Ephedra aphylla 120 Senecio glaucus
49 Eremobium aegyptiacum 121 Silene villosa
50 Eremobium lineare 122 Stachys aegyptiaca
51 Eremobium lineare3 123 Stipa lagascae
52 Erodium laciniatum 124 Stipa obtusa
53 Erodium oxyrhynchum 125 Stipagrostis Cornulaca
54 Euphorbia retusa 126 Stipagrostis, Cyperus,
55 Fagonia arabica Arabica 127 Tamarix nilotica
56 Fagonia bruguieri 128 Tanacetum sinaicum
57 Fagonia glutinosa 129 Teucrium polium
58 Fagonia mollis hispida 130 Traganum nudatum
59 Farsetia aegyptiaca 131 Traganum nudatum
60 Ferula sinaica 132 Tribulus terrestris
61 Gagea commutata 133 Trichodesma africanum
62 Gagea reticulata 134 Trigonella anguina
63 Gastrocotyle hispida3 135 Trigonella stellata
64 Gymnocarpos decandrus 136 Umbilicus intermedius
65 Gynandriris sisyrinchium 137 Verbascum sinaiticum
66 Gypsophila viscosa 138 Zilla spinosa spinosa
67 Halocnemum strobilaceum 139 Zygophyllum coccineum
68 Haloxylon persicum
69 Haloxylon salicornicum
70 Haloxylon salicornicum
5.3.3.4.2 Species recoded during survey

A total of 54 flora species were recorded during the survey (Table 5-13) representing 23
families. Asteraceae and Poaceae were most common families with seven species each and
Zygophyllaceae with five and Brassicaceae with four species were also well represented.
One flora species, Ficus palmata, (Figure 5-29 and Figure 5-30) is a High Conservation Priority
(HCP) Species protected under the First Saudi Arabian National Report on the Convention on
Biological Diversity (NCWCD, 2004), while none were listed under the International Union for
Nature Conservation (IUCN) Red List (IUCN, 2021) or the Convention on the Conservation of
Wildlife and their Natural Habitats in the Countries of the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC,
2003).
Figure 5-29: Ficus palmata
Table 5-13: Flora Species Recorded
Family Scientific Name Common Name IUCN Status (Ver. 2021- KSA HCP Species GCC Convention (GCC,
3) Criteria (NCWCD, 2003)
2004)
Amaranthaceae Chenopodium sp. - - - -
Haloxylon Not found NE NL NL
salicornicum
Asparagaceae Asparagus horridus Not found NE NL NL
Asphodelaceae Asphodelus sp. - - - -
Artemisia Not found NE NL NL
monosperma
Centaurea Golden Star NE NL NL
pseudosinaica Thistle
Asteraceae Centaurea sinaica Not found NE NL NL
Centaurea sp. - - - -
Echinops Globe Thistle NE NL NL
glaberrimus
Launaea mucronata Not found NE NL NL
Picris sp. - - - -
Boraginaceae Trichodesma African Barbbell NE NL NL
africanum
Heliotropium Not found NE NL NL
bacciferum
Eremobium Not found NE NL NL
aegyptiacum
Brassicaceae Morettia canescens Aslar NE NL NL
Morettia parviflora Small Balsam NE NL NL
Zilla spinosa Spiny Zilla NE NL NL
Paronychia arabica Not found NE NL NL
Caryophyllaceae Polycarpaea repens Not found NE NL NL
Polycarpaea Not found NE NL NL
robbairea

2004)
Cistaceae Helianthemum lippii Sunrose/Rockrose NE NL NL
Cleomaceae Cleome Spider flower NE NL NL
ambylocarpa
Convolvulaceae Convolvulus Bindweed NE NL NL
buschiricus
Cucurbitaceae Citrullus colocynthis Desert Squash, NE NL NL
Bitter Apple
Ephedraceae Ephedra foliata Shrubby Horsetail LC NL NL
Euphorbiaceae Euphorbia retusa Not found NE NL NL
Astragalus spinosus Milkvetch NE NL NL
Fabaceae Retama raetam White Broom NE NL NL
Vachellia gerrardii Red Thorn NE NL NL
Geraniaceae Erodium sp. - - - -
Erodium Not found NE NL NL
glaucophyllum
Lamiaceae Lavandula Stagshorn NE NL NL
coronopifolia Lavender
Teucrium Desert NE NL NL
oliverianum Germander
Moraceae Ficus palmata Wild Fig NE 6 NL
Orobanchaceae Cistanche sp. - - - -
Plantaginaceae Kickxia aegyptiaca Egyptian Toadflax NE NL NL
Plantago ovata Psyllium Plant NE NL NL
Centropodia forskalii Mauritania NE NL NL
Pennisetum ciliare Not found LC NL NL
Poaceae sp. - - - -
Poaceae Stipa cf. parviflora Not found NE NL NL
Stipagrostis sp. - - - -
Stipagrostis ciliata Tall Bushman NE NL NL
2004)
Grass
Stipagrostis drarii Not found NE NL NL
Stipagrostis obtusa Not found NE NL NL
Tricholaena Not found NE NL NL
teneriffae
Polygalaceae Polygala Not found NE NL NL
schwartiziana
Solanaceae Lycium shawii Box Thorn LC NL NL
Seetzenia lanata Wild Bullock NE NL NL
Zygophyllum Not found NE NL NL
Zygophyllaceae arabicum
bruguieri
glutinosum
Zygophyllum sp. - - - -
NE -not evaluated; LC - Least Concern; NL – not listed; N/A – not applicable
5.3.3.4.3 Quadrat Survey
A description of the quadrats surveyed is provided in Table 5-14. A total of 17 species were
recorded within the quadrats.
None of the species were found on the IUCN Red List of Threatened Species, nor was any
species listed in Appendix 1 of the Convention on the Conservation of Wildlife and their Natural
Habitats in the Countries of the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC, 2003) or the First Saudi
Arabian National Report on the Convention on Biological Diversity (NCWCD, 2004). No
invasive species were recorded during the survey.

Table 5-14: Description of Quadrats
Quadrat Latitude Longitude Survey Date Biotope Descriptive Photo
AQ1 28.12517 36.03321 9.6.22 Sand Sheets
AQ2 28.09468 36.02301 9.6.22 Sand sheets with Dunes

Quadrat Latitude Longitude Survey Date Biotope Descriptive Photo
AQ3 28.07886 36.07046 9.6.22 Sand sheets
AQ4 28.1111 36.09262 10.6.22 Rocky

Exposure
Important Flora
• Two small specimens of Wild Fig (Ficus palmata) were recorded at the base of a
sandstone mesa with an adjacent gravelly sand plain and sand dunes. These trees
are cultivated in Saudi Arabia and also provide cover and feeding opportunities for
birds. The location of the specimen is provided in Figure 5-30.
Figure 5-30: Location of HCP Flora Species
Flora survey is sufficient as it identified the HCP species that should be protected during the
project phases.
5.3.3.5 Fauna
Records of fauna have been derived from observations during diurnal walk-over and drive-
over surveys. No camera trap or bat detector devices were installed during the survey.
5.3.3.5.1 Avifauna
5.3.3.5.1.1 Avifauna desk study
Including the types of birds found in Tabuk region: Pigeon, hoopoe, eagle, hawk, bird,
partridge, Babylon, wagtail, crow, bee-eater, stonemason, and bulbul, The following table lists
the types of birds that are likely to be found in Tabuk Region. This list (Table 5-15) is based
on the observation of many birders having been working all around the region of Tabuk.

Table 5-15: Bird species likely to be present in the region of Tabuk
No Scientific name No Scientific name No Scientific name No Scientific name

1 Spatula querquedula 101 Chlidonias hybrida 201 Hirundo rustica 301 Accipitridae sp. (hawk sp.)
2 Spatula clypeata 102 Sterna hirundo 202 Cecropis daurica 302 Falco naumanni/tinnunculus
3 Mareca strepera 103 Thalasseus bergii 203 Delichon urbicum 303 Falco sp.
4 Mareca penelope 104 Thalasseus bengalensis 204 Pycnonotus xanthopygos 304 Lanius phoenicuroides/isabellinus
5 Anas platyrhynchos 105 Douglas Tilbury 205 Pycnonotus leucotis 305 Lanius sp.
6 Anas acuta 106 Phaethon aethereus 206 Phylloscopus orientalis 306 Alaudala rufescens/heinei
7 Anas crecca 107 Ciconia nigra 207 Phylloscopus inornatus 307 Alaudidae sp.
8 Oxyura leucocephala 108 Ciconia ciconia 208 Phylloscopus trochilus 308 Hippolais sp.
9 Aythya nyroca 109 Sula leucogaster 209 Phylloscopus collybita 309 Acrocephalus sp.
10 Ammoperdix heyi 110 Phalacrocorax carbo 210 Scotocerca inquieta 310 Hirundinidae sp.
11 Coturnix coturnix 111 Pelecanus onocrotalus 211 Sylvia atricapilla 311 Phylloscopus sp.
12 Alectoris melanocephala 112 Ixobrychus minutus 212 Curruca nisoria 312 Sylvia/Curruca sp.
13 Alectoris chukar 113 Ardea cinerea 213 Curruca curruca 313 Saxicola rubicola/maurus
14 Phoenicopterus roseus 114 Ardea goliath 214 Curruca crassirostris 314 Oenanthe xanthoprymna/chrysopygia
15 Tachybaptus ruficollis 115 Ardea purpurea 215 Curruca nana 315 Nectariniidae sp. (sunbird sp.)
16 Columba livia 116 Ardea alba 216 Curruca mystacea 316 Passer sp.
17 Streptopelia turtur 117 Egretta garzetta 217 Curruca ruppeli 317 Motacilla sp.
18 Streptopelia decaocto 118 Egretta gularis 218 Curruca melanocephala 318 Anthus sp.
19 Streptopelia roseogrisea 119 Bubulcus ibis 219 Curruca cantillans 319 Passeriformes sp.
20 Streptopelia senegalensis 120 Ardeola ralloides 220 Curruca communis
21 Oena capensis 121 Butorides striata 221 Argya squamiceps
22 Tetrax tetrax 122 Nycticorax nycticorax 222 Sturnus vulgaris
23 Clamator glandarius 123 Plegadis falcinellus 223 Pastor roseus
24 Cuculus canorus 124 Platalea leucorodia 224 Acridotheres tristis
25 Caprimulgus aegyptius 125 Pandion haliaetus 225 Onychognathus tristramii
26 Apus melba 126 Elanus caeruleus 226 Turdus philomelos
27 Apus apus 127 Neophron percnopterus 227 Muscicapa striata

28 Apus pallidus 128 Pernis apivorus 228 Cercotrichas podobe
29 Apus affinis 129 Torgos tracheliotos 229 Cercotrichas galactotes
30 Rallus aquaticus 130 Gyps fulvus 230 Irania gutturalis
31 Crex crex 131 Circaetus gallicus 231 Luscinia luscinia
32 Porzana porzana 132 Clanga clanga 232 Luscinia megarhynchos
33 Ibrahim Alshwamin 133 Hieraaetus pennatus 233 Luscinia svecica
34 Gallinula chloropus 134 Aquila nipalensis 234 Ficedula semitorquata
35 Ibrahim Alshwamin 135 Aquila heliaca 235 Ficedula albicollis
36 Fulica atra 136 Aquila fasciata 236 Phoenicurus phoenicurus
37 Ibrahim Alshwamin 137 Circus aeruginosus 237 Phoenicurus ochruros
38 Burhinus oedicnemus 138 Circus cyaneus 238 Monticola solitarius
39 Ibrahim Alshwamin 139 Circus macrourus 239 Saxicola rubetra
40 Himantopus himantopus 140 Circus pygargus 240 Saxicola rubicola
41 Ibrahim Alshwamin 141 Accipiter nisus 241 Saxicola maurus
42 Recurvirostra avosetta 142 Milvus migrans 242 Oenanthe oenanthe
43 Matthew Fuirst 143 Buteo buteo 243 Oenanthe isabellina
44 Haematopus ostralegus 144 Buteo rufinus 244 Oenanthe monacha
45 Pluvialis squatarola 145 Otus scops 245 Oenanthe deserti
46 Pluvialis fulva 146 Bubo ascalaphus 246 Oenanthe melanoleuca
47 Vanellus spinosus 147 Athene noctua 247 Oenanthe pleschanka
48 Khalifa Al Dhaheri 148 Strix hadorami 248 Oenanthe melanura
49 Vanellus gregarius 149 Upupa epops 249 Oenanthe leucopyga
50 Vanellus leucurus 150 Alcedo atthis 250 Oenanthe lugentoides
51 Charadrius mongolus 151 Halcyon smyrnensis 251 Oenanthe finschii
52 Charadrius leschenaultii 152 Merops orientalis 252 Oenanthe lugens
53 Charadrius alexandrinus 153 Merops persicus 253 Cinnyris osea
54 Charadrius hiaticula 154 Merops apiaster 254 Cinnyris habessinicus
55 Charadrius dubius 155 Coracias garrulus 255 Euodice malabarica
56 David Darrell-Lambert 156 Jynx torquilla 256 Passer domesticus
57 Numenius phaeopus 157 Falco naumanni 257 Passer hispaniolensis
58 Numenius arquata 158 Falco tinnunculus 258 Carpospiza brachydactyla
59 Limosa lapponica 159 Falco concolor 259 Motacilla cinerea
60 Limosa limosa 160 Falco subbuteo 260 Motacilla flava
61 Arenaria interpres 161 Falco biarmicus 261 Motacilla citreola
62 Calidris pugnax 162 Falco cherrug 262 Motacilla alba
63 Calidris falcinellus 163 Falco peregrinus 263 Khalifa Al Dhaheri
64 Calidris ferruginea 164 Oriolus oriolus 264 Anthus campestris
65 Calidris temminckii 165 Lanius collurio 265 Anthus pratensis
66 Calidris alba 166 Lanius phoenicuroides 266 Ibrahim Alshwamin
67 Calidris alpina 167 Lanius isabellinus 267 Anthus trivialis
68 Calidris minuta 168 Lanius excubitor 268 Anthus cervinus
69 Lymnocryptes minimus 169 Lanius minor 269 Anthus spinoletta
70 Gallinago gallinago 170 Lanius nubicus 270 Carpodacus synoicus
71 Xenus cinereus 171 Lanius senator 271 Bucanetes githagineus
72 Actitis hypoleucos 172 Corvus ruficollis 272 Rhodospiza obsoleta
73 Tringa ochropus 173 Corvus rhipidurus 273 Crithagra rothschildi
74 Tringa erythropus 174 Corvus corax 274 Omar alshaheen
75 David Darrell-Lambert 175 Alaemon alaudipes 275 Carduelis carduelis
76 Tringa nebularia 176 Ramphocoris clotbey 276 Serinus syriacus
77 Neal Gates 177 Ammomanes cinctura 277 Emberiza melanocephala
78 Tringa stagnatilis 178 Ammomanes deserti 278 Emberiza calandra
79 Tringa glareola 179 Eremopterix nigriceps 279 Emberiza hortulana
80 Tringa totanus 180 Eremophila bilopha 280 Emberiza caesia
81 Dromas ardeola 181 Calandrella brachydactyla 281 Emberiza striolata
82 Matthew Fuirst 182 Melanocorypha bimaculata 282 Corvus splendens
83 Cursorius cursor 183 Eremalauda eremodites 283 Gregory Askew
84 Glareola nordmanni 184 Alauda arvensis 284 Anatidae sp. (dabbling duck sp.)
85 Robert Tovey 185 Galerida cristata 285 Anatinae sp.
86 Chroicocephalus genei 186 Prinia gracilis 286 Gary Bletsch
87 Chroicocephalus ridibundus 187 Iduna pallida 287 Caprimulgidae sp.
88 Ichthyaetus leucophthalmus 188 Hippolais languida 288 Apus sp.
89 Ichthyaetus hemprichii 189 Hippolais olivetorum 289 Charadrius mongolus/leschenaultii
90 Ichthyaetus ichthyaetus 190 Acrocephalus melanopogon 290 Charadriidae sp.
91 Larus cachinnans 191 Acrocephalus schoenobaenus 291 Show Details
92 Larus fuscus 192 Acrocephalus palustris 292 Tringa sp.
93 Onychoprion anaethetus 193 Acrocephalus scirpaceus 293 Stercorarius sp. (jaeger sp.)
94 Douglas Tilbury 194 Acrocephalus griseldis 294 Larus sp. (white
95 Sternula albifrons 195 Acrocephalus arundinaceus 295 Larinae sp.
96 Sternula saundersi 196 Acrocephalus stentoreus 296 Sterninae sp.
97 Douglas Tilbury 197 Locustella luscinioides 297 Phalacrocoracidae sp.
98 Gelochelidon nilotica 198 Riparia riparia 298 Show Details
99 Hydroprogne caspia 199 Ptyonoprogne rupestris 299 Ardea/Egretta/Bubulcus sp.
100 Chlidonias leucopterus 200 Ptyonoprogne fuligula 300 Circus sp.
5.3.3.5.1.2 Avifauna recorded during field survey
The following records of birds derive from live-sightings made during walk-over and drive-over
surveys; see Table 5-16 for recorded species and their conservation listings. Very few bird
species were observed, likely to be due to the low vegetated state of the site providing limited
or no opportunity for feeding and/or roosting. More than 15 individuals of Brown-necked Raven
were observed perched and flying around one of the outcrops in proximity to camp.
Two species recorded are listed as HCP species (Boland & Burwell, Ranking and mapping
the high conservation priority bird species of Saudi Arabia, 2020). These were the Scrub
Warbler (Scotocerca inquieta) and the White-crowned Wheatear (Oenanthe leucopyga).
A dead specimen of a Little Owl (Athene noctua) was found on the sandstone outcrop / mesa
at WP 313. The Little Owl is listed as an Appendix III species under threat of extinction (GCC,
2003).

Table 5-16: Birds with Confirmed Occurrence
KSA
HCP
Species Rank**
KSA ( (Boland & IUCN Regional Bonn
Order Common Name Scientific Name HCP Burwell, IUCN Status Status Convention Local Status
Species Ranking and (Ver. 2021-3) (breeding birds (CMS,
Criteria mapping the only) (Symes, et 2020)
(NCWCD, 2004) high al., 2015)
conservation
priority bird
species of Saudi
Arabia, 2020)
Passeriformes Brown-necked Raven Corvus ruficollis NL NL LC LC NL Resident
Falconiformes Common Kestrel Falco tinnunculus NL NL LC LC NL Breeding, Passage
migrant
Ammomanes deserti
Passeriformes Desert Lark NL NL LC LC NL Resident
Bucerotiformes Greater Hoopoe Lark Alaemon alaudipes NL NL LC LC NL Resident, passage
migrant
Columbiformes Rock Dove Columba livia NL NL LC LC NL Resident
Passeriformes Scrub Warbler Scotocerca inquieta NL 75 LC LC NL Resident
Passeriformes White-crowned Oenanthe leucopyga NL 100 LC LC NL Resident
Wheatear
Strigiformes Little Owl Athene noctua NL NL LC LC NL Breeding
Resident
** See Boland & Burwell (2020a) for ranking details; NL - not listed; LC - Least Concern, EN - Endangered; N/A - not applicable.

5.3.3.5.2 Mammals
5.3.3.5.2.1 Mammals desk study
Table 5-17 shows some of the wild mammals likely to be found in Tabuk region. These
species were gathered from scientific papers and surveys already done in the region.
Table 5-17: Mammals in Tabuk Region

1 Acomys dimidiatus 21 Lepus capensis
2 Acomys russatus 22 Mellivora capensis
3 Camelus dromedarius 23 Meriones crassus
4 Canis aureus 24 Meriones libycus
5 Canis lupus 25 Mus musculus
6 Capra nubiana 26 Panthera pardus
7 Caracal caracal 27 Paraechinus aethiopicus
8 Eliomys melanurus 28 Pipistrellus kuhlii
9 Eptesicus bottae 29 Procavia capensis
10 Equus asinus 30 Psammomys obesus
11 Felis margarita 31 Rattus rattus
12 Gazella marica 32 Rhinolophus hipposideros
13 Gerbillus cheesmani 33 Tadarida teniotis
14 Gerbillus dasyurus 34 Vulpes cana
15 Gerbillus henleyi 35 Vulpes rueppellii
16 Gerbillus nanus 36 Vulpes vulpes
17 Hyaena hyaena
18 Hypsugo ariel
19 Hystrix indica
20 Jaculus jaculus
5.3.3.5.2.2 Mammals recorded during field survey
No live mammals were sighted during the walk-over surveys; however, two large burrows
were observed, which given the size, could possibly be for an Arabia Red Fox (Vulpes vulpes
arabica) (unconfirmed) (Table 3-5). At waypoint 291, a possible front leg of a fox was
observed.
The site was home to numerous camps, many of them associated with livestock rearing and
herding. Camels, horses, sheep, goats, donkeys and chickens were observed. One of the
larger camps had around 30 camels grazing.

Table 5-18: Examples of Observations of Mammal Presence
Waypoint IUCN IUCN Carnivores KSA HCP KSA HCP Species

Type and Description Longitude Status Regional Status (Mallon Species Criteria Rank** Descriptive Photo
Latitude (Ver. & Budd, 2011) (NCWCD, 2004) (Boland &
2021-3) Burwell, 2021)
Large burrow possibly

for a red fox thought to 28.10288
be currently inactive 36.05017 LC LC NL NL
(Vulpes vulpes arabica)
Large burrow with three

entrances; possibly for a 28.12357
red fox 36.05972 LC LC NL NL
(Vulpes vulpes arabica)
** See Boland & Burwell (2021) for ranking details; NL - not listed; LC - Least Concern; VU – Vulnerable; N/A - not applicable.

5.3.3.5.3 Reptiles
5.3.3.5.3.1 Reptiles desk study
A total of 35 species of reptiles are reported in scientific papers from Tabuk Province, Saudi
Arabia. They include 33 reptiles’ species belonging to 12 families (cheloniidae, Gekkonidae,
Agami dae, chamaeleonidae, lacertidae, Scincidae, Varanidae, Trogonophidae, Boidae,
colubridae, Viperidae and elapidae). These species are likely to be encountred in field
survey.
Table 5-19: Reptiles in provinces of Tabuk

1 Acanthodactylus boskianus 19 Phoenicolacerta kulzeri ssp
2 Acanthodactylus opheodurus 20 Pristurus rupestris
3 Acanthodactylus schmidti 21 Psammophis schokari
4 Bufo arabicus 22 Pseudotrapelus aqabensis
5 Bunopus tuberculatus 23 Pseudotrapelus sinaitus
6 Cerastes gasperettii gasperettii 24 Ptyodactylus hasselquistii
7 Chalcides cf. ocellatus 25 Rhagerhis moilensis
8 Chamaeleo chamaeleon orientalis 26 Scincus mitranus
9 Cyrtopodion scabrum 27 Scincus scincus meccensis
10 Diplometopon zarudnyi 28 Spalerosophis diadema cliffordi
11 Echis coloratus 29 Stellagama stellio brachydactyla
12 Eretmochelys imbricata 30 Stenodactylus doriae
13 Eryx jaculus 31 Trachylepis brevicollis
14 Hemidactylus flaviviridis 32 Trapelus flavimaculatus
15 Hemidactylus mendiae 33 Uromastyx aegyptia microlepis
16 Hemidactylus turcicus 34 Varanus griseus
17 Mesalina brevirostris 35 Walterinnesia aegyptia
18 Ophisops elegans
5.3.3.5.3.2 Reptiles field survey results
Only two species of reptiles were observed: the Schmidt’s Fringe-fingered Lizard
(Acanthodactylus schmidti) and the Arabian Toad-headed Agama (Phrynocephalus
arabicus) (Table 5-20). Both species have a ranking under Boland & Burwell (2021). Boland
& Burwell’s (2021), the ranking accounts for factors such as global and regional IUCN
conservation status, population trends, abundance and endemicity. The Schmidt’s Fringe-
fingered Lizard is ranked 84 and the Arabia Toad-headed Agama is ranked 74. The locations
where they were observed are shown on Figure 5-31.
Both lizard species are ranked as being of Least Concern according to the IUCN Red List.
There were numerous signs of lizards at various locations within the study area as follows:
• Within quadrat AQ2, there were numerous lizard tracks, but no signs of any burrows.
• At waypoint 277, there was a burrow and lizard tracks, but a live sighting of a lizard
was not made; and
• At waypoint 291, there was a lizard scat and a possible burrow.

Figure 5-31: Locations of HCP Reptiles
Table 5-20: Observation of Reptile Presence
Waypoint Long. IUCN Status (2021, KSA HCP Species KSA HCP Species
Type ver3.1) Criteria (NCWCD, Descriptive Photo
Lat. Rank**
2004)
(Boland & Burwell,
2021)
28.0999
Live sighting - Schmidt’s LC NL 84
36.09416
Fringe-fingered Lizard
(Acanthodactylus schmidti)
Live sighting - Arabian 28.12241

Toad-headed Agama LC NL 74
36.03417
(Phrynocephalus arabicus)
** See Boland & Burwell (2021) for ranking details; NL - not listed; LC - Least Concern

5.3.3.5.4 Invertebrates
The invertebrates that are likely to be found in Tabuk province. They belong to two phyla,
six orders, and thirteen families. Table 5-21 below shows a list of these invertebrates.
Table 5-21: Invertebrates found in Tabuk
The common Noun Scientific name

Desert Sand Cockroach Polyphaga aegyptiaca
Desert Locust Shistoceria gregaria
Toxic Milkweed Grasshopper Poikilocerus bufonius
(Grasshopper) Prionosthenus sp
Slanted Face Grasshopper Truxalis procera
(Grasshopper) Oedipoda sp.
Painted Lady Butterfly Vanessa cardui
Desert White Butterfly Pontia sp.
(Moth) Spodoptera sp.
Darkling (Pitted) Beetle Adesmia cancellata
Blister Beetle Mylabris sp.
Blister Beetle Hycleus quatuordecipunctatus
Jewel Beatle Lampestis sp.
Black scorpion Androctonus sp.
In conclusion, fauna survey seems to be sufficient for the ESIA study.
5.3.4 Habitats
Habitats distribution map of the site Airport west solar park was obtained from bibliography
from previous studies in NEOM (Figure 5-32).

Legend
Figure 5-32: Habitats in Airport West Solar Park

5.4 Archaeological and Cultural Environment
NEOM has a wealth of history that can be attributed to its location in a migration route from
Africa to Asia and more recently the pilgrimage routes to Makkah, a comprehensive survey of
the archaeological sites in NEOM has been conducted in 2020 by Aram Consultancy, it has
been found that a large number of pre-Islamic, Islamic, Nabataean, and Bronze age
archaeological site are present within NEOM’s boundaries. A map of the registered archaeology
sites from the aforementioned survey has been compared to the project site of Airport-West as
detailed in Figure 5-33 below:
Figure 5-33: Archaeological sites near Airport-West project site (blue dots)
We can observe from this map that no registered archaeological site is located inside the project
site boundaries.
Also, no archaeological or heritage features were observed during the surveys on the Airport
West site and there are no sites of archaeological significance on the NEOM database within
the site.
5.5 Socioeconomic Environment
5.5.1 Administration, population and demographics

Saudi Arabia is divided into 13 provinces. Each province has a governor, a deputy governor,
and a provincial council. The Proposed Development is located in Tabuk Province at the south
of Tabuk city. The population demographics for the Tabuk Province in 2019 are 949,612
habitants detailed in Table 5-22 below.
Table 5-22: Demographic Status of Tabuk (2019)
Population
Age Groups
Male Female Total
0-4 50522 49715 100237
5-9 48327 46053 94380

Population
Age Groups
Male Female Total
10 - 14 40145 36938 77083
15 - 19 34175 32444 66619
20 - 24 42200 38328 80528
25 - 29 53242 44986 98228
30 - 34 54877 39555 94432
35 - 39 56817 34017 90834
40 - 44 52153 27939 80092
45 - 49 37450 19585 57035
50 - 54 24070 12879 36949
55 - 59 17785 11400 29185
60 - 64 10987 8604 19591
65≥ 12587 11832 24419
Total 535337 414275 949612
Source: The General Authority for Statistics (2019)
No publicly population statistics are available for the smaller communities farmer or camper
observed inside the vicinity of the site.
5.5.2 Educational Status

The educational status for Tabuk is outlined Table 5-23 in below.
Table 5-23: Educational status for Saudis nationals (age ≥10 years) in Tabuk (2017)
Educational Status Population

Ph. D. 374
Master 3985
Higher Diploma 1061
Bachelors 82243
Pre-Univ. Diploma 22486
Secondary/Equivalent 163361
Pre-Secondary. Diploma 3499
Inter-mediate 86457
Primary 95033
Read & write 62324
illiterate 30522
Total 551345
Source: Education and Training Survey 2017 (General Authority for Statistics)
5.5.3 Economic Profile

Saudi Arabia is one of the richest and fastest growing countries in the Middle East. It is the
world’s largest producer and exporter of oil, which constitutes the major portion of the country’s
revenues. In recent decades, however, Saudi Arabia has diversified its economy, and today
produces and exports a variety of industrial goods all over the world. Based on 2020 information,
Saudi Arabia is ranked at a high level in the Human Development Index (0.854), which gives
the country a rank of 40 out of 194 countries.
The petroleum sector accounts for roughly 87% of budget revenues, 42% of GDP and 90% of
export earnings. Saudi Arabia is encouraging the growth of the private sector in order to diversify
its economy and to employ more Saudi nationals.
5.5.3.1 Employment
Employment statistics for the Tabuk area are available and detailed in Table 5-24. No publicly
available employment statistics are available for the smaller communities in the study area.
Table 5-24: Tabuk Employment Statistics (15 year & over) (2019)
Administrative
Area Non Saudi Saudi Total
Total Female Male Total Female Male Total Female Male
Tabuk 78976 2157 76819 54770 21506 33264 133746 23663 110083
Source: General Authority for Statistics
5.5.3.2 Tourism
AT the interface with the Red Sea there are numerous sandy beaches and associated tourism
and leisure development such as Tabuk Paradise Beach Resort. In addition the region is known
for numerous rock art sites, Haddah Well in the oasis city of Tayma, Al-Shaq – Great Canyon,
Jebel Al-Lawz, Mahajah or Wadi Qaraqir – Dissah
5.5.3.3 Agriculture activity
Agriculture is one of the most important economic sectors in Tabuk, where the total crop area
in 2012 was 489,00 hectares, representing about 6.2% of the total crop area in the Kingdom.
Tabuk is well known for flower plantations as it exports flowers to Europe such as gladiolas,
lilies, and statices.
The Tabuk Region has remarkable floristic diversity; however, this natural biodiversity hotspot
is affected by several human activities, such as woodcutting and development.1 Therefore, a
conservation programme should be launched to protect the natural diversity in such important
vegetated areas.
5.5.4 Social infrastructure

5.5.4.1 Electricity
Nearly all of the electricity produced in Saudi Arabia is sourced from fossil fuels where 51% is
sourced from natural gas and 49% from oil. Electricity consumption in Saudi Arabia has
increased 59% over the past 10 years. The Saudi Arabia government has introduced targets to
improve the energy mix and security of supply under the National Renewable Energy Program.
5.5.4.2 Water and Municipal Services
A Sewage treatment plant is located in Tabuk. No information on serviced water supply or

sewerage systems was found at the Project site.
5.5.4.3 Health Services
According to the Ministry of Heath a primary heath care centre is located at Shigri, Sharma, Al
Kheraiba, Al A’ssilah and in Tabuk a large number of private and public medical hospitals are
available.
5.5.5 Traffic and transports
Airport West PV plant is approximately 148 km and 85 km away from Duba Port and King
Abdulaziz International Airport, respectively. Airport west also offers great connectivity through
existing roads, the plant is adjacent to Duba –Tabuk road (Route 80) and can be accessed from
an internal road (Figure 48) that extends from Route 80 and crosses the site from west to east
leading to the new planned Airport located southeast of the plot.
Figure 34: Airport West Access
5.5.6 Built assets

5.5.6.1 Power
Electricity for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (KSA) is provided by Saudi Electricity Company
(SEC). SEC was formed as a result of the merger of all existing electricity providers in April
2000. According to the latest available data, SEC generated 207,022 GWH of energy, and
imported 97,218 GWH, for a total of 304,240 GWH pumped into the power generation network
of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia in 2014 (SEC,2014).
During our site visit some Transmission lines belonging to SEC was observed in the vicinity of
the Project site.
A built asset may comprise a building, multiple buildings (e.g. on a site or campus), a portfolio
or network of assets, or a built infrastructure (e.g. roads, railways, pipelines, dams, docks, etc.)
and may include associated land or water. The main sensitive receptors observed in the site
are:
1) At roughly 140 m to the east a high voltage overhead transmission line passing in the
direction north-south parallel to the east side of the site (Figure 5-35).
Lat=28⁰, 4’,43.24” N
Long=36⁰, 5’,47.3200” E
Figure 5-35 : High voltage line at 140 m east to Airport West site
2) The airport west located on the access road to the site (Figure 5-36)
Lat=28⁰, 7’,23.1399” N
Long=36⁰, 2’,17.3200” E
Figure 5-36: Airport west location in the project site
3) Road of access to the airport and the site itself (see Figure 5-36)
4) Solar measurement station inside the site of the Airport West solar plant is also found.
5.5.6.2 Telecommunication
Telecommunications in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia are provided by Saudi

Telecommunications Company. Fixed telephone lines stood at 3.7 million at the end of 2015.
Mobile communications within the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia are provided by four main suppliers.
▪ Mobily,
▪ STC, and,
▪ Zain
Mobile carriers are regulated by the Communication and Information Technology Commission.
The total number of mobile subscriptions grew to around 53.1 million at the end of 2012, with a
penetration rate of 186%. Prepaid subscriptions constitute the majority (over 87%) of all mobile
subscriptions (CITC 2012). No underground cables are known to be present at the development
site, either over or under the ground, and there are no mobile masts in close proximity to the
development site. Mobile coverage across the development site is low to medium.
5.5.6.3 Water Supply
Water is supplied in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia by the National Water Company. No existing
municipal supply infrastructure was observed in the site except some temporary tanks for
temporary use by the camel herders
5.5.6.4 Wastewater Collection and Treatment
There are no existing wastewater collecting infrastructure or wastewater treatment facilities in

the development site.
5.5.6.5 Roads
The nearest street is 700 meters away at the western boundary of site. this road connects the
city of Tabuk to Duba. It branches from it the access road inside the site of Airport west.
5.6 Sensitive Receptors
5.6.1 Environment sensitive receptors

Sensitive areas are defined as the areas located near the Project and where occupants are
more susceptible to the exposure of pollutants, chemicals, traffic, noise, and vibration as a result
of the project construction and operation. Sensitive receptors include schools, universities,
hospitals, housings, mosques, libraries, parks, Government buildings, cemeteries, museum,
investigation centres, etc.
No sensitive receptors such mentioned above was identified close to the project site except
some seasonal shepherds/herders and temporary settlements whom main activity is grazing.
The nearest city which is Tabuk is far from the site 70 km.
5.6.2 Ecological sensitive receptors

The Project Site is located on a flat sandy plain partially covered in gravel and vegetation. The
landscape is natural and does not feature any prominent human interventions.
During the site visit vegetation cover was evaluated as limited to groups of perennial
shrubs/trees. Some parts of the Project Site are completely devoid of any vegetation cover while
in others, dense vegetation cover was observed.
The project site itself is evaluated to have a minor ecological value. No ecological sensitive
receptor close to the project activities was remarked.
5.6.3 Socioeconomic sensitive receptors
Potential receptors relevant to the Socio-Economic impact assessment include:
• Farmers, seasonal herders, and recreational users within the site boundary and which
utilize the wider landscape. The sensitivity of these receptors is valued as moderate on
account their transient nature or limited likelihood of being occupied by vulnerable
groups for extended periods.
• Local communities including settlements adjacent to the development site and along the
route of potential transportation routes. The sensitivity of these receptors is valued as
moderate and working age members of the community most likely to be affected and
settlements on transport routes will not be receptors of impacts for extended periods.
• Local utility infrastructure and providers. The sensitivity of these receptors is valued as
low on account of the ability to adapt and respond to change
5.6.4 Sensitive receptors’ location

The following map in Figure 5-37 shows the location of the main sensitive receptors identified
in the site.
Figure 5-37: Sensitive receptors in Airport West Solar Park site
5.6.5 Future Activities within the geographic scope of the project

At this stage we got information that there is some other project announced in the region close
to the Airport West Solar Park illustrated in Figure 5-38.
Figure 5-38: Projects next to Airport solar plant
5.7 Climate and climate change
Like the rest of the world, Saudi Arabia and NEOM is experiencing changes in its weather
patterns due to global climate change. A review of the literature for projections of climate change
impacts for Saudi Arabia shows variations in predictions for temperature and rainfall depending
upon the model and scenario used.
A full review of various climate modelling and future climate projections and scenarios for Saudi
Arabia is beyond the scope of this State of the Environment Report.
However, some generalisations can be derived from recent papers on climate change effects
for Saudi Arabia and the wider Middle East region.
Almazroui (2013) conducted modelling using the UK Meteorological Offices PRECIS1 model
and using 1971–2000 as base conditions, simulated climate over a 50-year period (2021-2070).
The average predicted values of temperature and rainfall for Saudi Arabia as a whole are
presented in Figure 5-39. This shows that for the kingdom, average temperatures will rise
steadily across this period while rainfall declines.
Figure 5-39: The average predicted values of temperature and rainfall for Saudi Arabia
The World Bank Group’s (2020) Climate Change Portal summarises the predicted changes in
Saudi Arabia (high emission scenario) through to 2050 as:
“Mean annual temperature is projected to increase by 2°C by 2050. With increased frequency
and duration of heat waves, the highest increases are projected in the northern parts of the
country by up to 3°C during June, July, and August. Mean annual precipitation is expected to
increase by 7% by 2050”.
In general, various models appear to agree that Saudi Arabia temperatures will increase under
current emission scenarios. Some models suggest that the northern part of Saudi Arabia,
including NEOM, will have increases higher than central parts of Saudi Arabia. However, current
models disagree on predicted changes to rainfall intensities within Saudi Arabia.
Qassem and Chowdhury (2018) conducted an extensive review of climate change predictions
for the Kingdom looking at four regions, including the northern region of Tabuk. Under various
scenarios and models, the predicted changes for Tabuk were similar to those quoted above.
Again, rainfall predictions showed greater variability between scenarios, with some showing a
marginal increase in precipitation and other scenarios showing a decrease.
Whatever the values are, all reviewed papers indicate a significant increase in temperatures
within NEOM throughout the remainder of the century.
The potential impacts of such changes have very wide implications, including, but not limited to:
– Productivity and yields of food production in NEOM, including the crop species and
varieties that can be grown, and the nutritional constitution of crops produced;
– Evaporation rates in terrestrial and freshwater (e.g. wadis, natural springs and
associated streams and creeks) systems;
– Risk to coral reef systems and associated species of conservation concern;
– Wellbeing and liveability, particularly in lowland and urban systems;
– Infrastructure materials and design, and durability of infrastructure;
– Tourism in the region (e.g. safety, reef health);
– Fauna and flora in marginal or ‘extreme’ systems (e.g. mountain tops and other rare or
isolated microclimates) no longer having a suitable climate envelope in which to exist,
or not being able to migrate at a pace that matches climatic shifts.
Other climatic trends for analysis and inclusion in future State of the Environment Reports
include for example, increased number of extremely hot days (implications for human wellbeing,
crop types and yields), changes in diurnal temperature range (wellbeing and health) and
changes in the onset of seasons (implications for agricultural production, wild biodiversity
migration), changes in wind speeds and direction (implications for shipping, recreation and
tourism). In the immediate future, NEOM can do little to alter the course of climate change, either
globally or within NEOM itself. However, it is noted that one of the ambitions of NEOM is to
provide an exemplar of development which reverses emissions from its human activities and
can contribute to innovative thinking about the way the world develops and maintains its global
atmosphere. For instance, NEOM aims to become a Climate Positive Area aspiring to net zero
CO2 emissions in all its developments, grounded on an overall Circular/Regenerative Economy.
NEOM will need to build into the project, adaptation and resilience for predicted climate
changes. The Intended Nationally Determined Contribution of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
under the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change provides a framework for
responding to climate change within the kingdom, much of which will be applicable to NEOM.
5.8 Ecosystems services
The baseline environment is considered according to the Ecosystem Services groupings set
out in NEOM-NEV-PRC-601, supported by the Millennium Ecosystem Assessment (2005).
5.8.1 Natural capital

Ecosystem services are derived from ‘natural capital’, which can comprise land, air and water.
As the basis for understanding which ecosystem services may be relevant to the study area,
the natural capital, in terms of the land cover type, is summarised here
The entirety of the study area sits within a desert environment, with relatively sparse vegetation.
Land cover types include:
• desert plateaus. Surface cover is mainly alluvial sands and gravels. Vegetation is
limited
• mountains: Surface cover in the valleys is sand, rock and gravel, but with frequent
individual trees and shrubs. On high mountains, vegetation cover can be more
extensive.
The general lack of vegetation and currently sparse population will result in relatively limited
provision of ecosystem services across the study area, when considered on a large scale.
However, the desert environments and their limited vegetation cover are likely to be important
on a local scale, for communities around.
5.8.2 Ecosystem services

Ecosystem Services are commonly grouped in to four categories: provisioning, regulating,
supporting and cultural. NEOM-NEV-PRC-601 identified specific ecosystem services against
each category. These are listed below, along with additional ecosystem services that may be
relevant to the local environment (additional services taken from the Millennium Ecosystem
Assessment (2005).
Table 5-25: Ecosystem services against each category
Ecosystem Ecosystem Services identified in Additional potentially relevant

Services Grouping NEOM-NEV-PRC-601 Ecosystem Services, from Millennium
Ecosystem Assessment
Provisioning Agriculture Horticulture
Commercial fishing Water supply Wood and fibre
Aquaculture
Regulating Air quality Water quality Soil quality
Carbon sequestration
Pollination -
Flood/ erosion control
Supporting Nutrient cycling Atmospheric oxygen Soil Biodiversity
formation
Water cycling
Hunting/ recreational fishing Traditional
Cultural grazing Camping/ hiking Cultural heritage Spiritual
Scenery/ vistas
The relevance of each of these services in the baseline is set out as below.
Table 5-26: Relevance for the assessment of each Ecosystem services
Grouping Ecosystem Service Relevant for assessment
Provisioning Agriculture, horticulture No
Commercial fishing, aquaculture No
Water supply Yes
Wood and fibre Yes
Air quality (human health) Yes
Regulating Water quality Yes
Soil quality Yes
Carbon sequestration No
Pollination No
Flood /erosion control Yes
Grouping Ecosystem Service Relevant for assessment
Supporting Nutrient cycling No
Atmospheric oxygen No
Soil formation No
Water cycling No
Biodiversity Yes
Cultural Hunting/ recreational fishing Yes
Traditional grazing Yes
Camping / hiking Yes
Scenery / vistas No
Cultural heritage Spiritual No
6 Impact Identification, Analysis, and Assessment
6.1 Methodology Used for the Identification, Analysis and Assessment of Impacts
6.1.1 Introduction
All NEOM developments must undergo a rigorous environmental and social assessment
process. NEOM considers a risk-based approach to assessment to be the most appropriate
method for assessing large and complex projects as this enables identification of potential
impacts before they occur, as well as potential opportunities for environmentally net positive
outcomes that might otherwise be missed.
This chapter describes the approach taken to identify and evaluate potential effects associated
with the Project and is in line with the proposed NEOM methodology.
6.1.2 Approach
The methodology set out in this chapter meets the requirements of NEOM Environmental
Procedures9 based on the IFC Performance Standard 110, the ISO Standard11 and Australian
Standard / New Zealand Standard (AS/NZS)12.
ESIA is a process for identifying potentially significant environmental effects (positive and
negative) of a Proposed Development to inform the decision-making process for consent to be
granted. The objective of environmental and social risk assessment is to identify the likelihood
and consequences of effects to identify values from all planned and unplanned activities
associated with the Proposed Development.
The ESIA provides an overview of the potentially significant effects associated with the
Proposed Development, during the construction phases.
ESIA can be a tool to:
• inform design and the site selection process
• incorporate stakeholder input into the scheme development
• minimize impact on the environment and archaeological and cultural heritage
• reduction in natural and social resource depletion.
This means that the most environmentally favourable option, or at least an environmentally
acceptable option, can be identified at an early stage and projects can then be designed to avoid
and minimise environmental effects, if negative, or maximise it if they represent an opportunity
and /or positive effects.
The overall approach to the ESIA provides the general framework for identifying impacts and
assessing the significance of their effect(s). The level of significance of an effect is commonly
9
Technical Guideline Document on Environmental & Social Assessment Reporting NEOM-NEV-TGD-002, NEOM
Environmental Department, 2020
10
Assessment and Management of Environmental and Social Risks and impacts, IFC, 2012
11
ISO 31000:2018 Handbook Risk Management Guidelines, ISO, 2018
12
HB203: 2012 Managing Environment-Related Risk (Standards Australia / Standards New Zealand, 2012)
derived from combining measures evaluating the magnitude of change and the value,
importance and sensitivity of the resource(s) and / or receptor(s) affected.
The ESIA process aims to be systematic, analytical, impartial, consultative and iterative allowing
opportunities for environmental concerns to be addressed in the design and evolution of the
Proposed Development. Typically, throughout the evolution of the design, a number of design
iterations take place in response to design constraints identified during design development
prior to the final design being submitted for approval. This iterative design process is
fundamental element of designing out significant adverse effects.
To ensure that the ESIA is robust and focused to help inform the decision-making process, it
has been carried out in accordance with the NEOM procedure 13.
6.1.3 Determination of Scope
6.1.3.1 Technical, Spatial and temporal scope
Prior to undertaking an assessment, detailed information about the Project must be collected.
As such, the ESIA identifies the potential impacts that could give rise to potentially significant
effects taking into account geographical area, key project components and baseline information.
The ESIA includes a description of the potentially significant effects of the Proposed
Development on the environment and people and communities, covering direct, indirect,
secondary, cumulative, short, medium and long term, permanent and temporary, positive and
negative effect (s). These are as follows:
• direct effects – those that result directly from a scheme. For example, where a machine
disturbs an area of habitat; the associated physical activity could result in a change to
the receptor (i.e., the habitat)
• indirect and secondary effects – those that result from consequential change caused
by the scheme. As such they would normally occur later in time or at locations farther
away than direct effects. An example would be where water or gas pipes are damaged
as a result of the development, and the consequence of that damage is fire or flood
risk to other receptors
• temporal effects – defined as being permanent or temporary:
✓ permanent – these are effects that will remain even when the scheme is
complete, although these effects may be caused by environmental changes
that are permanent or temporary. For example, an excavator that is temporarily
driven over an area of valuable habitat could cause so much damage that the
effect on this vegetation would be permanent
✓ temporary – these are effects that are related to environmental changes

associated with a particular activity and that will cease when that activity
finishes.
13
Environmental& Social Risk & Opportunities Assessment for Development projects (NEOM-NEV-PRC-601)
6.1.3.2 Technical scope
The technical scope of assessment for each environmental aspect is detailed in chapter 6.
6.1.3.3 Spatial scope
The geographical context within which the Project is located is shown in Figure 5-1. The spatial
scope for each aspect assessment will depend on the nature of the potential effects and the
location of receptors that could be affected. Relevant aspect study areas are described for each
of the environmental aspects in the respective section of chapter 6.
The spatial scope of the technical assessments will therefore take account of:
• physical area of the Proposed Development
• nature of the baseline environment
• manner and extent to which environmental effects may occur.
The environmental aspect sections describe how study areas have been derived for the
assessment of potentially significant environmental effects associated with those aspects. The
methodology for setting the precise study area has been applied to the final location of the
components and supporting infrastructure.
6.1.3.4 Temporal scope
The temporal scope refers to the time periods over which impacts, and effects may be
experienced by sensitive receptors, and this will be defined further for each aspect. The ESIA
will assess effects during the following years, as appropriate for each topic:
• The current baseline (based on the expected application date) in year 2022
• The year when construction starts.
Where impacts were judged to have a potential significant effect. Those that were considered
not likely to have a significant effect.
6.1.4 Baseline
A requirement of an ESIA is to set out the conclusions that have been reached about whether
a Project would result in any additional potential significant effects or increases in significance
to the baseline environment. The baseline represents the environmental conditions of the site
at the time of the application, during the construction phase as well as a ‘do nothing’ scenario.
6.1.5 Identification of potentially significant effects
The predicted environmental effects are usually the negative (risks) or positive (opportunities)
consequences of the environmental changes for specific environmental and social values /
receptors. The ESIA will assess the potentially significant effects of the Proposed Development
at key stages within the construction phase. The assessment will compare current, and where
appropriate future, baseline conditions to those conditions expected with the Proposed
Development.
6.1.6 Evaluation and Assessment of significance
The environmental and social risk assessment for the Project will be completed using the
Environmental & Social Risk & Opportunities Assessment for Development Projects procedure
(NEOM-NEV- PRC-601)14. The Procedure is based on international best practice approaches 15
and meets the requirements of IFC Performance Standard 1 – Assessment and Management
of Environmental and Social Risks and Impacts (2012).
The risk assessment for the Project will include information collected from baseline surveys,
desktop studies (using published literature, design plans), best available information related to
construction and where relevant, predictive modelling. This data will be used to understand the
potential environmental and social risks posed by the Project.
The evaluation and assessment of significance follows a set of steps including:
• describing the technical, spatial and temporal aspects of the Project that have the
potential to negatively (or positively) affect environmental and social values, including
the Area of Influence (AoI) of identifiable risk factors, light, noise, pollutants etc.
• describing the overlap with environmental and social values that may be sensitive to
the identified risk factors
• determine the potential worst-case consequence of the interaction between risk factor
and value without the presence of any environmental management or mitigation
measures.
• predicting the likelihood of the worst-case consequence occurring if standard

management and mitigation measures are in place using industry statistics, expert
opinion or other benchmark metrics for similar risks.
• once the risk is identified, a qualitative analysis of the proposed management measures
will be carried out to determine if the risks can be demonstrated to be As Low As
Reasonably Practicable (ALARP).
• consequences deemed acceptable will be defined as “Predicted Outcomes” against

which Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) can be assigned as a benchmark for
monitoring
• calculating the Risk using the NEOM Risk Category Matrix, which combines
consequence and likelihood in a structured method to rank risks.
6.1.7 Risk / Opportunities Classification
A critical element will be to identify the types of risk (risk factors) as well as to estimate the
respective maximum areas that may be influenced. risk factors that have been identified for the
Proposed Development has included information related to:
• modifications to physical features including changes or damage (e.g., land surface or

feature alteration)
• consumption of primary resources including minerals, biological elements and

freshwater (e.g., natural resources use)
14
Environmental & Social Risk & Opportunities Assessment for Development Projects procedure (NEOM-NEV- PRC-
601), 15th September 2020
15
69 ISO 31000:2018 Risk Management - Guidelines 203: 2012 Managing Environment-Related Risk (Standards
Australia/Standards New Zealand, 2012)
• pollution of environmental quality including air, soil and ground water
• interactions with residents and native flora or fauna through personnel behaviours,
mechanical operations and biological introductions
• the source of risk / opportunity and expected location within or surrounding the work
site
• the magnitude including potential intensity, density, concentration
• the temporal characteristics including timing, seasonality, frequency and/or duration
• the type of consequence it may induce including changes:
✓ to ecological functional performance, social or commercial utilization, and/or

aesthetic or heritage value
✓ to functional performance and / or aesthetic or heritage value
✓ in the behaviours, wellbeing, condition, abundance or long-term distribution of

a potentially affected value.
Finally, a cumulative area over which each risk factor may have an influence will also be
assessed. This will be referred to as the AoI and will be determined using a technical spatial
analysis by combining information on the expected location of activities producing the risk factor
and the maximum distance from this site that the risk factor can be observed above background
ambient conditions.
6.1.8 Risk / Opportunities Category Matrix for Risk / Opportunities evaluation
Risks / Opportunities will be ranked using the NEOM Risk Matrix. This matrix uses consequence
and likelihood parameters to derive a unique scale for both risk and opportunity.
6.1.9 Consequence
Consequence will be understood as the potential outcome (positive or negative) of an effect on

an environmental or social value prior to mitigation measures being applied. This ranges from
certain or uncertain, depending on the level of risk.
In order to determine consequence, a number of different physical, biological, chemical and
geographical factor will be considered. Factors are relevant to both the interaction between the
activity and an environmental or social value (Driver), and the value in question, including the:
• worst-case potential effect for each driver-value interaction
• distribution of the Value in relation to the relevant AoI, and specifically the proportion
of the values’ range, habitat or community that may be affected.
• nature of the receiving environment, including conservation significance, sensitivity or

resilience of value to the potential effect
• degree of change relative to pre-effect conditions, or to otherwise defined criteria of

acceptability.
Generic consequence criteria that will be used for both environmental and social values as
shown in following Table 6-1 and
Table 6-2.
Table 6-1: General Consequence Criteria for Risks
RISKS
Category Definition
Incidental Minimal or no detectable effects that do not require remediation
Medium-term, local or short-term widespread effects that can be easily managed,
Minor mitigated or remediated and unlikely to require compensation
Long-term, local or medium-term, widespread effects that can be managed,
Moderate mitigated or remediated or may be compensable
Permanent, local or persistent, widespread effects that may be managed are
Major likely to be compensable
Permanent widespread or Persistent, regional effects that cannot be remediated
Severe but maybe compensable
Permanent, significant and regional scale effects that cannot be remediated or
Catastrophic compensated
Table 6-2: General Consequence Criteria for Opportunities
OPPORTUNITIES
Category Definition
Negligible Minimal or no proposed improvement that are likely to lead to offsets
Medium-term, local or short-term widespread benefits, that can easily be
Marginal improved upon through up-scaling duration, scale or mechanism (e.g., contract)
Long-term, local or medium-term, widespread beneficial effects that may be
Appreciable improved by an increase in duration, scale or through medium term contract.
Permanent, local or persistent, widespread beneficial effects that may be
Material improved through scale or established long-term initiative
Permanent widespread or persistent, regional beneficial effects with educational
Substantive or long-term initiative leading towards cultural change
Permanent, significant and regional-scale environmental benefits or cultural
Transformative change that cannot be reasonably improved – no further action necessary
6.1.10 Likelihood
Likelihood is defined as the chances of a risk or opportunity happening. Likelihood will be

determined by a number of temporal factors including:
• timing, duration, and frequency of an activity occurring
• the probability that a potentially sensitive Value will be present within the AoI and be
affected
• the probability that an effect will occur if mandatory environmental controls are in place
and working as designed.
The probability of a potential environmental effect is categorised using the NEOM Likelihood
Categories and Criteria (Table 6-3).
Table 6-3: Likelihood Categories and Criteria
Category Probability (%) Criteria

Remote 0-5 Rare or unheard of
Seldom 5-20 Has occurred once or twice within the industry
Reasonable to expect that the consequences will not occur at this
Occasional 20-50 Proposed Development. Has occurred several times in the industry,
but not in the Kingdom
Category Probability (%) Criteria
Exceptional conditions may allow consequences to occur within the
Common 50-80 Proposed Development lifetime (3 years), or has occurred within
KSA
Conditions may allow the consequences to occur at the Proposed
Frequent 80-95 Development during its lifetime, or the event has occurred within
NEOM
Consequences can reasonably be expected to occur in period of
Certain 95-100 the Proposed Development
6.1.11 Ranking
The final ranking will be referred to Risk and Opportunities previously assessed, combined with
likelihood factor (Figure 6-1).
Figure 6-1: Neom Risk Matrix
For Risks: Eliminate will have the most serious impact potential, to Mitigate will be the least
serious.
For Opportunities: No Action will have the least potential to improve, to Invest which will be
understood as the greatest.
These will reflect the risk and opportunities hierarchy to guide the prioritisation for controls and
will therefore reflect Unacceptable impacts (Eliminate) and Regenerative Opportunities (Invest).
Description of different scores is explained below:
• risks scored Eliminate: will be Intolerable (i.e., catastrophic or severe impacts that are
likely to occur or expected to occur on an occasional basis) and the associated risk will
be eliminated or substituted with an inherently safer option
• risks scored Substitute: will probably require further design or planning and the
associated Activity should be revised through further engineering designs or identified
risks managed using a specific management plan to mitigate potential risks.
• risks Scored Engineer: will require Best Practice Controls to proceed. This means that
for the associated Activity, best practice operational controls should be applied for the
Activity to be considered as Tolerable
• risks Scored Manage and Mitigate: will be considered Tolerable but may still need to
have best practice applied to them to ensure they comply
• opportunities Scored No Action: will be considered As High As Reasonably Practicable

(AHARP) as they offer little opportunity for environmental improvement or probably the
costs of improvement are prohibitively disproportionate to potential gains
• opportunities Scored Review and Plan: will require further design or planning and the
associated Opportunity will be under constant appraisal to seek improvements or
revised through further engineering designs
• opportunities scored Design: will be considered scores that could offer important
opportunities for the Proposed Development to achieve goals and aspirations
• opportunities Scored Invest: will be understood as the most important and far-reaching
potential which could direct the Proposed Development in its environmental ambitions.
6.1.12 Outcome Prediction
After the completion of the risk evaluation and demonstration that all risks associated with
individual Drivers are ALARP, an overall predicted outcome is required for each Value being
assessed. Predicted Outcomes are described in terms of two key factors:
• significant residual risks
• additive risks opportunities.
Residual risks are the results of the risk assessment on each of the Values.
Additive risk assessment is the combined effects of two or more drivers from a given
development or activity on a single Value. Drivers can act on a Value in isolation e.g., the
reduction of groundwater available for a sensitive flora species due to extraction, and additively
e.g., reduction in groundwater and effects of dust emissions on photosynthetic activity. Additive
assessment results in the predicted outcomes of the entire development on a given Value.
If the resultant risks remain unacceptable, further management or mitigation measures, or
offsets have been explored prior to acceptability being achieved.
6.1.13 Acceptability
In assessing the contribution of the Proposed Development towards NEOM’s Environmental

Vision Proponents must demonstrate that the two overarching objectives of the Vision (all
developments must be net positive for carbon emissions and net positive for biodiversity) will be
achieved.
These two objectives require complex and comprehensive approaches, and so to assist
planners and designers, the NEOM Regenerative Development Management System includes
a set of Development Goals, Targets and Standards that should be applied to all developments
and can be used in demonstrating Acceptability. Acceptability is determined using a simple
equation of:
Risk Outcomes + Developmental Contribution (Opportunities) compared with NEOM’s
Environmental Vision
6.1.14 Objectives
Where the Predicted Outcome for a Value is determined to be Acceptable, that Outcome will be
converted to an Outcome based Condition and form part of the overall Environmental Accord
for the Proposed Development.
Where the Predicted Outcome for a Value is determined to be Not Acceptable, the section
should propose an appropriate and commensurate rehabilitation, Compensation or Offset
Program. If the Rehabilitation, Compensation or Offset Program is considered Acceptable by
NEOM Environment Department, it will be converted to an Outcome based Condition and form
part of the overall Environmental Accord for the Development.
It should be noted that Net Negative Outcomes may be considered Acceptable by the NEOM
Environment Department, if it can be demonstrated that the cumulative effect of other
developments across NEOM will ensure NEOM’s Environmental Vision is still achievable and
that Rehabilitation, Compensation or Offsets Programs are not technically feasible, or the cost
of the program is grossly disproportionate to the nature and scale of the Outcome.
All performance objectives, targets and management measures will form part of the Accord
and will be monitored through the life of the Project to the rack application and to assess
efficiency.
6.1.15 Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
KPIs and Interim Targets or Thresholds should be established for each Acceptable Outcome
or otherwise proposed Rehabilitation, Compensation or Offset Programme.
KPIs will be used in monito ring the potential changes to Values during Execution and should
align to NEOM’s Regenerative Development Standards where appropriate. Regardless, all
KPIs must be SMART which is defined as:
• specific: well, defined and not open to wide interpretation
• measurable: can be measured, and where possible, be in a quantitative manner
• achievable: can be met, i.e., be realistic
• relevant: relate to the potential environmental risks of the activity
• time based: include a time component (where relevant).
These will help identify the accuracy of the predicted outcomes to enable feedback to future
risk assessments, and to validate that NEOM’s Environmental Vision is being realised.
6.1.16 ENVID (ENVironmental Impact iDentification)
An Environmental and Social Hazard Identification will be produced in accordance with the
NEOM procedure16.
16
Environmental & Social Risk & Opportunities Assessment for Development projects - NEOM-NEV-PRC-601
6.2 Analysis and Assessment of the Potential Impacts
6.2.1 Natural vegetation cover
6.2.1.1 Assessment methodology
The study area extent will be limited to the proposed development boundary, in particular at
areas where the vegetation cover is dense.
Assessment will use the baseline information (itself based on desk study and site walkover)
which will provide information on the location of infrastructure in relation to vegetation cover and
other features and:
• An examination and discussion of the baseline existing conditions.

• An assessment of the impacts of any tree felling required in the development area.
• An assessment of the development against best practice guides; and
• An assessment of the development using practical vegetation management experience.
In determining the significance of an effect, the magnitude of change and the sensitivity of the
receptor are combined. For proposed development the definitions of magnitude will be based
on the areas of vegetation cover impacted in relation to the existing conditions. In assessing the
sensitivity of vegetation cover and its management, it is considered that species counted the area
and their status at International and KSA level will be a key factor.
6.2.1.2 impact assessment
6.2.1.2.1 Construction
Site preparation activities will include removal of vegetation at the project site, followed by
excavation of foundations and underground infrastructure, trenching and backfilling for cables
and pipelines. The vegetation distribution on the area is not uniform. There are in some places
a large vegetation cover and some other places we noted the total absence of vegetation.
Therefore, the impacts on the plants will be limited and, if present, the plants and trees that have
been removed will be preserved and replanted. The impact is assessed to be minor, and the
likelihood is common then the risk is evaluated to be “Engineer”.
6.2.1.2.2 Operation
Due to the likely paving and standing construction over most of the proposed site, it is anticipated
that impacts during the operational phase to any on site vegetation will be minimal. No further
assessment of operational impacts has been made.
As such, the only activities that could negatively impact the ecology of the site would be through
indirect project activities, relating to poor management practices of any designated landscaped
areas.
It is expected that the effect on plants and vegetation on the site to be minimal. As such, the
only activities that could negatively affect the environment of the site would be through indirect
project activities, related to poor management practices in any landscaping areas.
6.2.2 Air quality
6.2.2.1 Methodology of assessment
Air quality impact will be assessed based on the closest existing sensitive air quality receptors
which consist of isolated camps, sheep and camel herders. The workers attending the site
during the construction phase are also considered to be sensitive receptors with respect to the
potential construction impacts of increased dust and exhaust emissions from vehicles. The
assessment considers the potential resultant changes to the receptor and assess the overall
significance of the impact. Impacts will be assessed in the context of the described baseline
conditions within the Area of Influence (AoI) during the lifetime of the development and based
on studies of similar projects. Impacts will be considered in two stages: the construction phase
and the operational phase.
The Construction phase impacts will principally concern with site clearance and construction
activities and will include, but not be limited to:
• Site preparation
• Earthworks.
• Building construction; and
• Construction vehicle movement.
These potential impacts will be qualitatively assessed based on the conditions at site and likely
mitigation measures.
Operational phase impacts which will be considered relevant to air quality will include, but not
be limited to:
• Maintenance of the PV Panels; and

• Maintenance vehicle movement.
These potential impacts have been qualitatively assessed based on the anticipated
methodologies and likely mitigation measures.
Solar Energy Parks are not recognized to be an air polluting activity. No air modeling will be
undertaken.
6.2.2.2.1 Constructional Phase

The current air quality is generally good given that the area is predominantly desertic. The
absence any industries or human activity, also contributes to the good air quality of the area.
Potential impacts on air quality due to constructional activities include temporary decrease in air
quality (i.e. limited to the construction phase of development). During the construction phase,
the site will need to be cleared of vegetation. Bare soil will be exposed to wind and dust will
likely be generated from the movement of construction vehicles on the site.
In addition, activities such as cable trenching and construction of buildings as well as digging of
tower foundations for the associated sub-transmission line will also result in dust generation.
The generation of dust is expected to be short term and only last for the duration of the
construction period. Standard dust suppression interventions used in civil construction projects
must be applied to minimize the impact on surrounding receptors. Taking into consideration of
the existence of sensitive receptors through the site represented by occasional camel and sheep
herders and some temporary campers, the impact from increased dust is evaluated to be minor.
Construction traffic will also result in the production of emissions of NO x, PM10, hydrocarbons
and CO2. The magnitude of the emissions will depend on the number and type of vehicles used;
details of the type of construction traffic are not currently available. There is also the potential
for the emission of fugitive gases (notably volatile organize compounds and methane (CH 4) from
the use of equipment at the site during construction. The use of construction equipment and
vehicles will result in the emission of dust and fugitive emissions and contaminants from
construction plant and vehicles may give rise to odour. Emissions from construction vehicles
and construction equipment will be short term and temporary in nature; the impact of these
emissions is assessed to be minor.
6.2.2.2.2 Operational Phase

It is expected that the project may be assigned a limited number of vehicles during the
operational phase. No dust generation is expected to occur during the operational phase of the
project, except for minimal dust created by this and other maintenance vehicles along the dusty
roads, which is expected to be insignificant and infrequent.
6.2.3 Noise and vibration

Construction noise guidelines within the KSA are understood to restrict the use of loud
construction equipment between 8h00 pm and 7h00 am, except some cases specifically
approved by the NCEC.
At this stage of the development, exact details of the equipment to be used during construction
(i.e. makes & models, quantities and schedules) are yet to be established. Consequently,
assumptions will be made regarding equipment usage based on a typical construction
methodology. It has been assumed that the main construction phases will be as follows:
• Site preparation.
• Civil works.
• Supply and installation of plant and equipment; and
• Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing works.
The assumed equipment used during each of these construction phases is presented in Table
6-4, along with the corresponding noise data (i.e. sound power levels) for each item. Table 6-4
should not be interpreted as a comprehensive list of all equipment likely to be used during these
activities; only items that produce significant levels of noise are considered for the noise
assessment impact
Table 6-4: Typical Noise Levels of Principal Construction Equipment
Type of Machinery/Equipment Typical Noise Level during Major Construction Activity (Noise Level in
dB(A) at 50 Feet)
CLEARING
Bulldozer 80
Front end loader 72 – 84
Dump truck 83 – 94
Jack hammer 81 – 98
Type of Machinery/Equipment Typical Noise Level during Major Construction Activity (Noise Level in
dB(A) at 50 Feet)
Crane with ball 75 – 87
EXCAVATION AND EARTH MOVING
Bulldozer 80
Backhoe 72 – 93
Jack hammer 81 – 98
Scraper 80 – 93
STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION
Crane 75 – 77
Welding generator 71 – 82
Concrete mixer 74 – 88
Concrete pump 81 – 84
Concrete vibrator 76
Air compressor 74 – 87
Pneumatic tools 81 – 98
Bulldozer 80
Cement and dump trucks 83 – 94
Paver 86 – 88
GRAND AND COMPACTING
Grader 80 -93
Roller 73 – 75
PAVING
Paver 86 – 88
Truck 83 – 94
Tamper 74 – 77
LANDSCAPING AND CLEAN UP
Bulldozer 80
Backhoe 72 – 93
Truck 83 – 94
Front end Loader 72 – 84
Dump Truck 83 – 94
Paver 86 – 88
Source: India ministry of environment and climatic change
During operation phase, solar PV systems are static generators of electricity and therefore PV
modules do not generate any audible sound.
6.2.3.2 Impact assessment
Pre-construction noise levels within the project site has been carried out to prepare the basis
for monitoring during the project construction and operational phases. The potential for noise
disturbance is normally greatest during the construction phase of a project. During the
construction phase, construction vehicles including delivery trucks and minimal excavation
equipment may produce a slight increase in noise disturbance. Heavy duty machinery and
vehicular movement, friction between vehicles and the road surface, driver behaviour, vehicles’
horns, resonance of traffic and piling increase ambient noise levels and vibration. Impacts are
likely to be minimal due to the methods of construction to be used.
Delivery vehicles will also create some noise and vibration along access routes. The site,
however, is in a desert setting with few or no receptors considered sensitive within proximity.
For traffic noise, overall daily traffic movements are predicted to be low as the delivery
requirements for men and materials are low and will be restricted to daytime only. As such, the
noise increases over the current baseline along these routes will be adverse but temporary in
nature and minor in significance.
Noise will be monitored periodically during the construction period and results compared to that
of NCEC guidelines. The project environmental supervisor will maintain records of noise
monitoring activities and include such results in progress environmental reports to demonstrate
compliance with the noise limits set and to provide information for any necessary mitigation
measures.

Increased noise levels are not anticipated during the operational phase of the development
either at the power plant site or the transmission line. Emissions of noise during the operation
of the solar power plant will not be significant enough to generate noise nuisance, based on the
actual noise emitted during operation and the distance of the nearest receptors from the plant
site. No noise modelling will be undertaken.
6.2.4 Odours
Odours are resulting essentially from bad management of sanitary facilities. Odours’ impact will
be assessed based on the closest existing sensitive air quality receptors which consist of
isolated camps, sheep and camel herders. The workers attending the site during the
construction phase are also considered to be sensitive receptors with respect to the potential
impacts of increased odours. The assessment considers the potential resultant changes to the
receptor and assess the overall significance of the impact.
6.2.4.2 Preliminary impact assessment
6.2.4.2.1 Construction
There is the potential for release of associated odour to the immediate surrounding areas
associated with inappropriate containment and coverage associated with wastewater
holding/septic tanks. Any such impacts are likely to be fleeting and limited to the immediate
surrounding area.
Such impacts may only occur at the local construction camp or laydown area, which as any
receptor is less sensitive to changes in air quality. All sensitive receptors are located at greater
distances from the construction camp by which point odour is not expected to be discernible.
6.2.4.2.2 Operation
There is the potential for release of odour to the immediate surrounding areas associated with
inappropriate containment and coverage associated with wastewater holding/septic tanks.
6.2.5 Surface water quality
The assessment of surface water quality involves the following general approach:
• The sensitivity or importance of aquatic receptors is established on the basis of their use,
proximity to the Site, existing quality or resource value and consideration of potential
pollutant pathways, evaluation of the significance of the potential changes in water
quality and assessment of the sensitivity of the resource to the predicted changes.
• The potential effects can be classified as neutral, adverse or beneficial and given a
significance of minor, moderate or substantial; and where the predicted effects are
considered to be significant, mitigation measures have to be incorporated to eliminate
or reduce the effects to an acceptable level.

The potential for surface water contamination is an important consideration in relation to the
construction of the power facility. Erosion, resulting from vegetation clearing and excavations
during construction can lead to downstream siltation resulting from run-offs with high sediment
load. This could ultimately lead to contamination of water resources downstream of the project
site. Soil erosion leading to increased sediment load in surface water runoff could impact on
drainage channels in the local area.
uncontrolled spills of fuels and lubricants during the construction phase could persist in the soil
and be driven by surface water runoff to surface water bodies downstream the site and pollutes
them.
There is no existing water body close to the solar power project site. The impact could be
expected in the surface bodies far from the site in case of exceptional rainfall and runoff. Due of
desertic nature of the climate of the region and the scarcity of precipitation and the nature the
impact would be assess with very low significance.

The topography of the area has been discussed above. From the site visit, the topography of
the proposed project is largely flat with some minor wadis through the sites. These wadis are
caused by running storm water from the many hills around the in the area and must be a subject
of consideration in the development of the site both during construction and operation. Thus,
the development of the solar power plant could have an impact on water quality downstream
the site because of alteration of the existing drainage characteristics of the site. The main impact
is likely to arise because of runoff from the power caused by the rise of impermeabilized
surfaces.
The uncontrolled spills and leaks from machinery and chemical materials from solar panels
cleaning and changing is likely a potential source of pollution that could be brought by water
runoffs to nearest water bodies.
There is no local major watercourse, downstream within the vicinity of the site nor important
surface water body.
The plants will be protected, if not possible, relocation of plants will be considered to maintain
to the extent possible their potential capacity of protection against erosion. Furthermore, the
cleared vegetation will be left on the site and so will minimise sediment runoff. then the impact
should be assessed as negligeable to incidental.
6.2.6 Groundwater quality

Current guidance within Western Europe and the USA advocates the use of a conceptual risk
assessment model to establish the potential links between a hazardous source of contamination
and a sensitive receptor via an exposure pathway.
The concept behind this approach is that, without all of the three elements (source, pathway
and receptor), there can be no potential contamination risk. Thus, the presence of a
contamination hazard at a particular site does not necessarily imply the existence of associated
risks.
IFC General EHS Guidelines (2007) defines ‘exposure pathway(s)’, as; ‘a combination of the
route of migration of the contaminant from its point of release (e.g. leaching into groundwater)
and exposure routes (e.g. ingestion, transdermal absorption), which would allow receptor(s) to
come into actual contact with contaminants.’
During construction and operation sources of contamination have to be identified and assessed
within different baseline conditions sections.

The potential for groundwater contamination is associated with uncontrolled spills of fuels and
lubricants during the construction phase. Hydrocarbons are toxic to the ecosystem, with spills
and leaks of hydrocarbon product having potential negative impacts on the groundwater.
Hydrocarbons are also a health and safety risk to humans. Hydrocarbons such as diesel and
petrol may cause respiratory tract irritation, headaches, dizziness, drowsiness, nausea and may
lead to unconsciousness. Additionally, the Benzene contained in these petroleum products is
carcinogenic (cancer causing). The extent and impact of potential groundwater contamination
is largely dependent on the nature of the subsurface soil conditions, their transmissivity and
susceptibility to erosion. Apart from the permeability of the soil substrate, groundwater
contamination could also occur through joints, fractures and contact zones associated with the
geology.
Aquifer is enough deep that contamination is very unlikely to occur. However, measures to
prevent the possibility of contamination of aquifer from this should be implemented. The risk of
contamination is incidental and with low probability, but it could take place.
6.2.6.2.2 Operation phase

The potential for groundwater contamination during the operation phase is associated with
uncontrolled spills of fuels and lubricants from operation of maintenance and changing the solar
panel. Associated with rainfall and process of infiltration these materials could reach and
contaminate the aquifer if appropriate measures are not taken. The risk of aquifer contamination
is considered to be rare but could take place.
6.2.7 Hydrology and flood risk
The methodology of impact assessment on hydrology and flood risk analysis is based upon the
collection of information from a wide variety of data sources including published material and
consultation with statutory bodies.
Production of a hydrology study report to assess flood risk provides an examination of the risk
of flooding due to the proposed development from surface watercourses as well as an
assessment of the flood risk to neighbouring and downstream land as a result of the proposed
development.
Hydrology study will lead to the production of a drainage plan, outlining the proposed measures
to mitigate any detrimental impacts associated with construction and operation of the proposed
development. This will take into consideration the future impacts of climate change on rainfall
patterns. The drainage plan will be prepared pursuant to the requirements of national and local
policy and best practice guidance especially NEOM “Flood risk management and stormwater
drainage guidelines”. Drainage plan will aim to identify the most appropriate solution to manage
flood risk within and downstream of the site.
6.2.7.2 Assessment of impact
Observation during site visit indicated that the site contains a diverse hydrographic network
represented by small wadi or superficial flow lines.
The environmental impacts of the project on the hydrological system will include the destruction
or diversion of many of the main and subsidiary streamlines which may create low places where
surface drainage can gather rainwater and enhances the risk of localised flooding.
Also, changing the natural paths of streamlines may prevent the arrival of rainwater through
surface runoff to storage and collection facilities, such as dams and artificial ponds, for example
and prevent rainwater from reaching aquifer recharging area. Such disturbance of hydrological
system will especially occur in the construction phase.
For this type of project with a minimal disturbance of natural topography, changes made to the
natural paths of runoff water are considered minor and therefore their impact is assessed to be
minimal.
6.2.8 Soil Quality

Current guidance within Western Europe and the USA advocates the use of a conceptual risk
assessment model to establish the potential links between a hazardous source of contamination
and a sensitive receptor via an exposure pathway.
The concept behind this approach is that, without all of the three elements (source, pathway
and receptor), there can be no potential contamination risk. Thus, the presence of a
contamination hazard at a particular site does not necessarily imply the existence of associated
risks.
IFC General EHS Guidelines (2007) defines ‘exposure pathway(s)’, as; ‘a combination of the
route of migration of the contaminant from its point of release and exposure routes, which would
allow receptor(s) to come into actual contact with contaminants.
Contaminated soils can leach toxic chemicals into nearby ground or surface waters, where these
materials can be taken up by plants and animals, contaminate a human drinking water supply,
or volatilize and contaminate the indoor air. Potential sources of contamination have to be
identified and assessed. Pathways have to be evaluated and potential impacted identified.

Contamination of soil at the development site may be present because of past releases.
However, as the site is a undeveloped, these risks are considered low. The preparation of the
solar plant site could have an adverse impact on soils through topsoil compaction, rutting and
mixing because of:
• Excavation of the site for civil works

• The movement of equipment on site during construction; and
• Excavation for the tower foundations
Contamination of soils may also arise through the spillage of lubricants, oils and machine fuel
during construction activities. The main impact on soils will be because of the excavation of the
site for the foundations of the site, site for the foundations of the transmission line towers and
the movement of equipment.

There are potential impacts to land quality from the operation of the facility because of the
presence of contaminative substances and the possibility of minor or major uncontrolled
releases during operation. The operation of the transmission line has the potential to impact on
soils as a result of maintenance activities to gain access to the site and in the periodic clearance
of vegetation within the site exposing soils to rainwater erosion. Clearance of the vegetation for
maintenance purposes is unlikely to have an impact on soils as the vegetation will be cleared
by hand and left on site.
6.2.9 Terrestrial Biodiversity

Following the identification of sensitive ecological receptors and activities that are likely to cause
impacts will be described, the potential resultant changes to the receptor will be assessed to
ascertain the overall significance of the impact. Impacts will be assessed in the context of the
described baseline conditions within the Area of Influence during the lifetime of the development.
Impacts will be considered in two stages: the construction phase and the operational phase.
Construction phase impacts are predominantly concerned with site clearance and construction
activities and include, but are not limited to:
• Increased noise levels.

• Increased vibration.
• Collision risk with site vehicles; and
• Habitat loss, damage and disturbance.
Operational phase impacts which will be considered relevant to ecology include, but are not
limited to:
• Barrier effect between habitats.
• Shading resulting from the suspended PV panels.
• Electrocution risk from overhead transmission lines (associated facilities off-site); and
Collision risk with maintenance vehicles.
6.2.9.2.1 Impacts on fauna and flora

Potential impacts on fauna during construction will be limited to the direct loss of habitat because
of the footprint of the plant and the construction laydown area as well as disturbance and/or
damage to habitats and species because of construction activities e.g. through smothering of
plants by dust, movement of vehicles and construction workers to and from the site. there are
no special habitats for endangered fauna. There are sensitive habitats (rock outcrops) and HCP
species (Ficus palmata, Vachellia gerrardii) within the PV site that will be protected. Therefore,
although a large area of habitat will be permanently lost the overall significance of the impact is
low due to the low conservation value of the habitat within the site area. There will be minimal
impacts during the operational phase as there will be no additional land take.
Measures taken to control loss of biodiversity will include clearing and grading the ground
surface within approved work limits, stripping the topsoil layer from the subsoil, stockpiling the
removed soil in approved areas to be retrievable for landscaping and site restoration around the
building structure, clearing the nearby drainage systems and replanting the original vegetation
after construction is completed. The soil removed from the building site will be used in
landscaping around the paved areas for enhancement of environmental quality. The
surrounding areas of the solar power plant site will be replanted with suitable plants.
6.2.9.2.2 Impacts of Introduction of invasive species

During construction phase, the back-and-forth movement of heavy machinery, trucks and
vehicles can accidentally bring and introduce seeds of invasive species into the site.
Disturbance of soil and vegetation is likely to create opportunities for seeds to germinate and
the establishment of alien invasive species. Alien invasive species can outcompete natural
vegetation, decreasing indigenous species abundance and diversity. If allowed to seed before
control measures are implemented, alien plans can easily colonise and impact on vegetation
communities on site and in the surrounding areas. Alien invasive plants could also be distributed
through vehicles leaving the site.
In terms of alien fauna several urbanised alien faunal species are already present in the greater
area. If food and food waste is not managed appropriately it could attract additional alien faunal
species or individuals to site.
If equipment and/or fill material from other areas is imported during the construction and
operational phases there is a high risk that alien invasive plants may be introduced and could
spread into adjacent areas where they may replace indigenous vegetation and/or reduce
grazing potential for wild animals, camels, sheep and goats’ herds.
For the construction phase and after mitigation the predicted impacts as a result on alien
invasive species are of local extent, short-term duration, low intensity with overall low
consequence, which together with its probable likelihood results in an overall impact significance
of low.
For the operational phase and after mitigation the predicted impacts as a result on alien invasive
species are of local extent, long-term duration, low intensity with overall low consequence, which
together with its possible likelihood results in an overall impact significance of very low.
6.2.10 Health and safety (occupational and public)

The impact assessment has been completed in accordance with the methodology outlined by
Chapter 6.
The assessment considers the potential impacts, that the solar park may have on the health,
safety both the employees and the local communities.
Consideration has been given to impacts associated with the construction, operation and
decommissioning phases of the park.
The identification of sensitive receptors has been based on assumptions made relating to the
likely geographical influence of the park, and the pathways to which potential impacts could
occur on people within the geographical area of influence. All receptors are considered to have
‘high’ sensitivity.

As with any construction project, there is potential for impacts on human health and safety
because of accidents and unplanned events that may occur during the construction of the PV
power facility. The risk of injury associated with the construction of the PV power facility will be
mainly limited to the subcontractors (as the site will be secured to avoid public incursion into the
active development area), but there remains some risk of injury to other site users (i.e. camel
and sheep herders).
The impact of employment created during construction is considered a positive effect from the
project. However, most of employment during construction is likely to be relatively short-term
and significant employment opportunities for local communities may be limited to the people
with low levels of education, skills and limited experience. This can result in a large percentage
of skilled and semi-skilled workforce being sourced on a temporary or permanent basis from
outside the region. At this stage in the project development, the origin workers is unknown.
There will be the potential for increased road traffic accidents from increased construction traffic.
During construction, non-local employees are typically employed on a ‘single’ basis, they will
not come with their families. Often, they can be housed close to the construction sites in
purpose- built accommodation of within the nearby communities, which will most be likely in this
case.
Coinciding with the influx of migrant workers is typically a raise in demand for goods and services
during the construction period which can result in a rapid expansion in supply chain businesses
operating in the area. This expansion may result in migration into the area. The impacts that
may arise from the presence of migrant and/or expatriate employees are largely comprised of:
• Inappropriate behaviour and lack of respect for local leadership and cultural norms on
the part of expatriate workers;
• Conflict resulting in part from resentment by skilled nationals and residents if they
perceive that expatriates have been hired into jobs for which they are suitably qualified;
• Spread of transmissible diseases both within the workforce and between the workforce
and the local community;
• Resentment of non-local nationals by residents if they are perceived to have taken jobs
that could be successfully filled by local people, or due to non-integration with the local
community; and
• Increased local demand for consumer goods and housing with resulting encouragement
for improved supply resulting in financial hardship and benefits for local people; and,
• Increased pressure on infrastructure, services (such as healthcare) and roads,
particularly with the establishment of informal settlements.

During operation, the impacts are considered largely positive. The project will provide a good
source of long-term primary and secondary employment and economic growth for the area.
6.2.11 Landscape and visual comfort

Walkover surveys were conducted to establish the baseline characteristics of the Project site
and to identify viewpoints. All visual assessment field survey work has been undertaken within
the site area.
Impact will be assessed regarding two types of receptors:
• Landscape receptor that means an element or a group of elements which will be directly
or indirectly affected by the development. Landscape receptors are physical elements
or attributes of the landscape that could be affected by the development, such as
landscape character, landform, water courses, groups of trees, land uses and field
boundaries.
• Visual receptor that means an element - or group of elements - that will be directly or
indirectly affected by the proposed development. These would include viewpoints
available to users of public roads; viewpoints from landscape features and beauty spots
and viewpoints available to people travelling through the landscape.

The construction of associated infrastructure of the solar energy facility (i.e. the substation,
associated power line, access road to the site, internal access roads within the site) has the
potential of visual impacts on local campers or passers-by. There is the potential visual impact
of the construction of ancillary infrastructure on observers residing near of the facility. Such
potential visual impacts during the construction phase on observers near the solar plant are
expected to be of a short duration and limited to the site.
The proposed development will result in a significant change to the local landscape character.
The development is likely to impact the overall sense of place of the wider area. The site is in a
rural area and is relatively flat and as such the visual impact of the PV power facility is regarded
as a potentially important consequence of the proposed development. Various aspects of the
construction phase that will contribute to visual impacts caused by the proposed development
include:
• large area of vegetation will be cleared for the proposed solar field, equipment
laydown areas and buildings;
• Construction activities and equipment associated with construction of the proposed
development, including access roads and buildings;
• A slight increase in traffic can be expected on roads, particularly large construction
and freight vehicles.
• The nightscape will potentially be affected by security and construction lighting at
night;
• Construction of the overhead distribution lines and the onsite substation are likely to
be visible against the skyline in places;
• Large areas cleared of vegetation will potentially generate dust which will draw
attention to the development over a wide area (i.e. increase the visibility of
construction activities); and
• There is also potentially an increase in the risk of veld fires occurring during this
phase which will have a similar visual effect to dust generation.
• The resultant disfigured landscapes and mounds of spoils are visually intrusive.
The solar power plant construction activities will also lead to landscape disfiguration. In addition,
the soil mounds, presence of machinery, and other equipment and materials on the project site
will be visually intrusive. Subsequently, key issues during the construction phase are:
• Potential visual intrusion of construction activities on the existing views of sensitive visual
receptors in the rural landscape;
• Potential visual intrusion of a large area cleared of vegetation on the existing views of
sensitive visual receptors; and
• Erection of towers.
• Potential visual impact of night lighting during the construction phase on the nightscape
of the region.

During the operational phase, a few elements of the proposed PV solar park will potentially
intrude on the existing views of visual receptors. The very large solar field (with solar panels
covering the area, tall structures such as the on-site substation, and overhead transmission lines
connecting the plant with the SEC power grid. Thus, key issues related to the operational phase
of the development are:
• Potential landscape impact of introducing a large solar plant into a remote rural
landscape.
• Potential visual intrusion of a large solar field on the existing views of sensitive visual
receptors.
• Potential visual intrusion of tall, relatively large structures on the existing views of
sensitive visual receptors; and
• Potential impact of night lighting of the development on the relatively dark rural
nightscape.
6.2.12 Land use
The assessment of land use effects identifies the existing conditions of the area surrounding the
Project and predicts the likely effects arising from the Project. The assessment will be carried
out through desktop studies and baseline analysis.
Baseline conditions have been established through a walkover carried out by Environmental Experts
assigned by NEOM. Consultation and review of this information will be adopted in order to assess
the significance of impacts of the Project on the area.

Construction activities cannot hinder or affect the actual use of land on the site, as these lands
are not of agricultural value for the population around excepting grazing activity. Herders can
move elsewhere to keep their activity.

The operation will not cause disturbance or affect the use of the land as it will no more used for
grazing by the temporary residing communities. Thus, the project cannot have a negative impact
regarding this aspect.
6.2.13 Waste generation

This assessment focuses on key waste management issues associated with the project that
could have an impact upon the environment. The assessment also aims to identify opportunities
which may reduce the likelihood or severity and subsequently the degree of significance of the
environmental impacts. The waste streams anticipated to be generated from the Project are
detailed within Table 6-5, and further discussed in the subsequent sections of this Chapter,
detailing if they are associated with either tailored to the construction, operational phases of the
Project.
Table 6-5: Predicted waste streams generated by the Proposed Development
WASTE DESCRIPTION
CATEGORY
Excavated As the Project site has already been cleared and graded, minimal excavations are
waste expected to occur. However, as part of the pre-construction site activities, some
further excavation activities may be required across the Project footprint area
requiring the disposal of bulk excavated soils. The excavated waste generated as
part of this Project will be more likely to be associated with trenching activities for
example for drainage channels.
Municipal solid This refers to the general waste that will be generated mainly during both
waste construction and operational phases of the Project by construction workers and
future operational employees of the facility.
Inert waste During the construction phase, an assortment of inert waste streams is likely to
be generated. The likely range of waste streams associated with infrastructure,
building construction and site preparation would include but not limited to:
WASTE DESCRIPTION
CATEGORY
• packaging made of paper, • plastic;
cardboard, plastic, wood, • iron and steel;
metal, composite; • aluminium;
• concrete and bricks; • mixed metals;
• mixtures of concrete, • cables;
bricks, tiles and ceramics • soil and stones;
(non-hazardous); • insulation materials; and
• wood; • mixed construction and
• glass; demolition wastes.
Hazardous Hazardous waste is a waste with properties that make it potentially dangerous or
waste harmful to human health or the environment. Hazardous wastes can be liquids,
solids, or gases. The likely range of waste associated with infrastructure, building
materials in the course of the life cycle of the Project may include:
• waste oil; • contaminated soils;
• paints; • coating substances;
• oils; • batteries
• tyres; • capacitors;
• acid; • used chemical drums;
• used spill kit materials; • hydrocarbon waste.
Demolition Demolition waste streams are anticipated to be generated as a consequence of
Waste temporary structures expected to be erected during the construction phase, and
during the decommissioning phase of the Project including but not limited to:
• asphalt; • gravel; and
• concrete; • scrap metal.
• wood;
Landscape Green waste is anticipated to be generated from necessary vegetation clearing
Waste activity during pre-construction work and during the operational phase of the
Project, however, as the Project footprint area currently supports undeveloped
disturbed land, it would anticipated that the associated volume would not be
significant.
E-Waste While E-Waste streams, including PV solar panels, are expected to be
generated during the construction (damaged materials) and operation (repair
activities) phases, it is envisaged that the main generation of this specific waste
stream would occur in the course of the decommissioning phase of the Project.
Wastewater This refers to used water which will be typically disposed of into sewerage
networks (which do not exist on site) or into an underground holding tanks, prior
to removal by approved waste management service providers. This also
includes effluent from construction activities.
For the purposes of this ESIA, the above waste streams have been broadly classified into three
different categories as presented in Table 6-6 below. Due to their diverse characteristics,
different categories of solid waste streams would require specific storage and handling
arrangements and subsequent recycling and disposal arrangements in order to avoid risks to
the environment and human health.
Table 6-6: Waste Classification
NATURE OF DEFINITION EXAMPLES

WASTE
Hazardous Waste streams which can be Asbestos, aerosols, fuel, oils, paint,
Waste dangerous or potentially harmful to solvents, contaminated soil, asphalt,
human health or the environment. batteries, treated wood, packaging
Hazardous waste are contaminated by hazardous waste etc.
characterises according to four
factors: toxicity, ignitibility,
corrosiveness and reactivity.
Hazardous wastes can be liquids,
solids, gases, or sludge.
NATURE OF DEFINITION EXAMPLES
WASTE
Non- Waste streams which can degrade Food waste, vegetation, wood (non-
hazardous chemically or biologically into the treated), metals, plastics etc.
and inert environment without any harm to Cement, sand, glass, excavated soil
waste the environment or human health. (not contaminated) etc.
Waste streams which cannot
breakdown in the environment as it
is neither chemically or biologically
reactive, but excludes E-Waste.
E-Waste E-Waste describes discarded PV Solar panels, mobile phones, base
electrical or electronic devices. stations, desktop computers, laptop
Used electronics which are computers, mobile phones, headsets,
destined for reuse, resale, salvage, switches, CD/DVD media, antenna
recycling, or disposal are also network systems, keyboards, empty
considered e-waste. Informal toners, processor, random access
processing of e-waste can lead to memories (RAMs), and radio equipment.
adverse human health effects and
environmental pollution.
The extent of the study area will be determined through considering the range of sensitive
receptors that may be impacted by the proposed Project. In the case of waste management, the
sensitive receptors are not solely located within the proposed footprint area but would also
include waste management infrastructures operating at a regional level. Sensitive receptors are
identified based on the following:
• The potential linkages between the generation of specific waste streams.

• Volumes of the waste streams; and
• The impact this may have on the surrounding environment.
As previously noted, the principal aim of this assessment is to consider the key waste
management issues associated with the construction, operational and decommissioning phases
of the proposed Project with particular reference to identifying opportunities for the reduction of
the severity or likelihood of significant environmental impacts. The methodology that will be
deployed within this ESIA will include a number of distinct tasks:
• Incorporate results of the site reconnaissance undertaken by experts assigned by NEOM

in order to gain an understanding of issues regarding environmental degradation and
waste management on the existing Project footprint area and its vicinity.
• A desktop review of publicly information associated with existing waste management
infrastructure and regulatory framework in KSA and specifically NEOM guidelines
regarding waste management. And more particularly in the vicinity of the Solar Plant with
a primary objective to establish the availability, condition and capacity of the existing
waste management infrastructure associated with transportation, recycling, treatment,
disposal and recovery operations at local, regional or national level.
• A review of available and accessible waste management policy of NEOM.
The following assumptions will be taken in account during the assessment:
• The engineered disposal landfill facility is capable of accommodating the anticipated

nonhazardous waste volumes generated during the life cycle of the Project; and
• The Project is at an early design stage and therefore details on waste generation and
handling are not yet available. Therefore, the significance of impacts from waste
management will be estimated based on the Project’s available information and previous
experience on similar developments, mainly extracted from literature review.
6.2.13.2.1.1 Non-hazardous solid waste

Solid waste will be generated during the construction phase and will likely consist of
biodegradable waste such as cleared vegetation; general waste such as paper, packaging
cardboard, plastics, food waste; and construction related waste such as rubbles, metal off cuts,
etc. The applicant should undertake waste segregation and store segregated waste in specific
bins in the site. Re-useable and recyclable materials should be recycled to the extent possible.
Residential and biodegradable waste will be taken to the nearest landfill.
6.2.13.2.1.2 hazardous waste

Limited hazardous waste like used oil, lubricants, chemicals…etc, have to be stored
appropriately for recycling/disposal at appropriate site.
6.2.13.2.1.3 Domestic wastewater

Wastewater will be generated from human activities such as cooking, hand washing, showering
and toilets. Black/grey water will be gathered and disposed by a subcontractor to the nearest
sewage treatment facility.
6.2.13.2.1.4 Industrial wastewater

Industrial wastewater results on the site from water used for construction purposes such as
washing tools covered in excess cement and machines. It is proposed that any areas set aside
for washing of tools must be more than 100 meters from any water resource. Industrial
wastewater will be gathered and treated separately in specific tanks and an approved contractor
will be employed to regularly empty and maintain the gathering facilities if implemented on site.
It is the responsibility of the applicant to ensure that the contractor removes and transports the
industrial wastewater to a licensed treatment facility.
6.2.13.2.2.1 Non-hazardous waste
During the operational phase, general waste is expected to be generated from food wastes,
packaging, paper, etc.
The applicant should undertake waste segregation and store segregated waste in specific bins
in the site. Re-useable and recyclable materials should be recycled to the extent possible.
Residential and biodegradable waste will be taken to the nearest landfill.
6.2.13.2.2.2 Hazardous waste
The project facility will also undergo routine maintenance which may waste consisting of oils,
greases, lubricants and defective panels. Accidental spillage of small amounts of oil for
machinery maintenance or from vehicles may contaminate the soil if not properly contained.
This kind of waste has to be stored appropriately for recycling/disposal at appropriate site.
Management and mitigation measures will be included in the EMP to ensure optimal use and
recycling of material and to minimize the possibility of soil pollution on site.
The associated impact is considered negligible provided that an appropriate waste management
plan is efficiently implemented.
6.2.13.2.2.3 Domestic wastewater
Wastewater will be generated from human activities such as cooking, hand washing, showering
and toilets. Black/grey water will be gathered and disposed by a subcontractor to the nearest
sewage treatment facility.
6.2.14 Economic and social aspects

The significance of impacts on socioeconomics will be assessed by comparing the baseline

conditions to the likely conditions during both construction and operation. Consideration will be
given to identification of both potentially beneficial and adverse social impacts which will be
assessed by comparing the quality of the baseline conditions with the predicted quality of the
social environment once the Project is in place.
Construction activities can potentially have a positive socio-economic impact by the provision of
temporary employment opportunities and an improvement in local economy of the region
generated by an increased demand for local goods and services. Conversely, construction
activities can also have a negative impact on local communities through the impact of an influx
of construction workers, which may place pressure on local resources, affect social dynamics
and culture, and exacerbate health problems, etc.
Based on the status and conditions of the project area and the nature of the proposed
development, the following socio-economic impacts are anticipated:
• Influx of job seekers;

• Increased competition for urban-based employment;
• Increases in social deviance.
• Impact on health;
• Increases in incidence of infectious diseases spread;
• Expectations regarding jobs.
• Local spending;
• Change in land use
• Creation of temporary jobs during construction (including local jobs);
• Skills training for local workers during construction.
• Creation of long-term jobs during operations and skills training;
• Potential for sourcing materials locally (during construction and operations); and
• Job losses at the end of the project life-cycle.
By far the most significant driver of change likely to result from the proposed project is the influx
of people into the project area, and the corresponding increase in spending and employment.
Such an influx of expatriate workers into the receiving environment is likely to cause a
disturbance in the order of the existing social structure and might also lead to increases in social
deviance. Increased spending and employment (even though such employment might be short-
term) generates positive impacts through the multiplier effect and by providing much needed
financial relief in the area. However, it also creates significant, and often unrealistic,
expectations regarding potential employment.
As excepted, the project will bring in employment opportunities for the local inhabitants.
Construction crews will constitute mainly skilled and semi-skilled workers. Unskilled jobs will be
offered mainly to the local people particularly during the construction phase. It will be necessary
for the EPC Contractor and project parties to ensure appropriate labour and working conditions
and facilities are in place for their workforce. These conditions will need to meet national and
international requirements.
The installation of approximately 2,082 MW Solar Power Plant will improve the renewable
energy sector in the Kingdom and SEC service. This will result in benefits to Kingdom economy
by providing a more reliable electricity supply and decrease the reliance on fossil fuel energy.
This will have a positive impact on air quality through the reduction of air emissions from Thermal
Power plants and may reduce the cost of electricity.
Working opportunities will be created by hiring technical workers for operations at the solar
power plant during operational phase. in addition to technical workers, other people will be
engaged at site for security and administrative duties expected. Again, the operation of the plant
may also result in employment opportunities, indirectly through creating free energy source in a
non-urbanized area which would enhance the emergence and development of small businesses
e.g. suppliers/distributors of foodstuff, among other service providers. And traveling of people
to that area for trips and excursions. The development could increase income for these
businesses.
6.2.14.3 Operation of the solar plant could have an impact on land use by disturbing access of
camel and sheep herders to grazing areas. Movement of traffic to and from the site will
be limited primarily to that of workers vehicles.
6.2.14.4 Traffic and transport
6.2.14.4.1 Methodology of assessment
This section describes the impact on existing traffic and transport infrastructure as a result of
the construction, operation and decommissioning of the proposed Solar Energy Park. The
significance of the potential impacts on existing traffic and transport infrastructure are
characterized in accordance with standard methodology as described in chapter 6 of this report.
Section 3 Community Health and Safety of the International Finance Corporation (IFC) General
Environment Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines 2007 is used to inform the impact
assessment.
6.2.14.4.2 impact assessment traffic and transport
6.2.14.4.2.1 Construction phase

The highest traffic volumes will be created during the construction phase. The activities that will
generate traffic during the construction phase include site preparation and the transportation of
construction materials and associated infrastructure to the site, as well as the transportation of
employees to and from the site daily. During this period, the site will receive many truckloads of
fill material, construction materials daily for the constructional period. Concrete plant and some
material (cabling, cement etc.) will be transported to the site via normal articulated heavy goods
vehicles. Aggregate for tracks and foundations will be sourced from off-site quarries in proximity
to the Project. Building materials supply to the site would be frequent for sand, stones, cement,
and blocks, especially during early stages of the construction period. In addition to this are the
equipment and machinery, and this would be delivered to be project site, via road to the project
sites. The impact due to the traffic movement during construction is assessed as small to
medium.
6.2.14.4.2.2 Operation phase

There may be some alterations in the existing road traffic movements associated with the
operational project. However, these impacts will be considerably less than during construction.
During operation and maintenance trips to and from the solar plant will be limited to the trips of
maintenance stuff with their heavy machinery and using access tracks which are less frequent
than in construction phase and daily trips of operations workers to get to work. Impact during
operation phase is negligeable
6.2.15 Impacts of decommissioning phase
For the assessment methodology during decommissioning phase, reference will be made to
various methodologies adopted for technical environmental assessments, including noise, air
quality, landscape and visual …etc.
The key issues associated with the decommissioning phase will include:
• Issue of loss of job when the workers will be asked to leave.
• Improper disposal of demolition waste and obsolete machinery will lead to contamination
of soil, water, and discontent of community.
• Demolition activity is anticipated to generate dust and exhaust emissions which can be
carried downwind to habitations around.
• Risks associated with health and safety issues such as trip and fall, electrical hazard etc.
• The decommissioning activities of dismantling or removing the solar PV power plant and
removing the ancillary facilities can lead to increased noise levels.
• Generation of broken panels which is hazardous waste.
• Contamination of drainage channels due to release of hazardous waste; and
• During the dismantling or removing of the solar PV plant, with the removal of ancillary
facilities, visual intrusions will be likely but their consequence
6.2.16 Unplanned events
The potential for identified relevant unplanned event, major accident and/or disaster to result in
a significant adverse environmental effect will be evaluated using a risk-based approach. The
approach will consider the environmental consequences of a risk event, the likelihood of these
consequences occurring, taking into account planned design and embedded mitigation, and the
acceptability of the subsequent risk to the environment. The process followed includes:
• Identifying risks;
• Screening these risks;
• Defining the impact;
• Assessing the likelihood; and
• Then assessing the risk.
Unplanned events include a range of unintended activities and accidental events such as spills.
These events can negatively affect a number of receptors, including primarily air and soil quality.
The non-routine events that can occur during the various phases of the project are listed below:
• Leaks and Spills

• Improper disposal of waste explosion and fire
• Vehicle Accidents
The assessment of the significance of the impacts of incidental (non-routine) events throughout
the project phases detailed below is based on a conservative approach and does not take into
account the probability of the accident.
6.2.16.2.1 Impact on Air quality
Air Quality Air quality can be affected as a result of explosions and fires. A large concentration
of various air pollutants such as sulfur dioxide and particulate matter results from fire and/or
explosion. The type of air pollutants emitted depends on the properties of the flammable
substance as well as temperature.
The effect of fire and explosion on ambient air quality is highly dependent on various factors
such as the type and size of the flammable substance and the duration of the fire. In the event
of a large fire, given the low sensitivity of the potentially affected receiver, the effect is expected
to be moderate.
6.2.16.2.2 Groundwater quality
Groundwater quality may be affected by spills during construction. This may happen due to
mismanagement and leakage of contaminated construction materials such as paints and fuels
that may reach the ground water resulting in pollution. Hazardous and non-hazardous materials
used in construction may include fuels, engine oil, paints, solvents, and other chemicals. Poor
handling of materials and improper storage may cause defective containment and possible
leakage. Impact on groundwater is likely, as a result of insignificant spillage at
maintenance/workshop sites from construction equipment or leakage, from the effluent
collection system of the available HS facility. Minor leakage of some organic matter,
hydrocarbons, oils, coliforms or heavy metals may result if they reach groundwater. Improper
disposal of waste affects the quality of groundwater.
The groundwater was not found till the depth of 15 m. the overall impact the quality of the
groundwater due to various non-routine events can be categorized as negligeable or non-
existent.
6.2.16.2.3 Soil contamination
During construction, potential soil contamination will be from materials such as: fuel, engine oil,
paint, solvents, and chemical additives, which are expected to be stored and circulated at the
construction site. Accidental spills may reach the soil, resulting in contamination. Also, improper
management of solid waste may lead to the same results. The human sewage facilities during
the construction phase may result in soil contamination.
Soil quality can be affected by the failure of chemical, raw material and sewage containment
systems, such as tanks, pipes, etc. Incidental effects on the soil are minor due to the low
sensitivity of the soil.
6.2.16.2.4 Ecosystem environment
The biological environment includes plants, reptiles, mammals and birds. The biological
environment may be affected during any accidental events. For fires and explosions, regardless
of the animals in the immediate accident site that can be killed when the fire breaks out, the
animals are expected to flee the area very soon due to the thermal radiation. The significance
of the potential impact is rated as minor.
Spills and spills may adversely affect the terrestrial environment and biodiversity. The extent
and magnitude of the effect is highly dependent on the substance/chemical released in terms of
composition and quantity. Due to the low sensitivity of potentially affected environmental
receptors, the significance of the direct effect is rated as negligible.
Accidental release of solid waste from vehicles may occur during transportation of such waste
for disposal which may have implications for the well-being of existing biodiversity if not
contained immediately. The significance of the effect is also expected to be negligible
6.2.16.2.5 Surrounding Population
Effects on the human environment can result from the following non-routine incidental events:
• fire and explosion

• Vehicle Accidents
Fire and explosion may affect the surrounding population, if any. In general, a fire may be
caused by a flammable substance that will disturb the residents of the area in the vicinity of the
project, which may lead to a change in their behavior.
However, these changes are expected to be limited to a short period of time, the magnitude of
the effect is expected to be small, and the significance is moderate. The magnitude of the effect
on site workers is expected to be moderately sensitive and, as such, the effect is expected to
be moderate.
Vehicle collisions and accidents during the movement of construction vehicles and
transportation of workers to and from their places of residence may result in injuries or loss of
life affecting both workers and local residents, and the impact of injuries may last for a long time
while the loss of life is permanent. The effect is expected to be moderate in size, and therefore
the effect is moderate.
During the construction and operation phase many unplanned events could accidentally happen
such as spillage of fuel, oil, chemicals and hazardous materials, fire and explosion. These
events may have an adverse impact on the water and soil quality which decreases as well as
the air quality. Negative impact will also affect community and workers health.
Increasing of traffic volume may increase risk of vehicle accident and then risk of serious injuries
/death to workers and community.
6.2.17 Climate and Climate Change
The study area to be considered for the climate impact assessment incorporates direct GHG
emissions arising from construction activities within the asset boundaries and any associated
laydown areas, in addition to regional/national climate risks to the Project itself. The temporal
study area is the whole lifecycle of the Project.
6.2.17.2 Constructional Phase
The development of the Solar Power Plant Project would involve the use of construction
equipment and operation of motor vehicles which would produce GHGs. Again, the vegetation
clearing will also reduce carbon sinks and contribute to greenhouse gas emissions. Clearing of
such vegetation because of project activities will be insignificant with respect to carbon sink
reduction generally.
6.2.17.3 Operational Phase
The proposed project would provide a new, utility-scale source of solar energy to complement
existing and proposed sources of renewable energy. When the sun shines and electricity is
generated by the solar power project, the real-time output required from fossil fuel plants would
be reduced by the amount of renewable generation going into the electrical grid to maintain the
balance between the supply and demand for electricity. GHG reductions therefore would be
realized by this project. By displacing fossil fuel-based energy generation with renewable energy
generation, GHG production would be reduced.
6.2.18 Ecosystem Services

6.2.18.1 Assessment Methodology
As impacts on ecosystem services are not on a sole receptor, but rather on the ecosystem
service itself, the impact significance has been assessed differently to the other chapters. A
qualitative assessment of magnitude is provided alongside a justification of the ecosystem
sensitivity in order to determine the impact significance.
6.2.18.2 Assessment of Impacts

6.2.18.2.1.1 Provisioning Service – Livestock Herding
Construction of the Project, and the physical act of delineating the site and fencing the site, will
result in loss of land for livestock herding which will impact informal land users.
As is evident from the following figure, there is a lot of similar land to the north of the Project site
that can be used for grazing livestock, however, the establishment of the Project will result in
inevitable land losses.
A grievance mechanism and the contact details for raising concerns or complaints will need to
be established and should there be specific grievances in regard to this ecosystem service, this
will be raised via this process for logging and investigation.
6.2.18.2.1.2 Regulating Service – Regulating Air Quality and Climate Change
Even considering the size of the Project and the vegetative ground cover, the lack of voluminous
biomass that would present stores for carbon means that the implementation of the Project is
not expected to result in the loss of significant carbon sinks.
6.2.18.2.1.3 Regulating Service – Regulating Water Flows
The construction phase will result in changes in the direction or the natural flow of surface water
at the site. This may potentially divert water flows away from vegetated areas, carry
contamination from the construction site, or result in flooding impacts upon nearby or
downstream communities and lands.

6.2.18.2.2.1 Provisioning Service – Livestock Herding
After construction, there will not be any further land take and therefore no additional impacts to
livestock herding are anticipated.
6.2.18.2.2.2 Regulating Service – Regulating Air Quality and Climate Change
After construction, there will be no further removal of vegetation and, where practical, shrub
species will be allowed to re-establish. It is also important to note that mature trees will be
transplanted in accordance with NEOM Native Tree Transplanting Guidelines (2021).
6.2.18.2.2.3 Regulating Services- Regulating Water Flows
The implementation of the Project and the installation of a stormwater network will result in
changes in the direction or the natural flow of surface water from the site. This can potentially
divert water flows away from vegetated areas or result in flooding which will result in direct
impact upon nearby communicates and lands. However, considering the low precipitation levels
and the limited concrete or impermeable surfaces this is not expected to be a major impact.
6.2.19 Human Rights

The human rights impact assessment was conducted in line with the updated Equator Principle
4 (EP 4) which came into effect on 1 st October 2020. The EP 4 outline the requirement for the
Client to assess the Human Rights Impacts as part of the ESHIA study or other assessment.
The main objective of this Human Right Impact Assessment (HRIA) report is to identify,
understand, assess, and address the adverse effects of PEC’s project or activities on the human
rights such as workers and community members. The Human Right assessment is also intended
to prevent or mitigate risks of adverse impacts from PEC business operations and services.
PEC has taken proactive approach to ensure that right of workers and community members are
to be respected and promoted.
The risks that may occur during the construction stage are mainly related to workers which are:
➢ Labour rights issues

• Human Resources (HR) Policy and Procedures
• Gender equality
• Foreign workers
• Women rights
➢ Condition of Work
• Employment contract
• Accommodation
• Environmental, Safety & Health issues at workplace
➢ Child labour and forced labour
The significance of human rights impacts has been identified as Low based on an assessed
low impact severity and low receptor sensitivity.
6.3 Transboundary Impacts
Transboundary impacts are defined by the IFC PS 1 as impacts that extend to multiple countries
but are not global in nature. It is not anticipated that the Project will give rise to any
transboundary impacts.
6.4 Summary of Impacts Pre-Mitigation
Table 6-7 summarizes the main impacts identified and their assessment before mitigation
measures were taken. Impact were assessed according to the methodology mentioned in the
chapter 6
Table 6-7: summary of impacts
Environmental
Potential Impact Timing Nature Degree extent duration reversibility Probability Significance
aspect
Natural vegetation construction negative minor local long-term irreversible frequent Engineer
vegetal cover removal
cover operation negative negligible local long -term irreversible remote no action
construction negative minor local short -term reversible common Engineer
operation negative negligible local long -term reversible seldom no action
noise environment construction negative minor local short -term reversible common Engineer
Noise and vibration
disturbance operation negative negligible local long -term reversible seldom no action
construction negative incidental local short -term reversible occasional manage
operation negative incidental local long -term reversible occasional manage
Surface water surface water quality construction negative incidental local - regional long-term reversible seldom mitigate
quality degradation operation negative negligible local-regional long -term reversible seldom no action
groundwater quality construction negative incidental local-regional long-term irreversible seldom mitigate
Groundwater quality
degradation operation negative incidental local-regional long -term irreversible seldom mitigate
Hydrology and flood natural hydrologic construction negative minor local - regional long -term irreversible occasional manage
risk system disturbance operation negative incidental local-regional long -term irreversible seldom mitigate
Potential soil construction negative incidental local long-term reversible seldom mitigate
Quality of soil
contamination operation negative incidental local long -term reversible remote mitigate
Terrestrial ecosystem disturbance construction negative moderate local long -term irreversible common engineer
Biodiversity and habitat destruction operation negative incidental local long -term irreversible remote mitigate
short/long
negative incidental regional - local reversible seldom mitigate
Introduction of ecosystem disturbance construction term
invasive species and habitat destruction long/short
Negative incidental regional/local reversible seldom mitigate
operation term
risk of accidents and construction negative incidental local -regional short-term reversible occasional manage
injuries during
construction and
Health and safety operation, workers
(occupational and conflict with local
public) community, influx of operation negative incidental local -regional long -term reversible occasional manage
foreign workers and
infectious disease
spread

Environmental
Potential Impact Timing Nature Degree extent duration reversibility Probability Significance
aspect
Landscape and degradation of general construction negative minor local short -term irreversible occasional manage
visual comfort landscape of the site operation negative minor local long -term irreversible common engineer
construction negative minor local long-term irreversible occasional manage
operation negative minor local long -term irreversible remote mitigate
non-hazardous and construction negative incidental local - regional long -term reversible occasional manage
hazardous waste
generation ,
Waste generation
contamination of water operation negative incidental local - regional long -term reversible seldom mitigate
and soil if managed
badly
local - regional -
construction negative minor national - long-term irreversible common engineer
Reduction/increasing of
Climate change international
GHGs
local - regional -
operation positive appreciable long -term irreversible common plan
national
Creation of job construction positive marginal regional short term reversible certain design
opportunities operation positive marginal regional reversible frequent plan
regional -
construction positive marginal long-term reversible frequent plan
Growth of regional national
economy regional-
operation negative Appreciable long-term reversible common plan
Economic and social national
aspects construction negative incidental regional short-term reversible occasional manage
workers conflict with
local communities operation incidental regional long-term reversible seldom mitigate
short/long
negative incidental regional - local reversible seldom mitigate
infectious disease construction term
spread long/short
negative incidental regional/local reversible seldom mitigate
operation term
construction negative incidental local - regional short term reversible occasional manage
volume of traffic rise and operation negative negligible local - regional long -term reversible remote no action
Traffic and transport
risk of accidents local - regional -
operation long -term no action
negative negligible national irreversible remote
short/long
construction incidental regional - local reversible seldom mitigate
negative term
Risk of oil/chemicals long/short
operation incidental regional/local reversible seldom mitigate
Unplanned events spill, vehicle accidents negative term
Air quality, noise, traffic, short/long
Decommissioning incidental regional - local reversible seldom mitigate
Decommissioning job loss negative term
7 Plans
7.1 Environmental Mitigation Plan
Mitigation measures are defined as the approved practices that reduce or eliminate the negative
environmental impacts associated with any development project. It aims to amplify the expected
benefits of a particular project and reduce the negative effects associated with it. Mitigation
measures include eliminating or reducing pollution sources and conserving of water, energy and
various natural resources.
Preventing and eliminating the source of pollution is better than minimizing the associated
effects. Efforts made by the construction and operation team and the environment team should
be combined to achieve an environmentally friendly project with the lowest possible impact.
This section presents the mitigation measures that must be adopted during the construction and
operation phases to minimize associated negative environmental impacts as much as possible.
The environmental management plan, along with the environmental monitoring programs, must
ensure proper management of these impacts
Mitigation measures will be approved by the contractor during the implementation of the project.
It is important to emphasize that the majority of impacts associated with the project will occur
during the construction phase, and the implementation of the recommended mitigation
measures will effectively reduce negative impacts.
7.1.1 Natural Vegetation Cover

The EPC contractor must develop an environment monitoring plan to control and prevent
releases to terrestrial ecosystems at the site and surrounding area. Most environmental impacts
on natural cover vegetation are occurring on construction phase.
The EPC contractor shall implement the following mitigation measure to preserve to the extent
possible natural vegetation cover:
• The contractor should avoid unnecessary plants removal or disturbances

• The contractor should ensure that only vegetation within the work boundary is removed.
Vegetation outside the proposed project layout shall not be removed or disturbed. An
emergency response plan will be in place in the case of any event of additional or
modified vegetation removal outside the scope of the project.
• Vegetation must not be removed with herbicides without the approval of the project
manager.
• The contractor shall use the appropriate type and minimum size of machine and
equipment to avoid and minimize damage to neighbouring plants.
• The Contractor shall ensure that machinery can only move within site boundaries,
auxiliary site facilities and other items that are maintained within designated areas.
• The contractor must obtain the necessary approvals to remove some plants.
• Contractor should preserve and protect the HCP plants
• Reimplantation of plants and trees should be performed according to a reimplantation •
The Contractor shall perform selective and careful tree pruning where possible to reduce
the need for tree removal.
• The contractor shall avoid working within the tree drip line to prevent damage to tree
roots and compaction of the topsoil.

• The contractor should not burn plants and residues will be disposed an approved landfill.
• The contractor should install informational signs with specific legends that constitute
system information to operators and site personnel regarding standards and behaviors
to prevent environmental impact on plants.
• The Contractor should be responsible for informing and training all employees of the
need to prevent any adverse effects on the natural vegetation on or around the
construction site as a result of their activities.
7.1.2 Air Quality

7.1.2.1 Construction phase
7.1.2.1.1 Dust elimination
To reduce dust impacts, the following measures will be put in place:
• Implementation of a regular watering and sprinkling dust suppression regime, during the
dry season.
• Stockpiles of dusty materials will be enclosed or covered by suitable shade cloth or
netting to prevent the escape of dust during loading and transfer from Site.
• No stockpiles will be maintained outside, and maximum Possible distance between the
stockpiles and receptors will be maintained.
• Covering and/or watering of all stockpiles of dusty materials such as excavated spoils to
avoid fugitive dust emissions.
• During construction, the approach road will be kept clean, free from mud and slurry;
• Material transport will be totally enclosed with impervious sheeting and wheel
washing will be carried out at site.
• Speed of vehicles on site and approach road will be limited to 15-20 km/hr which will help
in minimizing fugitive dust emission due to vehicle movement
• Idling of vehicles and equipment will be prevented and
• Waste from construction will not be burned.
• Concrete, sand and aggregates shall be stored as far from sensitive receptors as
possible and screened/shielded if they are located within 100m of sensitive receptor.
• The distance from receptors to dust emission sources (stockpiles etc) shall be
maximized, with consideration of prevailing wind direction.
• Dusty materials shall be removed from construction sites as soon as possible.
• Transport of contaminated soil (if any) shall also be carried out with tight fitting covered
trucks or closed containers.
• Loaded trucks to or from the work site area shall avoid heavily travelling through
residential roads in the localities around.
• Traffic management measures shall reduce congestion: Planning of driving construction
vehicles outside of the construction area during rush hour traffic.
• Implementation of a Dust Control Plan: The construction contractor shall draw up a Dust
Control Plan in accordance with Air National Standards. The construction contractor:
✓ Shall instigate effective dust suppression measures as may be necessary to avoid
creating dust nuisance arising as a result of the Works on site.
✓ Shall clearly identify proposed dust control measures intended to be implemented
in detail as a part of a general method statement to be issued.
✓ Shall ensure that all temporary construction shall be such that it will not allow the
infiltration of any biological or chemical pollutants into the works.
✓ The Dust Control Plan shall provide details of mitigation measures, specific location
and schedule where such measures will be implemented to minimize impacts to
sensitive receptors due to construction works, sourcing and transport of
construction materials, and other project-related activities.
✓ The construction contractor shall designate a person or several persons to monitor
the Dust Control Plan, with authority to order additional sprinkling when needed to
avoid dust problems around the construction site and on external roadways. This
monitoring includes weekends and holidays when there is no work on the
construction site.
✓ The Dust Control Plan Report shall have at least the following content:
1.DUST CONTROL PLAN
1.1. Purpose
1.2. Air Standards and other National Legislation. Acceptable

levels.
1.3. Time for completion
1.4. Quality assurance
1.5. Site working conditions
1.6. Local conditions
1.7. Material Support
2.SCOPE OF THE WORK
2.1. Measures to minimize dust and other emissions
2.2. Measures to monitor dust and other emissions
3.DELIVERABLES
Appendix: Monitoring Control Points.
The impact due to dust generation will have medium intensity with locally extent for a short- term
duration which will result in an overall minor impact without mitigation. However, with proper
implementation of suggested mitigation, the impact will be reduced to negligible.
7.1.2.1.2 Fugitive emission
Exhaust emissions will be minimized by following mitigation measures:
✓ The movement of construction vehicles will be minimized, and a 20 km/hr speed limit will
be enforced in the project site as well as approach road.
✓ Vehicles traveling on gravel roads will not exceed a speed of 30 km/hr; All diesel-
powered equipment will be regularly maintained, and idling time reduced to minimize
emissions;
✓ Low sulfur diesel (S<O.5%) will be used in diesel-powered equipment in collaboration with
best management practices.
✓ Vehicle/equipment air emissions will be controlled by good practice procedures (such as
turning off equipment when not in use);
✓ Vehicle/equipment exhausts observed emitting significant black smoke in their
exhausts will be serviced/ replaced; and
✓ Implementation of an Engine Emission Management Program: According to Mobile
Source Emissions Standard (The Executive Regulations for Air Quality NCEC-MEWA
2020), the owner or operator of a large site or facility (the construction contractor) must
develop an internal management program. Large sites are those that have 5 or more
engines, equipment and/or vehicles that have the potential to be operational at the same
time. This engine emission management program shall include the following:
• A list of all applicable engines
• Engine maintenance procedures
• Procedures to ensure best available environmental technology are used where
economically feasible
• Potential hazards and emergency response procedures.
• It is the responsibility of the site owner or his designated site manager to ensure
the implementation and maintenance of the engine emission management
program.
• All engine emission management program documentation shall be organized
carefully and made available to the Competent Agency when required.
• Failure to submit internal management program documentation to the Competent
Agency, within a 30-day period, will be deemed as a failure to comply with Mobile
Source Emissions Standard of the Executive Regulations for Air Quality NCEC-
MEWA 2020
• Solid waste burning in the project site is strictly prohibited
• The impact of exhaust emission will have high intensity with locally extent for a
short-term duration which will result in an overall minor impact without mitigation.
However, with proper implementation of suggested mitigation, the impact will be
reduced to negligible.
7.1.2.2 Operation phase
Solar Park operation have no emissions except few ones from the limited number of vehicles
serving operating personnel on the site. The main mitigation measures that should be
conducted in this phase are:
• Vehicles traveling on gravel roads should not exceed a speed of 30 km/hr.

• Regular water spray is required on unpaved road as the dust not move during heavy
wind.
• Use clean fuel in vehicle as the exhaust emission will be low.
The Implementation of these mitigation measure will lead to an overall negligible impact.
7.1.3 Noise and vibration
The following mitigation measures will be implemented to minimize potential noise impacts
during the construction phase in all periods:
• The contractor should ensure that all construction equipment and vehicle is fitted with
silencers (where possible).
• The contractor should consider the noise emission characteristics of equipment when
selecting equipment for the project and select the least noisy machine available to
perform the specific work (this is a requirement of OSHA 2007).
• The contractor should undertake additional post development noise monitoring in
accordance with National and International noise standards.
• Mobile noise sources such as cranes, earth moving equipment shall be routed in such a
way that there is minimum disturbance to receptors.
• Developer shall instruct their Safety Officers to arrange for inherently quiet construction
equipment and machines to maintain the noise level to minimum.
• Only limited construction activities shall be carried out during night-time.
• Restrict the night-time vehicle movement through the access road.
• Adopt the vehicle speed limit in the access road
• It is also to be ensured that no village road will be utilized for movement of
equipment except the designated access road.
• The number of equipment operating simultaneously should be reduced as far as
practicable.
• Equipment known to emit noise strongly in one direction should be orientated so that the
noise is directed away from nearby NSRs as far as practicable.
• All loud and sudden noises will be avoided wherever possible and fixed noise sources
shall be located at least 50m away from the site boundary.
• Rubber padding/noise isolators will be used for construction equipment
• Temporary noise barriers shall be provided surrounding the high noise generating
construction equipment.
• The personnel involved in high noise generating activities shall be provided with
personal protective devices to minimize their exposure to high noise levels.
• Construction vehicles and machinery will be well maintained and not kept idling when
not in use.
The impact of noise will have low intensity with locally extent for a short-term duration which will
result in an overall minor impact without mitigation. However, with proper implementation of
suggested mitigation, the impact will be reduced to negligible.
Operation of solar plant doesn’t lead to significant rise of noise levels in the surrounding
environment however some mitigation measures should be implemented:
• Periodic maintenance of machinery and vehicles used on the site.

• Inverters and transformers should be well maintained and provided by noise reduction
system. ( noise barriers, sound absorbing noise barriers ..)
• Periodic monitoring of noise near to the sources of generation, like transformers, to
ensure compliance with design specification;
with proper implementation of suggested mitigation measures, the overall impact will be very
negligible.
7.1.4 Odours
To reduce impacts from nuisance odours:
• sewage treatment/handling facilities and waste storage facilities will be operated

properly and monitored for operational performance, including nuisance odours.
• Project facilities will incorporate appropriate waste storage and handling procedures.
7.1.5 Surface water quality
The following measure will be implemented to mitigate the wastewater /oil spills leaks discharge:
• All permanent or temporary hazardous materials/fuel/chemical storage areas shall have

a roof and sealing barriers sufficient to contain 110% of the total volume stored, in the
event of a spill or leakage.
• A Spill Prevention Plan and Spill Response Plan will be created. The plan will identify
ways to prevent accidents, respond and address any contamination. Where relevant to
the applicable risks, this should be consistent with the Sites Emergency Preparedness
and Response Plan.
• Any spills or leaks will be cleaned up by spill kit, which are available at all on-site fuel,
hazardous materials and hazardous waste storage locations (eg spill kit). Other
absorbents/cleaning materials will be contained in an easily accessible and clearly
marked spill kit. Spill response training will be provided to site staff, and will be covered
in the Toolbox. All contaminated cleaning materials will be disposed of as hazardous
waste.
• Refueling of mobile equipment and fuel tanks (eg in unloading areas) will only take place
in designated areas following specified refueling procedures, and not at worksites to
reduce potential spills.
• Implement good management practices during construction activities including
procedures and requirements for proper handling, storage and transportation of
hazardous materials and waste.
• If contaminated soil is observed during construction activity, the identified contaminated
soil should be separately excavated, stored, handled and disposed of according to the
waste management plan, to avoid cross-contamination situations. Collected waste or
contaminated drilling material will be disposed of through licensed waste contractors at
licensed facilities.
• Washing of equipment, machinery and vehicles will only be permitted in designated
areas, with impermeable surfaces and dedicated drainage systems leading to separate
treatment facilities and/or lined evaporation ponds. Use of evaporation ponds will require
removal of sludge residues as hazardous solid waste by a licensed waste contractor.
• All hazardous materials or waste that are temporarily used or stored outside their
designated storage areas must be kept in well-equipped, leak-tight containers with drip
protection to avoid leakage on the floor.
• Where possible, the quantity of chemicals and fuels stored on site will be kept to a
minimum practicable level. Infrequently used chemicals should be ordered in appropriate
quantities only when needed.
• Adequate drainage systems will be provided to reduce and control erosion/erosion.
Sediment traps (ie filter cloth) will be installed at designated runoff points. Where
possible, road slope (perimeter and slopes) will be reduced in order to reduce
erosion/erosion caused by runoff. Regular inspection of sedimentation/erosion controls
will be conducted to prevent flooding/pooling.
• The excavated materials will be kept in stocks for the shortest possible time.
• No hazardous materials will be stored.
• Training related to the management, transport and handling of hazardous materials and
waste will be provided - as per established procedures to direct the on-site management
of such activities.
• Implementation of sustainable urban drainage.
• Introduction of flows to conserve natural hydrology and surface water resources
downstream.
• Protect bulk surface materials from corrosion
• All drainage systems will be disconnected and directed to a confined basin.

• Spills and cleaning supplies will be well located and visible in key areas of the site. Larger
spill cleanup and control tools should be provided in the event of large spills.
• Effective waste management controls will be implemented through the site's waste
management plan. The waste management plan will include measures to reduce the
incidence of soil and groundwater contamination.
• Hazardous and non-hazardous waste storage areas will be well constructed with
impermeable soil barrier protection, separate drainage system and rain shelter to avoid
any possible case of runoff, or runoff intrusion.
• Water points at the construction site for the use of bottled water.
• Reducing the use of fresh water to quench dust.
• Collection and treatment of gray water for car washes and dust suppression.
• Periodic maintenance of the rainwater drainage system must be carried out to avoid
blockages, sedimentation and the risk of flooding resulting from water collection.
7.1.6 Groundwater quality

The following measure will be implemented to mitigate the ground water by leaks and spills
during construction and operation phases:
• Fuel, lubricating oil, and used oil storage areas will be contained in the bounded area.
• Spill containment and clean up kits will be available onsite and clean-up from any spill
will be appropriately contained and disposed of.
• Construction vehicles and equipment will be serviced regularly
• The Contractor will prepare guidelines and procedures for immediate clean-up actions
following any spillages of oil, fuel or chemicals.
• Surface run-off from bunded areas will pass through oil/water separators prior to
discharge to the stormwater system.
• A site-specific Emergency Response Plan will be prepared by the contractor for soil
clean-up and decontamination.
• Any loading and unloading protocols should be prepared for diesel, oil and used oil
respectively.
• The construction contractor will implement a training program to familiarize staff with
emergency procedures and practices related to contamination events.
Impact significance will be assessed as negligible after implementation of the mitigation
measures.
7.1.7 Hydrology and flood risk control
To reduce the potential for disturbance of existing hydrographic network and potential erosion
of drainage channels during construction and operation the following mitigation measures
should be implemented:
• The EPC contractor will be instructed to avoid any unnecessary changes in the
topography.
• Keep all natural channels to the extent possible at their original state.
• routes will be selected to avoid ephemeral drainage channels where possible.
• Design structures should consider the natural functioning of the of drainage channels.
• Culverts or other drainage control features will be installed where crossings of drainage
routes are unavoidable. The actual size and location of culverts will be dependent on the
specifics of the hydrology at the Project. The Project drainage system will ensure that
runoff rates from the site remains at or less than current conditions.
• Hydrology study with the structures in place should help to take more vigilance and
protective measures.
Mitigation works to reduce/minimize impacts for flood risk include:
• Surface water will be controlled with appropriate drainage and bunded areas as
appropriate.
• Infrastructure that is most vulnerable to flooding, is located in areas of lowest flood risk
(i.e., areas of solar PV panels to be located outside of the main flood risk corridors).
• Construction and access roads have, as so far as possible, been routed outside of areas
of highest flood risk (noting that at some locations roads will need to cross high flood risk
corridors).
The impact on the hydrology and risk flood will have medium intensity with locally extent for a
long duration which will result in an overall minor to medium impact without mitigation. However,
with proper implementation of suggested mitigation the impact will be reduced to negligible.
7.1.8 Soil quality

The following mitigation measures will be taken to mitigate soil contamination.
7.1.8.1.1 Leaks and spills
The following measure will be implemented to mitigate the Soil contamination by leaks and
spills.
• Fuel, lubricating oil, and used oil storage areas will be contained in the bounded area.
• Sewage generated from the project site will be treated and disposed of through septic
tank and soak pits;
• Spill containment and clean up kits will be available onsite and clean-up from any spill
will be appropriately contained and disposed of.
• Construction vehicles and equipment will be serviced regularly
• The Contractor will prepare guidelines and procedures for immediate clean-up actions
following any spillages of oil, fuel or chemicals;
• Surface run-off from bunded areas will pass through oil/water separators prior to
discharge to the stormwater system;
• A site-specific Emergency Response Plan will be prepared by the contractor for soil
clean-up and decontamination.
• Any loading and unloading protocols should be prepared for diesel, oil and used oil
respectively; and
• The construction contractor will implement a training program to familiarize staff with
emergency procedures and practices related to contamination events
7.1.8.1.2 Soil contamination by generated waste
The following measure will be implemented to mitigate/avoid soil contamination by waste

generation:
• The construction contractors will have control over the amount and types of waste
(hazardous and non- hazardous) produced at the site. Workers will be strictly instructed
about random disposal of any waste generated from the construction activity.
• Construction contractor should ensure that no unauthorized dumping of used oil and
other hazardous wastes is undertaken from the site;
• Municipal domestic waste generated at site to be segregated onsite;
• Ensure hazardous waste containers are properly labelled and stored onsite provided
with an impervious surface, shed and secondary containment system.
• Ensure routinely disposal of hazardous waste through approved vendors and records
are properly documented.
• Construction contractor should ensure daily collection and periodic (weekly) disposal of
construction waste generated debris, concrete, metal cuttings waste, waste/used oil etc.;
• Ensure hazardous waste is properly labeled, stored onsite at a location provided with
impervious surface, shed and secondary containment system and;
• The municipal waste from the labor camp will only be routed through proper collection
and handover to the local municipal body for further disposal. The hazardous wastes will
be temporarily stored in labeled drums on the impervious surface at designated area
onsite and will be disposed of through approved vendors.
The impact on soil contamination due to waste generation, spills and leaks will have a medium
intensity within the project site for a short duration which will result in an overall minor impact
without mitigation. However, with proper implementation of suggested mitigation measures, the
overall impact will be negligible.
The potential for soils contamination associated with waste disposal will be reduced through the
reduction of wastes to the extent possible whilst maximizing the re-use and recycling of
materials where possible. All waste and garbage will be collected, segregated and stored before
disposal in at a location agreed by the NCEC or any environmental competent body.
Mitigation measures associated with maintenance and use of oils and other chemicals include:
• Establish a designated storage area with an impervious base and impermeable bund
walls and protected from precipitation.
• Store all fuel, oil and chemical storage in the designated secure area.
• Check hoses and valves regularly for signs of wear and ensure that they are turned off
and securely locked when not in use.
• Place diesel pumps and similar on drip trays to collect minor spillages. Check trays
regularly and remove any accumulated oil.
7.1.9 Terrestrial biodiversity

The following identifies the additional studies and mitigation measures to be applied by the EPC
Contractor during the construction phase and which include:
• As part of the Project fencing should be erected. It must be ensured that it allows for the
natural movement of small faunal species within the area. This could include for example
a fence with an appropriate gap between the ground level and the first rail or strand
(around 30 cm).
• One major modification that could take place at the project site is the removal of the.
trees. The trees are believed to be of significance for the biodiversity elements at the
Project Site especially the birds. Therefore, the minimum number of trees should be
removed from the project site in order to achieve the minimal impact possible on the
biodiversity at the Project Site. The trees removed should be replaced by other trees to
be planted in the vicinity of the project site in order to act as an offset for the removed
trees and as a new refuge for the species affected.
• Implement proper management measures to prevent damage to the biodiversity of the
site. This could include establishing a proper code of conduct and awareness
raising/training of personnel and good housekeeping which include the following:
• Prohibit hunting at any time and under any condition by construction workers onsite.
• Ensure proper storage, collection, and disposal of waste streams generated.
• Restrict activities to allocated construction areas only, including movement of workers
and vehicles to allocated roads within the site and prohibit off‐roading to minimize
disturbances.
• Avoid unnecessary elevated noise levels at all times. In addition, apply adequate general
noise suppressing measures.
• Machinery and vehicles will be cleaned upon entry/exit, and any soil brought on or off
site screened for invasive species or plant pathogens.
• Disturbed areas will be rehabilitated at the earliest opportunity with native and endemic
species to minimize the establishment of invasive plant species;
• Source areas such as vehicle parking and construction lay down areas will be kept clean
of invasive plants to minimize the presence of seeds that can be dispersed
unintentionally;
• Prohibit the use of pesticides or herbicides on site; and
• Regular and ongoing monitoring of the presence of invasive plant species will be
conducted within construction and rehabilitated sites and removal operations
implemented according to the results
Following the implementation of these mitigation measures, the significance of the residual
impact is categorized as negligible significant.
As per monitoring and reporting requirements during construction phase the EPC Contractor
should inspect the works at all times.
The following identifies the mitigation measures to be applied by the Project Operator during the
operation phase and which include:
• Implement proper management measures to prevent damage to the biodiversity of the
site. This could include establishing a proper code of conduct and awareness
raising/training of personnel and good housekeeping which include the following:
• Prohibit hunting at any time and under any condition by workers onsite.
• Ensure proper storage, collection, and disposal of waste streams.
• Restrict activities to allocated areas only, including movement of workers and vehicles
to allocated roads within the site and prohibit off-roading to minimize disturbances.
Following the implementation of these mitigation measures, the significance of the residual
impact is categorized as negligible.
As per monitoring and reporting requirements during operation phase the Project Operator
should inspect the works at all times.
7.1.10 Community Health and Safety (occupational and public)
Following measures will be taken to minimize the health impact during construction phase:
• The workers (both regular and contractual) on the project will be provided with training
on the Health and Safety policy in place, and their role in the site and refresher courses
will be provided throughout the life of the project.
• Establish a grievance redressal mechanism in place, to allow for the employees and
workers to report any concern or grievance related to work activities.
• Operation of loading-unloading equipment should be undertaken under the
guidance/supervision of trained professional.
• The contractor should ensure that no person is engaged in driving or operating
construction machinery unless he is sufficiently competent and reliable, possess the
knowledge of risks involved in the operation and is medically examined periodically.
• Contractor should prepare a site Emergency Preparedness and Response Procedure,
which should be followed for the subjected project.
• Adequate training should be provided to staff about raising awareness about use of
Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and emergency response measures;
• Job responsibility and shifting chart should be prepared so that no person shall be
over exhausted, which will ultimately lead to the accident or injuries;
• Safety sign should also be marked at appropriate places.
• It shall also be ensured that good housekeeping at the construction site is maintained to
avoid slips and falls.
• Excessive waste debris and liquid spills will be cleaned up regularly, while electrical
cords and ropes will be placed along identified corridors marked for the attention of
everyone at the site.
• Use of personal fall arrest system, such as full body harnesses as well as fall rescue
procedures to deal with workers whose fall has been successfully arrested shall also be
carried out.
• Dropping/lowering of construction material or tool will be restricted and undertaken only
under strict supervision if required. PPEs such as safety glasses with side shields, face
shields, hard hats and safety shoes shall be mandatory at a construction site. Earplugs
shall be provided for workers placed in high noise areas.
The health and safety impact will have high intensity with a local spread for a long duration which
will result in an overall medium-low impact without mitigation. However, with proper
implementation of suggested mitigation measures, the overall impact significance after will be
negligeable to minor.
The following mitigation measures will be taken to minimize the health impact during operation
phase:
• Workers handling electricity and related components will be provided with shock
resistant gloves, shoes and other protective gears.
• Adequate training regarding health and safety will be provided to the workers.
• A health, safety, and environment (HSE) management system will be developed,
rolled out and implemented. This system which will be reviewed annually or after a major
accident or incident
• The switchyard building will be provided with fire extinguishers and sand buckets at all
strategic locations to deal with any incident of fire.
• Safety incidents will be recorded and monitored with an aim that numbers are never
significant, and gradually reduce.
• Workers at site handling broken solar panels shall be provided with adequate PPEs
(safety gear, goggles, and gloves).
• The workers at the site are also on regular basis shall be appraised about the potential
health risks associated with the handling of solar panels.
• Ensure use of safety belt and need for safety net as required;
• All work at height to be undertaken during daytime with sufficient sunlight except
emergency (with proper illumination arrangement);
• Fixtures shall be installed on tower components to facilitate the use of fall protection
systems;
• Only workers trained in climbing techniques and use of fall protection measures;
inspection, maintenance, and replacement of fall protection equipment shall be
engaged for work at height;
• Workers handling electricity and related components will be provided with shock
resistant gloves, shoes and other protective gears. Adequate training regarding health
and safety will be provided to the workers;
• Access to areas containing exposed electrical equipment (such as transformers) shall
be fenced and locked. Warning signs shall be posted at hazardous locations;
• Firefighting equipment such as fire extinguishers and sand buckets shall be provided
at appropriate locations;
• Workers involved in electric operations shall be provided with Protective Equipment
such as rubber gloves etc;
• Employees involved in electrical works shall be trained in and familiar with the safety-
related work practices, safety procedures, and other safety requirements that pertain
to their respective job assignments.
• First aid box/ arrangement to be ensured
The impact on health and safety from the operation of the project will have medium intensity with
locally extent for a long duration which will result in an overall medium-low impact without
mitigation. However, with proper implementation of suggested mitigation measures, the overall
impact will be minor.
7.1.11 Landscape and Visual Comfort
The best form of mitigation for landscape and visual impacts arising from construction is related
to conservation of soils. Measures include:
• Limiting soil damage by keeping the construction areas and roads to a minimum
• and maintaining strict requirements for vehicles to always remain on the roads.
• Reinstating soils where construction areas and roads are no longer required. This would
reduce the duration of the visual impact.
Mitigation to reduce the adverse impact resulting from litter and garbage (plastic bags,
bottles etc.) include:
• Provision of adequate facilities for the disposal of garbage.

• Training of the workforce in waste management.
• Reduce the amount of waste to the maximum extent possible.
• Collect all solid waste and store until transported to an appropriate waste disposal facility
and disposed.
• Organization of clean-ups for existing garbage.
The construction schedule will be developed considering key sensitive features within the
landscape, rock outcrops and camps nearby. As far as is practicable, the schedule will take into
consideration any sensitive events to ensure work is not planned in close proximity to receptors
at any sensitive times to reduce visual disturbance.
• The solar panels will be installed at a low height and will be kept closer to the ground so
that it does not prop out of the general landscape of the area.
• The panels will be arranged in a systematic manner which will give an aesthetic sense to
it.
• The proposed solar PV power project would include a boundary wall around the perimeter
of the project to further obscure the peripheral view of the project and any indirect
reflection. Impacts from glare would be minor.
• All cables and power lines will be located underground as far as possible.
• The substation, gatehouses and maintenance and storage buildings will be grouped as
far as possible to avoid the scatter of buildings in the open landscape.
• The design of the buildings will be compatible in scale and form with the building style of
the region.
• All yards and storage areas to be enclosed by masonry walls or screens.
• The colour of the solar array and structures, such as the supports and the rear of the
panels, will be carefully selected, and to be in the light grey or white colors, to minimize
visibility and avoid reflectivity.
• External lighting will be confined to the substations and maintenance areas. Lights will be
low-level and fitted with reflectors to avoid light spillage.
• Signages related to the enterprise are to be discrete and confined to the entrance gates.
No other corporate or advertising signage, particularly billboards or flags, to be permitted.
• All lighting will be kept to a minimum within the requirements of safety and efficiency.
• Where such lighting is deemed necessary, low-level lighting, which is shielded to reduce
light spillage and pollution, will be used.
• No naked light sources will be directly visible from a distance. Only reflected light will be
visible from outside the Site.
• External lighting will use down-lighters shielded in such a way as to minimize light
spillage and pollution beyond the extent of the area that needs to be lit.
• Security and perimeter lighting will also be shielded so that no light falls outside the area
needing to be lit. Unnecessarily tall light poles are to be avoided.
• Warning signs at appropriate distances indicating solar power plant location should be
placed to alert road users.
The visual impact will have medium intensity with a local spread for a long duration which will
result in an overall Medium Low impact without mitigation. However, with proper implementation
of suggested mitigation measures, the overall impact will be negligible.
7.1.12 Land Use
The actual area of land use impact would be limited to some grazing lands in immediate vicinity
of the solar plant. The overall impact on land use is considered negligible, however the following
mitigation measures should be implemented:
• the After-construction work, any land taken for a temporary basis for storage of material
will be restored to their original form.
• Any existing useful road will be widened and developed for access to the project site
with the exception of a small connection from road 80 Tabuk - Duba to the plant site.
• Construction activities should be restricted to designated area.
• The land use in and around permanent project facilities should not be disturbed.
• The construction activities will be restricted within the boundary of the proposed plant
and will not alter the land use of the adjacent areas.
• Proponent should take tree plantation program whereas possible in the plant boundary
or along the access roadside.
• Waste should not be allowed to litter in and around the project area.
• On completion of construction activities, land used for temporary facilities will be restored
to the extent possible.
• The land should be restored back to the original state to the extent possible after
completion of the life cycle of the project and in case there are plans not to continue
further at the site.
The impact on land use will have a high intensity within the project site for a permanent duration
which will result in an overall minor impact without mitigation. with proper implementation of
suggested mitigation measures, the overall impact will be negligible.
7.1.13 Waste Generation

The following measure will be implemented to mitigate/avoid soil contamination by waste

generation:
• The construction contractors will have control over the amount and types of waste
(hazardous and non- hazardous) produced at the site. Workers will be strictly instructed
about random disposal of any waste generated from the construction activity.
• Construction contractor should ensure that no unauthorized dumping of used oil and
other hazardous wastes is undertaken from the site;
• Municipal domestic waste generated at site to be segregated onsite;
• Ensure hazardous waste containers are properly labelled and stored onsite provided
with an impervious surface, shed and secondary containment system.
• Ensure routinely disposal of hazardous waste through approved vendors and records
are properly documented.
• Construction contractor should ensure daily collection and periodic (weekly) disposal of
construction waste generated debris, concrete, metal cuttings waste, waste/used oil etc.;
• Ensure hazardous waste is properly labeled, stored onsite at a location provided with
impervious surface, shed and secondary containment system and;
• The municipal waste from the labor camp will only be routed through proper collection
and handover to the local municipal body for further disposal. The hazardous wastes will
be temporarily stored in labeled drums on the impervious surface at designated area
onsite and will be disposed of through approved vendors.
The impact on soil contamination due to waste generation, spills and leaks will have a medium
intensity within the project site for a short duration which will result in an overall minor impact
without mitigation. However, with proper implementation of suggested mitigation measures, the
overall impact will be negligible.
• The separate designated area should be earmarked for storage of hazardous waste like
waste oil, transformer oil. These wastes shall be given to NCEC /MEWA approved
recyclers.
• Operation waste management will be governed by an Environmental Management Plan
(EMP) and will incorporate reduction, recycling, and reuse principles.
• Material Safety Data Sheets for all applicable materials present on Site will be readily
available to on-site personnel.
• All wastes produced from project activities on site will be transferred to designated
temporary storage areas and where possible into secure containers.
• Solid wastes will be segregated to facilitate reuse and recycling of specific materials.
• All wastes that cannot be reused or recycled will be collected by approved waste
contractors and transferred to an appropriately licensed waste management facility for
treatment and disposal.
• First of all, inspection of PV modules for defects that can appear in the form of burn
marks, discoloration, or broken glass is to be undertaken. An authorized person will walk
the site to confirm that there are no broken modules (shattered glass) and broken
modules should not be sprayed with water.
• Broken or damaged solar panels are required to be immediately shifted to a designated
area in a scrap yard to avoid any type of land contamination. A photograph is to be taken
of the broken panel at the site to cater to Insurance settlement claims.
• Once the PV panels have reached the end of their life cycle, the manufacturer of the PV
panels will collect and recycle the PV panels and recover any hazardous substances in
the PV modules. This provision forms part of the supply agreement between the
proponent and the selected PV panel manufacturer.
• Use the soak pit and septic tank in the office building and guard room for sewage.
The impact of waste and effluent from the operation of the project will have medium intensity with
locally extent for a long duration which will result in an overall medium-low impact without
mitigation. However, with proper implementation of suggested mitigation measures, the overall
impact will be minor to negligeable.
7.1.14 Climate and Climate Change
Periods of dry weather and high winds could damage Project infrastructure. It is envisaged that
insurance would cover these extreme weather events thereby reducing moderate to high
impacts to low. In addition, the potential for dust to be blown onto to solar PVs is higher and
may require an increasing effort in cleaning the equipment. The Project is expected to employ
advanced technologies that provide for dry cleaning methods.
A rise in air temperatures and irregular rainfall events could impact on water availability.
During construction (and also operation, as applicable), water conservation measures will be
implemented where it is found to be feasible including recycling of water where possible (for
example, use of grey water for dust-dampening measures as required). This will be investigated
by the EPC Contractor.
7.1.15 Economic and Social Aspects
7.1.15.2 mitigation measures for community health and safety
In both phase construction and operation, mitigation measures that will be implemented during
the construction phase to attenuate impact on community health and safety are:
a) For traffic (especially in construction phase)

• The truck drivers carrying construction machinery and materials will be instructed to drive
within speed limits with careful consideration for villages traffic in vicinity.
• Movement of heavy equipment and construction materials will be regulated during peak
hours (09:00 AM to 06:00 PM).
• Proper route of movement of project vehicles will be identified.
• Depute traffic escorts as and when required near project site and major settlements to
guide movement of project vehicles.
• Keep limited speed of project vehicles near settlements and within the project site.
• Provide necessary training to the drivers for speed restrictions and on do’s and don’ts.
b) For waste management and disposal
• The excavated areas will be properly fenced for safety and sign boards in local
languages will be put up;
• No hazardous waste or any waste be stored within the site for long periods of time and
be in contact with the soil.
• The quantity of domestic waste generated daily from the labor camps will be small and
limited as most of the workers will be hired locally. However, the construction contractor
shall ensure that the camp sites provided at the site have adequate waste disposal
facilities. Arrangements for collection of garbage in dustbins and daily disposal to the
nearest dump site shall be made. Provision of toilets for workers shall be made at the
campsites in order to maintain hygienic and clean surroundings.
• Effort should be made to use the locally available labor for unskilled work purpose.
• Construction contractor will be followed the 3R policy to manage the solid waste
management.
• Nearby municipality may also be contracted for regular disposal of the labor camp waste.
• Washing and bathing areas will be provided with a proper drainage system so that
wastewater is not accumulated in the campsites. Disposal of sewage shall be made
through a septic tank – soak pit arrangement.
• Used or waste oil generated from generators and construction machinery and equipment
will be stored on a paved surface in a secure location at the project site. Appropriate
secondary containment capable of containing the 110 percent of the largest tank is to be
provided.
• The waste oil, which is characterized as hazardous will be sold to authorized vendors at
frequent intervals.
• Empty fuel containers will also be stored at a secured area designated for scrap and
sold to authorized vendors. All packaging material will also be collected at the storage
area and sold to scrap dealers.
• Construction debris and excavated material will be stored in a confined area to prevent
spread by wind or water.
• The construction debris will be used for backfilling of excavated areas and for foundation
works at site.
The overall impact on community health and safety with the implementation of suggested
mitigation measures, will be negligible.
7.1.15.3 Employment opportunities measures
The project is recommended to have the following mitigation measures in place:
• The local community is preferred by the project for the requirement of skilled, semiskilled
and unskilled workers to the extent possible.
• The sourcing of local labor wherever possible should be made obligatory for the sub-
contractors and in all major procurement activities.
• Preference should be given to the vulnerable population.
• The EPC Contractor and NEOM/MEWA will establish a mechanism to audit
subcontractors and suppliers with respect to compliance of utilizing local labour and
resources.
7.1.15.4 Mitigations measures for impacts from migrant workers
Potential impacts period include impact due to the influx of migrants and associated health
related risk to the community. These impacts are expected to be low and with the
implementation of the following mitigation measures the potential impact due influx of migrant
workers will be further minimized.
• Engage as many locally available unskilled, semi-skilled and skilled human resources
as practically possible to avoid large scale in migration of labour force.
• Provision of infrastructure and amenities for migrant labour in construction camp to avoid
dependence on limited local resources.
• Adequate sanitation facility at labour camps to maintain hygiene and minimize spread
of diseases.
• Creating awareness about local tradition and culture among outside migrant and
encouraging respect for same.
• Providing awareness training regarding infectious diseases among the migrant
population.
• Proper disposal of wastes generated from the camp and construction activity to maintain
general hygiene in the area.
• Avoid unnecessary movement of vehicles through n e a r settlement areas to avoid
disturbance and traffic safety related issues.
The impact due to influx of migrant worker will have medium intensity with a local spread for a
short duration which will result in an overall low impact without mitigation. However, with proper
implementation of suggested mitigation measures the overall impact will be negligible.
7.1.15.5 Traffic and transport

The following mitigation measures will be taken to mitigate the traffic and transportation impact:
• The contractor should ensure that all PV module and mounting structure components
are transported in appropriate vehicles that adhere to the axle load limits.
• Only trained drivers with valid license shall be recruited by the construction contractor.
• Training programs shall be conducted at regular intervals for all the drivers for raising
awareness about road safety and adopting best transport and traffic safety procedures
once in every month.
• Additionally, speed limits for all construction related vehicles shall be adhered to
at all times to prevent damage to roads and other infrastructure
• Mitigation measures such as emphasizing on safety amongst drivers, adopting limits for
the trip duration and arranging driver roster to avoid overtiredness and avoiding
dangerous routes and times of day to reduce the risk of the accident shall also be
implemented.
• High visibility colors should be used during the transportation of PV panels to the project
site.
• Regular maintenance of vehicles and use of manufacturer approved parts should be
adopted to minimize potentially serious accidents caused by equipment malfunction or
premature failure.
• The villagers will be made aware of the schedule prior to the movement of trucks and
transportation of power plant equipment in the project area.
• Collaboration with local communities and responsible authorities to improve signage,
visibility, and awareness of traffic and pedestrian safety.
• Notify the governing body and local area responsible person prior to start the construction
work and put adequate signage around the construction area on both way and instruct the
driver for carefully driving in close to the sensitive area;
• Coordination with emergency responders to ensure that appropriate first aid is provided
in the event of accidents.
• The existing earthen road should keep functional as the local people can use the road;
• Movement of the project traffic should be limited to the planned route only and;
The traffic movement in the settlement areas should be limited for the daytime only
The impact due to traffic and transport will have medium intensity with a local extent for a short
duration which will result in an overall minor to negligible impact without mitigation. However,
with proper implementation of suggested mitigation, the impact will be reduced to negligible.
During operation, if abnormal loads are required for maintenance, the appropriate arrangements
will be made to obtain the necessary transportation permits and the route agreed with the
relevant authorities to minimize the impact of other road users.
Unnecessary travels outside the plant should be avoided at the extent possible. The impact
significance is assessed as negligible.
7.1.16 Decommissioning
Decommissioning will require removal of machinery, workers, and other structures. The
mitigation measures for decommissioning shall include:
• Decommissioning contractor shall inform workers and local communities about the
duration of work;
• Dismantling activities will take care of experienced professionals under the guidance of
plant Environmental and safety Manager.
• All the dismantled infrastructures and debris shall be segregated and stored separately
with cover facility to negotiate with contamination effects of such wastes;
• The metal structure will be sold out to the approved recyclers, whereas, debris will be
disposed-off as per their characteristics.
• The workers shall be clearly informed about the expected schedule and completion of
each activity;
• All waste generated from decommissioning phase shall be collected and disposed of at
the nearest identified disposal site;
• All necessary Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) shall be used by the workers during
demolition work;
• Solar Panels as utilized for the project even after 30 years will have the 70 – 80% power
generation capacity. Due to technology improvement, after 30 years recycling or
reutilisation of these panels are very much likely;
• During decommissioning phase proponent should follow mitigation measures for air,
noise, solid & liquid waste and Occupational health and safety depicted in previous
sections.
• Water sprinkling would be the regular practice to reduce the dust generation from the
plant decommissioning activities.
• Disposal panels will be disposed of off to authorized vendor through buyback
agreements.
• It is to be ensured that dismantling is carried out during the non-monsoon season and
all the drainage channels will keep intact by creating bunds around them. and
• Project owner will be committed to ensuring that all health and safety measures are in
place to prevent accidents and reduce the consequences of non-conformance events.
Impact value for decommissioning is assessed to be medium-low without mitigation and low
with preventive measures.
7.1.17 Unplanned events
7.1.17.1 Construction
The following are risk reduction design and construction mitigation measures:
➢ Constructability risk is one of the main criteria evaluated during site selection. This
included:
• extensive routes refinements that were made to reduce front and side slopes to
ensure safe access for construction activities
• safe access to work sites to reduce the risk of accidents during transport of
materials, equipment or people to the works sites
• construction methodologies that were evaluated to identify the options with lower
risks. This included considering the number of construction spreads to be used,
and options to reduce road traffic during construction.
• Necessary measures have to be taken to avoid any kind of chemical/oil spill and
leakage.
➢ Additional constructability reviews will be undertaken for construction facilities which will
include the development of CEMPs, and risk assessments, method statements (RAMS)
for construction. The intention of these documents is to ensure that appropriate
mitigation measures are identified and implemented throughout construction.
7.1.17.2 Operation
Substantial work to identify operational hazards and unplanned events should be undertaken
during the early design stages of the project. This included route and site selection during the
geological, geophysical and geotechnical assessment of the route. This was undertaken to
avoid or reduce the risks of unplanned events occurring during the operational phase. This
included avoidance of, as much as possible:
• socially sensitive features (including residential populations)
• environmentally sensitive areas
• flooding and landslide hazards
• seismic activity (such as active rift regions and volcanoes)
• security risks.
7.1.18 Archaeology and Cultural Heritage
• An archaeological ‘Chance Find Procedure’ will be developed prior to construction and

the start of site earthworks, as part of / or alongside the CESMP. This will include
protocols and procedures to stop work and methods to preserve potential finds, as well
as reporting requirements and co-ordination with the Ministry of Tourism.
• Where artefacts or archaeological remains are encountered, the site will be clearly
signed/delineated with high visibility flagging to impede access and prevent any damage
or loss of the artefacts which have been found.
• All direction concerning the management of potential archaeological finds must only be
taken from the Ministry of Tourism.
• The EPC Contractor will receive training about the Chance Finds Procedure and key
processes to follow concerning any suspected archaeological finds to avoid disturbance.
• The removal of any archaeological artefacts from the site is strictly prohibited.
• Construction project activities will comply with NEOM requirements as per NEOM’s
procedure for Archaeology and Heritage Management (NEOM-NEV-PRC-703).
No operational impacts to cultural heritage and archaeology are expected.
7.1.19 Climate Impacts
The Project itself will reduce climate impacts by helping KSA shift its energy mix toward a more
sustainable future. Mitigation measures for the construction and operation phase are provided
below.
7.1.19.1 Construction
The EPC Contractor will operate in such a way to minimise resource use (fuel, water etc.). This
will both reduce resource consumption and also related emissions.
7.1.19.2 Operation
The Project will implement appropriate flood risk mitigation (i.e., installation of culverts on access
roads and support of wadi channels) in order to reduce potential impacts arising from more
frequent, higher intensity rainfall events which are anticipated due to climate change.
7.1.20 Ecosystem Services
• There will be no encroachment to land outside of the Project footprints, or defined

laydown areas, site access road, or designated construction access road.
• All vehicles and equipment to be restricted to movements within the project boundaries
and designated site access roads.
• A third-party grievance mechanism will be clearly established and communicated.
• A pre-construction survey will be conducted to identify trees that need to be transplanted.
This will be done with reference to the NEOM Native Tree Transplanting Guidelines
(2021).
• Where possible, shrubs will be left in place and/or allowed to re-establish.
• The wadi channels will be undisturbed except for flood risk mitigation design.
• The wadi channels will be undisturbed except for flood risk mitigation design.
• Ensure drainage is sufficient to deal with increases in stormwater.
• Operations and maintenance team to ensure effective monitoring after any storm or
extreme weather event to check for any damage or blockages of drainage infrastructure
7.1.21 Human rights
Implementation of mitigation measures may avoid negative impacts of the project on workers
and external communities. Among the proposed recommendations are:
• Implementation of HR Policy & Procedures.

• Prohibition of child labour and forced labour.
• PEC to ensure foreign workers are not discriminated during the recruitment process as
well as in the workplace.
• PEC to establish and develop policies of gender equality; and
• PEC should continuously monitor the workplace area, admin building or the processing
area, and workers accommodations are safe by conducting audits and inspections.
7.2 Environmental Monitoring Plan
The following tables outline the monitoring requirements related to the construction and
operation of the Project for the topics assessed in the Chapter 6. The EPC Contractor and the
O&M Company will be responsible for undertaking and reporting on the required monitoring
during construction and operation respectively. An Environmental Monitoring Plan for
construction and operation of the Project will be developed by the EPC Contractor and O&M
Company respectively, which will detail the monitoring methodologies and specific detail on
location, frequencies, duration, monitoring parameters etc.
Table 7-1: Environmental Monitoring Plan
Parameter Source of monitoring

Indicator Project phase Frequency and duration Monitoring location
monitored Information responsibility
Air Quality
Visual observation for dust
emissions and track out on
nearby public road (Highway
80) to be undertaken on a
daily basis during dust EPC
Access roads, construction sites Environmental
Dust Generation construction PM2.5 and PM10 generating activities by use contractor /HSE
and temporary facilities areas. Management Plan
of checklist. Manager
To be monitored
quantitatively if generation is
considered to be excessive
or complaints are received.
Pre-site authorisation checks Environmental EPC
on vehicle status and health, Management Plan contractor /HSE
including associated Manager
emissions. Visual
assessment of emissions
Emissions from
construction Vehicle Emissions (e.g. black smoke) to be All non-road vehicles and engines
engines and plant.
undertaken on a daily basis
while vehicles and
equipment are in use and
annual inspection of
vehicles.
Daily visual and olfactory Environmental EPC
All sanitary facilities available
Sanitary Facilities observations – as part of Management Plan contractor /HSE
within the laydown areas, sub-
& Hazardous maintenance and inspection Manager
construction Odour & VOCs contractor camps and work fields.
Material Storage checks (for hygiene, safety
All hazardous material, chemical
Areas and appropriate
and fuel storage areas.
storage/containment).
Noise and Vibration
30 minutes in case of any Environmental EPC
Day time noise construction Leq (A) complaints received from Site boundaries, Fuel Station, Management Plan contractor /HSE
affected parties. Manager

31 minutes in case of any Environmental EPC
Night-time noise construction Leq (A) complaints received from Site boundaries, Fuel Station, Management Plan contractor /HSE
affected parties. Manager
Soils
Visible spills & leaks All construction areas, chemical Environmental N/A
of hydrocarbons and and waste storage areas, Management Plan
other potentially Daily visual observations as temporary construction areas,
construction
hazardous or part of a checklist associated facility construction
chemical pollution and along the access roads
sources during construction.
Soil Quality
Visible spills & leaks Environmental N/A
of hydrocarbons and Management Plan
other potentially Daily visual observations as Chemicals, hazardous materials
operation
hazardous or part of a checklist and waste storage areas.
chemical pollution
sources
Hydrology, Surface Water and Flood Risk
Specific monitoring requirements related to hydrology and flood risk are not proposed, however, it will be necessary to take action in response to any realised flooding during
both construction and operation. This would include determination of the cause of flooding and contributing factors that can be controlled. Actions related to contributing
factors would then then be taken to limit future risk.
Terrestrial Ecology
Plant relocation plan N/A
Trees according to
Trees for
Preconstruction NEOM Native Tree Once before construction Site-wide
Transplanting
Transplanting (2021)
Success of tree Plant relocation plan N/A

Tree Transplanting construction transplanting, tree Every six (6) months At tree transplanting locations
health.
Any evidence of Fauna protection and N/A
mortality will be Any mortalities will be relocation plan
PV Site Bird
recorded in the recorded during site
Mortality Monitoring operation Site wide
register including the walkovers by management,
and Register
species, location of HSE and security staff.
carcass, size/weight,
age and cause of
death
Landscape and Visual Amenity
Monitoring is not proposed for Landscape character and visual impacts, however, any thirdparty complaints on this topic will be gathered via the Project’s construction and
operational grievance mechanisms.
Waste & Wastewater
Ensuing engaged Environmental EPC
contractors, their Management Plan contractor
vehicles and waste
waste & management
At procurement and annually Contractors, transport vehicles
wastewater construction facilities have
thereafter and waste management facilities
disposal applicable
registrations/licenses
at time of
procurement
Waste & Environmental EPC
Record keeping of Management Plan contractor
Wastewater construction On-going As waste is transferred
waste transfer notes
Transfers
Socioeconomics
Number of persons N/A Contractor
Construction Employment policy
Employment employed from the On-going HR Dept.
and operation
local population
Traffic related issues N/A Contractor
Construction & incidents, Employment policy
Vehicles On-going H&S Dept.
and operation including near
misses
N/A Contractor CSR
Construction Records of CSR Employment policy
CSR On-going responsible
and operation plans and activities
party
Third Party Construction N/A Contractor
Grievances On-going -
Grievances and operation Employment policy
Climate Impacts
Specific monitoring for climate impacts will not be conducted, however, resource consumption will be monitored and collated by the EPC Contractor
Ecosystem Services
Specific monitoring for ecosystem services will not conducted, however, other monitoring such as the grievance mechanism and flood monitoring will act as indicators for
ecosystem services.
Community, Health, Safety and Security
Record of any N/A EPC
conflict between contractor
the workers and construction N/A Daily during construction
Complaints filed by
community
community members
members including
N/A N/A or Project workers EPC
any cases relating
contractor
to sexual operation quarterly during operations
harassment.
Discharging of N/A On-going in the event the N/A EPC

construction Security contractor
firearms by security security personnel are
and operation personnel/local police
personnel on site armed
N/A N/A EPC
Record of human contractor
Complaints filed by
rights
construction community members
violation/complaints Ongoing
and operation in relation to the
from the local
Project
communities
Record of any N/A N/A EPC

communicable contractor
diseases on site construction Project site clinic or
On-going
that could pose a and operation HSE personnel
risk to the local
communities
Number of N/A N/A EPC
construction Grievance contractor
grievances closed Quarterly / bi-yearly
and operation Management System
out
Average time for N/A N/A EPC
grievance contractor
construction Grievance
processing and Quarterly / bi-yearly
close out and
trends
Number of N/A N/A EPC
grievances still contractor
open, method to construction Grievance
Quarterly / bi-yearly
submit the and operation Management System
grievance and
trends
Topics raised in N/A N/A EPC
construction Grievance contractor
grievances and Quarterly / bi-yearly
trends
Human Rights, Labour and Working Conditions
EPC
Records of contractor
For all Project workers (direct
contracts, payments, Contractor
Worker Contracts & construction staff) and oversight of sub-
receipt of benefits, On-going Employment policy/
HR and operation contractor staff dedicated to the
leave entitlements, Saudi labour system
project
retrenchment etc.
Sanitation Facilities, Contractor EPC

construction Office Spaces, Employment policy/ contractor
Worker Welfare On-going At all such facilities onsite Saudi labour system
and operation Welfare and Rest
Areas
Inspection/internal Contractor EPC
audit of worker All accommodation facilities Employment policy/ contractor
Quality of construction Saudi labour system
accommodation Monthly provided to direct and full time
Accommodation and operation
facilities vs. IFC & sub-contracted labour.
EBRD standards
OH&S Near Misses Contractor EPC
construction Any classified near
(involving external On-going N/A Employment policy/ contractor
and operation miss
parties) Saudi labour system
Contractor
OH&S Emergency Any classified
construction Employment policy/ EPC
Situations and emergency situation On-going N/A
and operation Saudi labour system contractor
Incidents or incident
Project site and any other Contractor EPC
construction grievances received from the Employment policy/ contractor
Grievances Grievances received On-going
and operation public in reference to Project Saudi labour system
workforce including suppliers.
Records of the Contractor EPC
illnesses the workers Employment policy/ contractor
Health of the construction
are suffering from On-going Project site clinic or first aid facility Saudi labour system
workers and operation
and an analysis of
common diseases.
7.3 Summary of Impacts Post-Mitigation
The following tables summarise the residual impacts identified for the construction and operation
of the Project following the application of the appropriate mitigation and management measures.
Table 7-2: Summary of residual impacts
Environmental aspect Potential Impact Significance

Manage
Natural vegetation cover vegetal cover removal
no action
Manage
no action
Manage
Noise and vibration noise environment disturbance
no action
review
manage
mitigate
Surface water quality surface water quality degradation
no action
No action
Groundwater quality groundwater quality degradation
No action
manage
Hydrology and flood risk natural hydrologic system disturbance
No action
mitigate
Quality of soil Potential soil contamination
mitigate
ecosystem disturbance and habitat Manage
Terrestrial Biodiversity
destruction No action
No action
ecosystem disturbance and habitat
Introduction of invasive species
destruction No action
risk of accidents and injuries during No action
construction and operation, workers
Health and safety (occupational and No action
conflict with local community, influx of
public)
foreign workers and infectious disease
spread
degradation of general landscape of the No action
Landscape and visual comfort
site Manage
manage
No action
non-hazardous and hazardous waste manage
Waste generation generation , contamination of water and
soil if managed badly mitigate
Manage
Climate change Reduction/increasing of GHGs
plan
design
Creation of job opportunities
plan
plan
Growth of regional economy
plan
Economic and social aspects
manage
workers conflict with local communities
No action
No action
infectious disease spread
No action
manage
Traffic and transport volume of traffic rise and risk of accidents no action
no action

Environmental aspect Potential Impact Significance
No action
Risk of oil/chemicals spill, vehicle
Unplanned events accidents No action
Decommissioning Air quality, noise, traffic, job loss No action
7.4 Stakeholder Engagement plan
Consultation with stakeholders is an essential part of the ESIA process. The key objective of
the consultation is to establish a dialogue with those stakeholders who may be affected by
aspects of the Project or may have an interest in the outcome of the ESIA process.
With regard to the lender requirements, all of the IFC PS include requirements for a certain level
of stakeholder engagement (either in the ESIA, or as part of the future ESMS) and therefore the
Project will require a level of engagement. In particular, IFC PS 1 on “Social and Environmental
Assessment and Management Systems” describes the stakeholder engagement requirements
in more depth. It states the following:
“Stakeholder engagement is the basis for building strong, constructive, and responsive
relationships that are essential for the successful management of a project’s environmental and
social impacts. Stakeholder engagement is an on-going process that may involve, in varying
degrees, the following elements: Stakeholder analysis and planning.
• Disclosure and dissemination of information.
• Consultation and participation.
• Grievance mechanism; and
• On-going reporting to Affected Communities.
The nature, frequency, and level of effort of stakeholder engagement may vary considerably
and will be commensurate with the project’s risks and adverse impacts, and the project’s phase
of development.”
As is common and good practice, stakeholder engagement is considered a key aspect of all
projects and is undertaken at the ESIA stage in order to notify, gain views and enable a better
understanding of the dynamics of the local environment.
Throughout the ESIA process for the Project, key Project stakeholders have been consulted to
obtain information and further understand the Project design, construction methods and
operational activities. Key stakeholders consulted to date include:
• NEOM Governmental Affairs
• NEOM Sectors including the NEOM Environment Department; and
• NCEC
7.5 Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan
Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan is provided in the Annex 9.7.
7.6 Environmental Rehabilitation and Remediation Plan
Environmental Rehabilitation and Remediation Plan is provided in the Annex 9.8.
7.7 STL relocation Plan
7.7.1 Introduction
Following the completion of the Works sites ecological surveys, it is recommended that a
relocation program (RRP) is implemented to minimise impacts to the flora / fauna currently
residing within the proposed project site. In accordance with IFC Performance Standard 6, in
particular Paragraph 16, the presence of some trees / shrubs and the Spiny-tailed Lizard (STL)
and their habitat is of ecological importance to which protection should be afforded. Further

support of this implementation is in the form of STL being recognized by Saudi Wildlife Authority
as a High Conservation Priority species, an IUCN Red List Vulnerable species and a CITES
Appendix II species.
The following provides an overview of Tree / shrubs / STL within the project, along with a
proposed methodology for relocation, receptor site assessment and trapping.
7.7.2 Requirement for the Plan

Spiny-tailed Lizard (Uromastyx sp) are a species of diurnal agamid found throughout mountain,
rock, gravel and sand based habitats within Arabia (Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Yemen, Sultanate
of Oman, United Arab Emirates, Qatar and Kuwait). However, the existing populations are under
threat from pressures inclusive of rapid urban and industrial expansion, over grazing,
development of infrastructure, genetic isolation, hunting and increased predation levels.
Within , the presence of STL/ some trees / shrubs has been recorded from baseline surveys
conducted since 2018. Whilst definitive information on the species presence is yet to be
confirmed, available literature resources indicate the likely presence of four species belonging
to the genus Uromastyx.
This Species Action Plan (SAP) provides and overview of the species Uromastyx along with
management techniques for the conservation and relocation of STLs within the development.
7.7.3 Plan Structure

This Plan for the conservation and relocation of STLs/ trees / shrubs is structured as follows:
• Section 2: Species Assessment.

• Section 3: Management Objectives.
• Section 4: Relocation Strategy.
• Section 5: Relocation Methodology; and
• Section 6: Post Relocation Monitoring.
The EPC contractor will develop the relocation plan as follow:
1. Introduction
2. Species Assessment
2.1 Conservation Status
2.3 Speciation
2.4 Habitat
2.5 Diet
2.6 Activity Patterns
2.7 Reproduction
2.8 Conservation Issues
3. Relocation Strategy

3.1 Release Site
3.2 Quarantine Facility
3.3 Security
3.4 Artificial refugia
3.5 Timing of release
4. Relocation Methodology
4.1 Reptile Relocation
4.2 Spiny-tailed Lizard Capture
4.3 Record Keeping
5. Post Relocation Monitoring
5.1 Monitoring Best Practice Guidance
5.2 Monitoring Regime
5.3 Marking of Animals
7.8 Framework of Environmental and Social Management Plan
The FESMP will provide a framework for the development of both CESMP and OESMP by the
EPC Contractor and O&M Company respectively. The intention is that the FESMP will be used
by both the EPC Contractor and O&M Company for the development of specific environmental
and social management plans, based on the specific findings and recommendations of this
ESIA. The following sections outline the FESMP as required by NCEC for the environmental
permitting of the Project.
7.8.1 Objectives and Scope

The production and implementation of a FESMP provides the mechanism by which to implement
the findings of the ESIA. This FESMP sets out specific objectives and targets defining a
‘framework’ for the way in which the ESIA and its recommended mitigation and monitoring
measures should be addressed in the next stages of the Project development.
This FESMP is intended to be adopted by the EPC and O&M Contractors who will develop and
author their own detailed CESMP and OEMSP with supporting activity and topic specific
management plans and method statements to cover the construction and operation of the
Project.
This FESMP will also contribute to the development and implementation of the Environmental
and Social Management System (ESMS) by the Project Company. This ESIA report presents
the Framework for Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring that will guide the
development of the ESMS for the permitting and financing of the Project.
7.8.2 Intended Users

This FESMP aims to clearly communicate to the Project Company, their EPC and O&M
Contractor and all sub-contractors the Project’s environmental and social commitments. The
Project Company holds overall responsibility for the production and implementation of the
CESMP and OESMP at later stage of the Project.

7.8.3 Legislative Requirements
Chapter 2 of this Report outlines the national, regional, international and NEOM specific
legislative commitments that are applicable to the Project.
7.8.4 Organisational Structure

An overview of the organisational structure of all parties involved in the implementation of the
CESMP and OEMSP is outlined below:
• NCEC: As the Competent Authority in KSA, NCEC is responsible for issuing the
required Environmental Permit and ensuring all construction and operational conditions
related to the Environmental Permit are met. Other general responsibilities include:
✓ Enforcement of KSA laws and regulations;
✓ Provision of guidelines on compliance with environmental requirements;
✓ Strategic overview of environmental issues;
✓ Review and approval of the ESIA Report;
✓ Issue of the Environmental Permit and any associated conditions; and
✓ Undertake inspections, audits etc. to ensure compliance with the Environmental

Permit.
• NEOM: Once fully established, the NEOM SEZ will operate as an independent self-
governing entity that will assume responsibility for all planning and environmental
issues for the NEOM Region. At the time of writing, the SEZ and its functions have not
been fully established.
• Project Company: The Project Company is responsible for the financing and
development of the Project and will assume all responsibility for ensuring all
environmental and social commitments of the Project are met.
• EPC Contractor: The EPC Contractor is responsible to the Project Company for
ensuring all environmental and social commitments of the Project are met. The EPC
Contractor will produce and implement the detailed CESMP.
• Sub-Contractors: All sub-contractors undertaking works on behalf of the EPC

Contractor will be responsible for undertaking works in line with the CESMP and all
approve method statements and management plans.
• O&M Contractor: The appointed O&M contractor is responsible to ensure that all
requirements and permit conditions are adhered to and reported to the Project
company during routine operation.
7.8.5 Key Roles and Responsibilities

The roles and key responsibilities related to the implementation of the CESMP are outlined in
Table 7-3 below.
Table 7-3: CESMP and OESMP Roles and Responsibilities

Role Key Responsibilities
Project • Review and approve environmental and social management
Company/ budgets, resourcing and staffing.
Executive • Attend and actively input to environmental and social management
Managing review meetings.
Officer • Formal sign off and approval of all ESMS documentation produced
by the EPC and O&M Contractor, including their detailed
management plans.
• Follow up, review and internal approval off ESMS documentation
produced by the EPC and O&M Contractors.
Project • Inspect and audit EPC and O&M Contractors.
Company / • Liaise with regulators and/or other authorities on environmental
HSE and social matters.
Manager • Be responsible for communications regarding environmental and
social reporting and third party audits.
EPC/O&M • Review and approve environmental and social management
Contractor: budgets, resourcing and staffing.
Project
Director
• Review and approve environmental and social management
budgets, resourcing and staffing.
• Ensure sufficient resources for the management of environmental
EPC/O&M and social matters.
Contractor: • Undertake regular site inspections.
HSE • Monitor and report on environmental management and
Manager performance, including compliance with the CESMP/OEMSP.
• Undertaken regular inspections and audits to assess compliance
and manage implementation of corrective and preventative
actions.
• Monitor and report on environmental management and
EPC/O&M performance, including compliance with the CESMP/OESMP.
Contractor: • Prepare and monitor site bulletin boards.
HSE • Undertake daily site walkovers and inspection of works.
Engineer / • Maintain applicable environmental and social records.
Environment • Act as point of contact for any sub-contractor with regard to
al Engineer environmental issues.
7.8.6 Environmental Training and Awareness

All Project staff must be fully competent to perform their tasks based on appropriate education,
training or experience. To minimise potential impacts of the Project on the environment, all
Project Company, EPC Contractor and sub-contractor as well as the O&M Contractor staff will
be adequately trained to understand and comply with the environmental requirements and
commitments of the Project.
All site-based Project Company, staff will be required to undertake a site-specific Environmental
Induction prior to commencing any works. The aim of the Environmental Induction is to raise
awareness of environmental issues identified in the ESIA and the associated mitigation and
management measures detailed within the CESMP and the OEMSP and to ensure all Project
staff are informed of their responsibilities and duties. The site induction should include the
following:
• Site layout;
• Safety procedures;
• Hazardous materials and their safe use;

• CESMP/OEMSP and environmental considerations;
• Environmental emergency response procedures;
• Fire-fighting;
• Fuel-handling and spillage; and
• Incident reporting procedure.
Outside of the Environmental Induction, the level of training will vary depending on staff roles
and responsibilities. Example training requirements are outlined in the table below. As part of
the ESMS, a tailored Training Plan will be developed which include all training requirements.
The CESMP and OEMSP will provide further detail on the training requirements in line with the
construction and operational activities.
Table 7-4: Example of Training Requirements
Example/ Project Content Timing

Training Staff
Environmen • Environmental Policy and Prior to involvement
tal Induction All CESMP/OEMSP. in any
(Site Project • Legal commitments and construction/operatio
Induction) Staff requirements. nal activities.
and • Environmental aspects and
Visitors impacts associated with
• construction/operational
activities.
• Role and responsibilities of
site environmental
management.
• Communication procedures;
and
• Emergency Procedures.
Environment Site • As per the above, in addition: Prior to involvement
al Induction Supervisor ✓ Importance of toolbox in any
for s/ HSE talks and how to conduct construction/operatio
Supervisors Managers/ toolbox talks; nal activities.
Environme ✓ Management of
ntal training records and
Managers grievances.
Spill and All Project • Detailed training on the Prior involvement in
Emergen Staff response and procedures in any
cy the event of a spill of construction/operatio
Response emergency. nal activities.
Training
• Toolbox Talk environmental
training sessions may be
focused on the following
subjects:
✓ Dust control and dust
mitigation;
✓ Air quality emissions and
control measures;
✓ Hazardous materials
All Project management, handling Weekly – additional
Tool Staff and transportation bulletins and alerts as
Box ✓ Spill prevention and required.
Talks response for personnel
involved in the storage of
fuel and other hazardous

Example/ Project Content Timing
Training Staff
materials;
✓ Storage, handling and
use of chemicals;
✓ Ecologically significant
fauna and mitigation
measures;
✓ Noise control and
mitigation measures;
✓ Traffic control and
mitigation;
✓ Chance Find Procedure;
✓ Waste management; and
• Emergency incident
response.
Records of training delivered by internal and external providers shall be maintained by the EPC
and O&M Contractor. These records should include a training register which details the name
and date of the training and list of all attendees.
7.8.7 Internal and External Communications

The CESMP and OEMSP will be required to establish, implement, and maintain processes
needed for internal and external communications relevant to the environmental and social
performance of the Project.
All Project staff, including Project Company, EPC/O&M Contractor and sub-contractors will be
responsible for the communication of any potential environmental issues to the appropriate
person.
The CESMP/OEMSP will develop a communication plan which will establish:
• What will be communicated;

• When it will be communicated;
• With whom to communicate; and
• How to communicate.
Formal modes of internal communications relevant to the environmental and social
management of the Project may include:
• Management meetings;
• Progress meetings; and
• Monthly reports (e.g., monitoring, inspection, incident reports).
7.8.8 Auditing and Inspection
7.8.8.1 Internal Audits
Internal audits will be undertaken to assess the compliance and conformance of the Project
Company and the EPC/O&M Contractors with the CESMP/OEMSP. Internal audits will involve
the observation of project activities, meetings with key Project staff and a review of records i.e.
monitoring reports, management meetings, complaints etc.
Should any non-compliances or opportunities for improvement be identified during the internal
audit, corrective action requests will be issued to the responsible party. These requests will take
the form of a short document / form setting out the following information, as a minimum:

• The nature of the non-compliance (date, location, description);
• The nature of the recommended / investigative / remedial / corrective action;
• The individual responsible for the action;
• The timeframe for undertaking and completing the action; and
• A record and sign-off of the action undertaken.
The CESMP/OEMSP will detail the frequency, scope and personnel responsible for the internal
audits.
7.8.8.2 External Audits
As the Project is seeking finance from lenders who may (or may not) be signatories of the EP
or have investment policies that are consistent with the IFC Performance Standards, the Project
will be required to comply with lenders requirements.
In accordance with Equator Principle 9, an Independent Environmental & Social Consultant shall
undertake monitoring and reporting activities on behalf of the lenders for the period of the project
loan.
There is also the potential that NEOM, as the project proponent, may undertake their own
external audits. Further detail will be provided in the CESMP/OEMSP.
7.8.8.3 Inspections
Daily inspections will be undertaken by the HSE Manager and/or Environmental Manager to
monitor and record the general environmental performance of the Project. The daily walkover
inspection will include of key areas i.e. construction activity locations, site offices, site compound
/ laydown/ storage areas and will cover the following as minimum:
• General site housekeeping;

• Dust management and air quality;
• Ecological observations
• Noise and vibration;
• Waste storage and management;
• Chance Find Procedure;
• Lighting management; and
• Traffic management.
All site inspections will be documented via an Environmental Inspection Record which will be
submitted to the HSE Manager on a monthly basis.
In addition to the above, a more formal walkover with the HSE Manager and/or Environment
Manager and the Construction Manager will be undertaken and documented.
Table 7-5: Required Complimentary Plans and Procedures
Plan / Project Purpose and Key Requirements

Procedure Phase
Chance Finds Construction To state the process for identifying and responding
Procedure to a potential find of archaeology when construction
or operational activities are being undertaken near
the archaeological site within the Project site and
near archaeological sites outside the project site. It
shall include the process for sectioning off the
potential artefact and external communication with
the Ministry of Tourism.

Procedure Phase
Influx Construction The EPC Contractor and O&M Company will
Management and Operation develop a Worker Influx Management Plan to
Plan provide a clear set of actions that will be undertaken
for the management, mitigation, monitoring and
evaluation of impacts related to worker influx in the
Project area.
Traffic Construction & The plan will identify specific requirements for
Management Operation heavy, or oversize loads, including timings of
Plan deliveries, specific routes (to minimise disruption),
engagement mechanisms with external transport
authorities. To include measures to minimise
congestion, fuel use and risks to the public and site
staff.
Waste Construction To identify site specific requirements for waste &
Management & Operation wastewater management, containment of wastes
Plan (segregation, storage area specifications and
locations), collection methodologies & transport
(identification of licensed contractors and the
process to engage), treatment/disposal
(identification of licensed treatment and disposal
sites), record keeping and reporting requirements
related to waste.
Pollution Construction Identify site specific requirements for response to
Response & Operation pollution incidents. To include the identification of
Plan high-risk areas on a plan and the location of spill kits
(and contents of spill kits).
To identify required contact details in the event of an
incident and contractors that are available on a quick
response contract to assist with clean up. Where
necessary this will link with the SEP for any external
communications.
To identify staff that require training in regard to the
plan. The plan will include provisions for recording of
any incidents in a separate register, to ensure close
out and implementation of corrective and
preventative actions.
Training Plan Construction To identify specific staff members for training and
& Operation the type (i.e. classroom, practical, toolbox talks)
how/when this is to be delivered, the frequency of
training and whether follow up training provisions
are required. The training will be linked to the
specific content of the listed plans and procedures,
or key risk activities that may be identified from on-
site method statements.

Procedure Phase
Health & Construction Identify the required controls for worker health and
Safety Plan & Operation safety during the commissioning and operational
phases. As a minimum, this plan shall include:
• Means of identifying and minimising, so far as
reasonably practicable, the causes of potential
hazards to workers.
• Provision of preventive and protective measures,
including modification, substitution, or elimination of
hazardous conditions or substances.
• Provision of appropriate equipment to minimise
risks, and requiring and enforcing its use.
• Training of workers, and provision of appropriate
incentives for them to use and comply with health
and safety procedures and protective equipment.
• Documentation and reporting of occupational
accidents, diseases and incidents.
Emergency prevention, preparedness and response
arrangements.
Stakeholder Construction To identify project stakeholders, identify
Engagement & Operation communication protocols for engagement with
Plan (SEP) stakeholders.
To identify frequency or event-based
communication with stakeholders (i.e. for
emergencies and specific grievances).
To detail the grievance mechanism or provide a
reference to a separate grievance mechanism.
Grievance Construction To be included within or be linked to the SEP.
Mechanism & Operation To identify the procedure for all site staff to be able
to raise issues, concerns and opportunities for
improvement for any aspect of their employment on
the project.
To develop and identify the process for external
parties to raise grievances regarding the project.
The mechanism shall be easily accessible
(including for any vulnerable groups), non-
discriminatory and provide a transparent process to
raise concerns or complaints, which may be issued
in an anonymous nature. The mechanism shall
specify the roles and responsibilities of internal staff
about the grievance mechanism and the procedure
for responding to received grievances, including
the timeline for response, engagement
mechanisms and recording of records.
Material Construction To identify locations for material storage, storage
Handling and & Operation requirements (specifications of bunds and
Storage buildings/warehouses to ensure environmental and
Procedure H&S protection, segregation requirements etc.) and
handling procedures to minimise environmental and
OH&S risks.
The plan will outline record keeping as per chain of
custodies, requirements for MSDS and roles &
responsibilities. Specific method statements
regarding the handling of materials will be detailed,
as well as training requirements for staff involved in
such activities.

Procedure Phase
Site Construction To specify the timing and frequency of inspections
Inspection & Operation (e.g. daily, weekly walkovers) and audits (including
and Audit internal & external independent audits for the
Plan & lenders as appropriate).
Procedure To detail the methodology of such inspections and
audits to ensure applicable Environmental and
Social requirements are included as criteria within
the scope of the inspection/audit.
For internal audits, the procedure will identify the
audit scope (site, laydown areas, accommodation
areas, sub-contractor areas etc.), audit criteria (e.g.
CESMP, OESMP, ESMS), selection process for
audit evidence, reporting format and auditor
competence requirements.
The Procedure will specify definitions of non-
conformance, observations and best practices, as
well as detailing the mechanisms for issuance and
follow up of Non-Conformance reports, including
time periods for action and the implementation of
corrective and/or preventative measures.
Emergency Construction To identify the contingencies put in place for a variety
Preparednes & Operation of potential emergency situations relevant to the
s and commissioning or operational phases. The plan will
Response outline the response mechanisms, roles and
Plan responsibilities, training requirements, internal
communication, equipment and relevant
engagement with external stakeholders.
Requirements for on-site equipment shall be
established based upon the potential emergency
risks, including training provisions for site personnel
regarding such equipment.
Environment Construction Monitoring is required to demonstrate compliance to
al and Social & Operation KSA environmental standards and lender
Monitoring requirements. The monitoring plan is to specify
Plan monitoring requirements for all ESIA parameters (as
specified in this ESIA report – as a minimum). The
plan will therefore need to include:
• What parameters need to be monitored and
measured and at what locations.
• The methods for monitoring measurement,
analysis and evaluation to ensure valid
results.
• The criteria against which compliance and
performance will be measured.
• When and at what frequency monitoring
needs to be performed.
• How the results from monitoring and
measurement will be analysed and
evaluated (independent or internal).
Working Construction The EPC contractor and O&M Company will provide
Conditions & Operation a plan detailing how working conditions and terms of
and Terms employment are compliant with KSA labour, social
of security and occupational health and safety laws.
Employment
Procedure

Procedure Phase
Retrenchme Construction The EPC contractor and O&M Company will develop
nt Plan & Operation a plan to mitigate the adverse impacts of
(only if retrenchment, in line with national law and good
retrenchment industry practice and based on the principles of non-
is discrimination and consultation. Without prejudice to
anticipated) more stringent provisions in national law, such
consultation will involve reasonable notice of
employment changes to the workers’
representatives and, where appropriate, relevant
public authorities so that the retrenchment plan may
be examined jointly in order to mitigate adverse
effects of job losses on the workers concerned. The
outcome of the consultations will be reflected in the
final retrenchment plan.
Human Construction Human resource policies and procedures will be
Resources & Operation adapted appropriate to the size of the workforce
and Policies required for operation and maintenance
Procedures requirements. Policies and procedures must be
prepared to demonstrate consistency with the
requirements of national legislation and IFC
Performance Standard 2.
Security Plan Construction A Security Plan will be developed based on the
& Operation outcomes of a security risk assessment.
It is noted that security arrangements will be guided
by UN Code of conducts for law enforcement.
Security personnel will follow a strict code of
conduct and will be trained in weapons handling (if
applicable), human rights and receipt of
grievances.
7.8.9 Control of Documents
The CESMP and OEMSP are intended to be an evolving ‘live’ document, which is regularly
reviewed, revised and developed, to ensure the depth of environmental management is
compliant and complete.
It is recommended that the detailed CESMP/OESMP is reviewed throughout the construction

and operation of the Project at regular intervals. Reviews of the detailed CESMP and OEMSP
should be undertaken in collaboration between NEOM, the Project Company, EPC/O&M
Contractor and their Environmental Advisor and should consider the following as a minimum:
• Any additional responses / comments from NCEC and/or NEOM;

• Updated construction activity details;
• Outcomes of any environmental monitoring;
• Recorded incidences and non-conformances;
• Recorded enquiries and complaints;
• Changes in organisation structure and responsibilities; and
• Changes in environmental standards and legislation.
7.8.10 Structure and Content of the CESMP/OESMP
The CESMP and OEMSP will comprise a stand-alone document structured to detail how
environmental and social risks, impacts, opportunities, and compliance will be managed and

monitored. This shall be the top-level E&S management plan document for construction. A
proposed table of contents for the CESMP/OESMP is outlined in below.
Table 7-6: Proposed Table of Contents for the CESMP/OESMP
Section of Overview of Contents

CESMP
Distribution List Identification of all individuals responsible for the implementation of
the CESMP/OESMP. This will include representatives from the
Project Company, EPC/Operational Contractor, and all sub-
contractors.
Introduction Overview of the CESMP/OESMP and the Project. To include a
description of the objectives and scope.
Project Detail on the location, methods of work and planned activities,
Description equipment and workforce required, temporary
construction/operational facilities as well as the delivery schedule
and key milestones. Detailed maps and layouts should be included.
Regulatory Description of the legal framework, including detail on the relevant
Framework Project (i.e., NEOM) specific, regional, national, and international
legislation that will need to be adhered to.
Environmental A description of how the E&S aspects of the Project will be
and Social managed. To include detail on the following:
Management • A specific Environment Policy from the EPC/O&M Contractor
that outlines their commitment to the protection of the
environment, health and safety and their adherence to the
CESMP/OEMSP and all other relevant documentation and
regulatory requirements.
• The roles and responsibilities of those involved in the
implementation of the CESMP/OESMP.
• Process and procedures for environmental awareness and
training.
• Process and procedures for external and internal
communications.
• Process and procedures for monitoring inspections and audits.
• Process and procedures for non-conformities, corrective and
preventative actions.
• Process and procedures for document review, update, and
control.
Mitigation and Detail on the environmental and social parameter specific
Management mitigation and management measures that will be developed in
line with the requirements of the associated ESIA. Will also
include the topic and/or activity specific management plans
identified by the ESIA. The management plans can form technical
appendices of the CESMP/OESMP.
Monitoring Detail on the environmental and social parameter specific
monitoring obligations developed in line with the monitoring
requirements outlined in the associated ESIA.

8 Summary
8.1 “Detailed” Alternative in Environmental, Social, and Economic Terms
The various alternatives were analyzed as part of the ESIA report as detailed in Section 4. Below
in Table 8-1 is a brief summary of the preferred alternatives considered in this report.
Table 8-1: Summary of preferred alternative
Preferred Justification summary

alternative
Project The creation of the project will have a number of positive impacts:
creation • Renewable power generation
• Reducing greenhouse gas emissions by millions of tons of carbon dioxide
equivalent
• Providing job opportunities
• Investing and strengthening the local economy
Environmental impacts are greatly mitigated during the various phases
especially during construction. As such, the “no project” alternative (no
proposed project creation) is not a viable alternative, and the preferred
alternative is the proposed project construction.
Project The specific location of the project has a number of advantages:
site • The area is designated for photovoltaic projects
• Availability of land for the planned development
• The site is easily accessible and easy to connect to the local electricity
network.
• The level of irradiation at the project site is strong
• Not important cultural sites
• The project area has been officially allocated to similar projects (solar
power plants).
• Its characteristics are suitable for the construction of the proposed
project
Mounting A suitable alternative due to the limited space available and requires less
system: maintenance
uniaxial
tracking
Panel Reducing the use of natural resources
cleaning
system:
system
No
water/dry
cleaning
Bifacial Energy production can be increased by up to 25%
PV panel
PV Improved performance and durability compared to full cells.
module
half cell
8.2 Summary of the Environmental, Social and Economic Losses and Gains that
justify the establishment of the proposed activity
The proposed project has a number of important positive impacts. Below - as presented earlier
in Section 1. A summary of the potential gains and losses associated with the project is shown
in Table 8-2.

Table 8-2: summary of gains and losses
Aspect gains Losses

Environmental aspect • Reducing greenhouse Limited negative impacts on
gases (some millions of the environment (such as
tons of carbon dioxide increase of noise levels)
equivalent) during the construction and
• Energy production from operation phases. However,
renewable sources the application of proposed
mitigation measures will
further reduce or eliminate
those impacts
Social aspect • Energy production is Limited negative impacts on
equivalent to supplying the environment (such as
energy to thousands of increased noise levels)
households during the construction and
• Creating job opportunities operation. However, the
during the different application of the proposed
phases of the project mitigation measures will
• Purchasing items, reduce more than those
especially during the impacts .
phase construction, will
have a positive indirect
impact on the
neighbouring local
communities due to the
improvement of
economic conditions
Economic aspect • Purchasing materials,
especially during the
construction phase, will
have direct positive
effects on the local
economy
• Power generation from
renewable source of
energy
8.3 Summary of the Method of addressing the adverse impacts and the extent of their
mitigation, improvement, or control.
During the various phases of the proposed project, the following hierarchy of controls adopted
by NEOM is followed as appropriate in Figure 8-1.
1. Eliminate or remove the hazard potential Catastrophic risks (No-action Alternative).
2. Substitute the Design or Methodology of an Activity with an inherently less-risky
alternative
3. Engineer to lower risks through applying additional or international best-practice controls
4. Manage risks using standard procedural or administrative controls
5. Mitigate risks through provision of onsite monitoring and response capabilities.

6. No Action required: Activity is sustainable or presents a potential negligible opportunity
7. Review the activity to see if an opportunity may be achievable through management
8. Plan additional management actions to ensure opportunities are achieved
9. Design-in additional measures to increase the scale or magnitude of the opportunity
10. Invest in the opportunity in areas otherwise not considered under the development.
Figure 8-1: NEOM Hierarchy of Environmental and Social Risk & Opportunity Controls
8.4 Summary of the Environmental and Social Management Plan Management Plan
The Environmental and Social Management plan included but not limited to:
• Roles and responsibilities
• Non-conformity and corrective action
• building abilities
• communication
• Procedures to be followed during the different phases of the project in order to reduce
potential negative impacts
8.5 Roles of the Different Authorities Concerned

Table 8-3 illustrates the role of the key stakeholders. It should be noted that a comprehensive
report on the stakeholder map for the proposed project will be prepared. This report includes
more details about the roles and concerns of the relevant government agencies regarding the
project. It also includes a brief action plan for stakeholder engagement.
Table 8-3: Role of different authorities
His role in the

number The name Its role in operating
creation
1 National Center for The National Center for The National Center for
Environmental Environmental Compliance Environmental Compliance acts
Compliance (NCEC) has been assigned as an enforcement agency for the
responsibilities related to enforcement of environmental
reviewing and approving laws, including licensing and
environmental impact environmental auditing.
assessments for development
projects and granting permits
and licensing (i.e.
environmental permit for
construction and
environmental permit for
operation)
2 Ministry of Issuing a permit to drill Attention to the environmental
Environment, Water groundwater wells if necessary performance of the proposed
and Agriculture project in general
(MEWA)
3 NEOM the project performance monitoring. performance monitoring.
owner Liaise with relevant Responsible for communicating
government agencies/ with relevant government
ministries as needed. agencies/ministries As needed
4 Saudi Electricity Dealing directly with the An ongoing role related to
Company (SEC) common matters between the project operation and grid
project and the assets of the power supply
Saudi Electricity Company
(for example, the electrical
connection)
5 Ministry of culture Potential supervision during Attention to the environmental
the construction process to performance of the proposed
ensure that the discoveries do project in general
not overlook of archaeological
6 National Center for Ensures that all procedures Attention to the environmental
Wildlife included in the ESIA are performance of the proposed
followed to protect biodiversity project in general
7 National Center for Ensures that all procedures Attention to the environmental
Vegetation Cover included in the EIA are performance of the proposed
and Combating followed to protect biodiversity project in general
Desertification

9 Annexes
9.1 Reference List
1) Tabuk city profile – Ministry of Municipal and Rural affairs, 2019

2) Saudi Geological Survey. (2016). Geology of Saudi Arabia. Available at:
http://www.sgs.org.sa/English/Geology/Pages/default.aspx
3) IFC. (2007). Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines. International Finance
Corporation: World Bank Group.
4) International Finance Corporation, 2012a. Performance Standard 7: Indigenous
Peoples. IFC
5) International Finance Corporation 2012b. Performance Standard 8: Cultural Heritage.
IFC
6) United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization, 2016. Falconry, a living
human heritage. [online]. Available at: www.unesco.org.
7) Ministry of Environment ,Water and Agriculture, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, laws and
regulations at : https://www.mewa.gov.sa/ar/Pages/default.aspx
8) Ministry of Economy and Planning (2009) Ninth Development Plan, Water and
Sanitation, available at:
http://www.mep.gov.sa/themes/GoldenCarpet/index.jsp;jsessionid=990A54C524B9961
95483ABD194F0C1EA.beta
9) National Center for Environmental Compliance, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Executive
Regulations at : https://ncec.gov.sa/?page_id=674

9.2 Curriculum Vitae
9.2.1 Authors of the study

Task
Consultant full name Position
Mustafa Al-Ramadhan Study preparation
Environmental Engineer
Muhammed Ali Al-Harbi Environmental specialist Study preparation
Study preparation
Environmental consultant
Elyes Othman
Review
Ennacer Besghaeir Environmental consultant
Environmental Engineer and Approval
Atef Al- Rezgui magister degree in
environmental sciences

9.2.2 CVs of the authors
9.2.2.1 CV of Mustafa Al-Ramadhan

9.2.2.2 CV of Elyes Othman

9.2.2.3 CV of Muhammed Ali Al-Harbi

9.2.2.4 CV Ennacer Besghaeir

9.2.2.5 CV Atef Al-Rezgui

9.3 Technical Documents of the Project

EXISTING HV DATA PROJECT AIRPORT WEST 1,883 MW
Coordinates UTM (WGS84) Total Peak Power (STC): 2,288.9412 MWp

Zone: 37 R Total nominal Power @45ºC: 1,883.476 MVA
Scale 1:20,000 Maximum capacity at POI: - MW
Ratio DC/AC: 1.215
EP
Length of roads: 191,089 m

EP
Total perimeter: 33,203 m

Total fenced area: 5,143 ha
Modules
Rating / Type: 585 Wp
Total number: 3,912,720
Modules per string: 34
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
Structure
PSB-07
Type: Horizontal Tracker
PSB-07
Arrangement: 2P51
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
Total number of structures: 38,360
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
Pitch (E-W): 13 meters
PSB-07
EXISTING ROAD
PLANT III
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
Power Station:
PSB-07
PSB-07
213MW
PSB-07
Type of Inverter: Central Inverter
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
Rating: 2x3,437 kVA @ 45ºC
PSB-07
PSB-07
Transformer Capacity: 6,874 kVA
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
EP
EP
PSB-07
PSB-07
Total number: 274
EP
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
EP
PSB-07
PSB-07
EP
EP
EP
EP
PLANT I
EP
PSB-07
EP
PSB-07
EP
PSB-07
EP
206MW
PSB-07
I
SUBPLANT 206 MW
PSB-07
EP
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
Number of subplants: 5 (I, V, VI, VIII, IX)
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
Total Peak Power (STC): 250,614 kWp
PSB-07
PSB-07
PLANT II
PSB-07
PSB-07
Total nominal Power @45ºC: 206,220 kVA
PSB-07
213MW
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
SUBPLANT 213 MW
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
Number of subplants: 4 (II, III, IV, VII)
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
MAIN
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PLANT ACCESS
PSB-07
PSB-07
BLOCK 6.8 MW
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
IV
PSB-07
PSB-07
Number of blocks / subplant: 30 / 31
PSB-07
III
METEO STATION
PSB-07
Peak Power: 8,353,800 Wp
PSB-07
PSB-07
Nominal Power per block: 6,874 kVA
PSB-07
NEW HV Number of inverters: 1
PSB-07
II
SUBSTATION
PSB-07
PSB-07
Structures per block: 140
PSB-07
Strings per block: 420
PSB-07
PSB-07
EP
PSB-07
BATTERY STORAGE Modules per block: 14,280
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
AND VOLTAGE
PSB-07
PSB-07
REGULATION AREA
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-06
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PLANT IV
PSB-07
PSB-07
213MW
PSB-07
LEGEND
PSB-07
PSB-06
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PLANT VI
EP
PSB-07
PSB-07
EP
206MW
PSB-07
PSB-07
AVAILABLE AREA - 52.49km²
EP
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
EP
PSB-07
EP
PSB-07
EP
EP
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PLANT V
206MW
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PLOT BOUNDARIES
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-06
EXISTING HV
PLANT VII
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
213MW EXISTING ROAD
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-06
FENCE
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
INTERNAL ROAD 4m
V VIII IX VI VII
MAIN
TRACKER 2P51
U
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
GROUND
PLANT ACCESS
NEW HV TURNKEY STATION

SUBSTATION
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
BLOCK OF 140 TRACKERS

BATTERY STORAGE EXISTING HV
PLANT VIII PLANT IX AND VOLTAGE
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
206MW 206MW REGULATION AREA

SUBPLANT OF 30 BLOCKS
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
Client: Engineering:
SUBPLANT OF 31 BLOCKS
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
33/132 kV MV/HV SUBPLANT SET

Project:
AIRPORT WEST SOLAR POWER PLANT

PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
132/380 kV HV SET
Drawing Title:
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
PSB-07
STORAGE AREA GENERAL LAYOUT
Scale: Designed: Drawn: Checked: Approved:

BATTERY STORAGE AND
1 / 20,000 LRT JUC LRT LRT
VOLTAGE REGULATION AREA
Original Size: Date: Date: Date: Date:
A1 JUL-2022 JUL-2022 JUL-2022 JUL-2022
Drawing Code: Drawing Number: Sheet:
00 01 of 01
LEGEND DATA PROJECT AIRPORT WEST 1,883 MW
Coordinates UTM (WGS84) Total Peak Power (STC): 2,288.9412 MWp

Zone: 37 R AVAILABLE AREA - 52.49km² Total nominal Power @45ºC: 1,883.476 MVA
Scale 1:20,000 Maximum capacity at POI: - MW
Ratio DC/AC: 1.215
EP
FENCE
EP
INTERNAL ROAD 4m Total perimeter: 33,203 m

TRACKER 2P51
Modules
TURNKEY STATION Rating / Type: 585 Wp
Modules per string: 34
Structure
33/132 kV MV/HV SUBPLANT SET Type: Horizontal Tracker
Arrangement: 2P51
132/380 kV HV SET
Power Station:
Type of Inverter: Central Inverter
BATTERY STORAGE AND
EP
EP

EP
EP
VOLTAGE REGULATION AREA Total number: 274

EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
EP
X X X X
X X X
X X X
XX X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X XX X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
XX X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X XX
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X XX
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
STORAGE AREA
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
Temporary Fence
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
I
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
XX X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SUBPLANT 206 MW
EP
Materials Storage Area
Waste Management
Area
X
XX X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X XX
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X XX
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X XX X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X XX
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
XX X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
XX X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X

MAIN LABOR CAMP Total Peak Power (STC): 250,614 kWp
SECONDARY LABOR CAMP

SUBPLANT 213 MW

MAIN
LABOR CAMP
BLOCK 6.8 MW
IV
III Number of blocks / subplant: 30 / 31
X X X
X X X X
Peak Power: 8,353,800 Wp
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
XX X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
XX X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X XX X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X
Main Labor Camp
06 Waste Management
Area
X X X X
X X X
05
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
XX X
X X X
X X X X
10
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
03
X X X
X X X
XX X
X X X X
Number of inverters: 1
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
Parking
X X X
09
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
XX X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
Temporary Fence
X X X X
X X X
04
X X X
X X X
02
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X XX
X X X
X X X
X X X X
07
II
01
08
Structures per block: 140

EP

Modules per block: 14,280
EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Waste
Management
Area
Temporary Fence
Secondary Labor Camp
06
05
10
03
Parking
09
02 04
07
01
08
V VIII IX VI VII
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Waste
X
Waste
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Management
X
Management
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Area Area
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
U X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Temporary Fence Temporary Fence

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
GROUND
SECONDARY
LABOR CAMP
Project:
Drawing Title:
MAIN LABOR CAMP

GENERAL PLANT
1:20.000 LRT JUC LRT LRT

A1 SEP-2022 SEP-2022 SEP-2022 SEP-2022
09 01 of 02
LEGEND
MAIN DATA PROJECT AIRPORT WEST 1,883 MW
LABOR CAMP X X X
X X X
Total Peak Power (STC): 2,288.9412 MWp
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
Total nominal Power @45ºC: 1,883.476 MVA

X X X
X X X
AVAILABLE AREA - 52.49km²

X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
Maximum capacity at POI: - MW

X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
Ratio DC/AC: 1.215

X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
FENCE
INTERNAL ROAD 4m Total perimeter: 33,203 m
Main Labor Camp TRACKER 2P51
Modules
TURNKEY STATION Rating / Type: 585 Wp
06 Waste Management Modules per string: 34
Area X X X
X X X
X X X
X

05
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
10
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
Structure
X X X
X X X X X
03
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
Parking
X X X
09
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
Type: Horizontal Tracker

X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
33/132 kV MV/HV SUBPLANT SET

X X X X X
X X X
X X X
Temporary Fence
X X X
X X X
04
X X X
X X X
02
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
Arrangement: 2P51
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X

07
132/380 kV HV SET
01
Power Station:
08 Type of Inverter: Central Inverter
BATTERY STORAGE AND
VOLTAGE REGULATION AREA Total number: 274
STORAGE AREA
SUBPLANT 206 MW

MAIN LABOR CAMP Total Peak Power (STC): 250,614 kWp
SECONDARY LABOR CAMP

SUBPLANT 213 MW

LABOR CAMP LEGEND Total Peak Power (STC): 258,968 kWp
ID FACILITIES
EP
BLOCK 6.8 MW
01 Client's Office
Number of blocks / subplant: 30 / 31
02 Contractor's Office Peak Power: 8,353,800 Wp
Number of inverters: 1
03 Changing Room Structures per block: 140
04 Toilets Modules per block: 14,280
05 Wastewater deposit
06 Water deposit
07 Storage
SECONDARY
LABOR CAMP 08 Guardhouse
09 Generator Set 40kVA
Secondary Labor Camp 10 Deposit for Generator
06
05
10
03
Parking
09
02 04
07
01
08
Project:
Drawing Title:
MAIN LABOR CAMP

DETAIL
1:2.000 LRT JUC LRT LRT

A1 SEP-2022 SEP-2022 SEP-2022 SEP-2022
09 02 of 02
9.4 Cadastral Maps of the Activity Site
Not Available
9.5 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Not applicable

9.6 Responses to NCEC Comments on the ESIA Scoping Report

9.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan

ENVIRONMENTAL EMERGENCY RESPONSE
PLAN
Airport West Solar Energy Park
Rev 00, September 2022
Submitted to:
By the consultant:
Document History
Revision code Description of changes Purpose of issue Date

Rev00 First issue Issued for Submission to September 2022
NCEC
Document Approval
Prepared by Reviewed by Approved by

Name Abderrazzak ZEMZEMI Elyes Othman Ennacer Besghaeir
Job Title Environmental Engineer Environmental Engineer Environmental
Consultant
ENVIRONMENT AL -EMERGENCY -REPONSE -PLAN -SOLAR -PARK - REVISION C ODE: REV 0 0 PAGE 2 OF 26
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
Tables of contents
TABLES OF CONTENTS ..................................................................................................... 3

LIST OF TABLES ................................................................................................................. 5
LIST OF FIGURES ............................................................................................................... 5
ABBREVIATION LIST .......................................................................................................... 6
DOCUMENT CONTROL PROCEDURES ............................................................................. 7
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................... 8
1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 9
1.1 Purpose ............................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Scope .................................................................................................................. 9
1.3 Objectives ........................................................................................................... 9
1.4 Project Overview ................................................................................................. 9
2 EMERGENCY RESPONSE TEAM........................................................................... 11
2.1 Emergency Response Team ............................................................................. 11
2.1.1 Emergency Response Team during Construction....................................... 11
2.1.2 Emergency Response Team during Operation ........................................... 11
2.2 Notification Procedure ....................................................................................... 11
2.2.1 Notify the Duty Manager (Emergency Response Room) ............................ 12
2.2.2 Description of emergency ........................................................................... 12
2.2.3 Location ..................................................................................................... 12
2.2.4 Call Emergency Services/Statuary Bodies.................................................. 12
2.2.5 Notify ERT Leaders .................................................................................... 12
2.2.6 Coordinate.................................................................................................. 12
2.2.7 Accompany ................................................................................................ 12
3 PREVENTION .......................................................................................................... 13
3.1 Risk Assessment methodology.......................................................................... 13
3.1.1 Hazard Identification................................................................................... 13
3.1.2 Risk Assessment ........................................................................................ 13
3.2 Risk Control....................................................................................................... 15
4 PREPAREDNESS .................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Training ............................................................................................................. 17
4.1.1 Objective .................................................................................................... 17
4.1.2 Orientation Training .................................................................................... 17
4.1.3 Training Programme................................................................................... 17
4.2 Exercise and Drill .............................................................................................. 17
4.2.1 Table-top Exercise (Every 3 months).......................................................... 18
4.2.2 Functional Exercise (Every 6 Months) ........................................................ 18
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
4.2.3 Functional Exercise (Annually) ................................................................... 18
4.2.4 Lessons Learned ........................................................................................ 19
4.3 Resources ......................................................................................................... 19
4.3.1 Adequately Trained Emergency Teams...................................................... 19
4.3.2 Equipment .................................................................................................. 19
5 EMERGENCY RESPONSE ACTIVITIES ................................................................. 22
5.1 Emergency Response Procedures .................................................................... 22
5.1.1 Immediate Reactions (Initial Response) ..................................................... 22
5.1.2 Alerts and Notifications ............................................................................... 23
5.1.3 Assess the Situation ................................................................................... 23
5.1.4 Initiate appropriate EERPs ......................................................................... 23
5.1.5 Report to Concerned/Relevant Authorities/Parties...................................... 23
5.1.6 Response Deactivation and Debriefing ....................................................... 24
5.2 Environmental Emergency Response Plans (EERPs) ....................................... 24
5.2.1 Personnel Injury ......................................................................................... 24
5.2.2 Site Evacuation .......................................................................................... 24
5.2.3 Fire or Explosion ........................................................................................ 25
5.2.4 Floods ........................................................................................................ 25
5.2.5 Chemical Spillage....................................................................................... 26
5.2.6 High Winds and Dust .................................................................................. 26
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
List of Tables
Table 4-1: Schedule of in-house training .................................................................................... 17
List of figures
Figure 1-1: Project location .......................................................................................................... 10
Figure 3-1: Example of a risk evaluation matrix ......................................................................... 15
Figure 3-2: Risk Rating and Action criteria: ................................................................................ 15
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
Abbreviation List
COE Chief Executive Officer
EMP Environmental Management Plan
EERP Environmental Emergency Response Plan
ERP Emergency Response Team
HSE Health, Safety and Environment
ICS Incident Commander System
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
PV Photovoltaic
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
Document Control Procedures
The Environmental Emergency Response Plan (EERP) is a controlled document. All EERP
Recipients, detailed within the distribution list, will receive a copy of EERP. This document will
be subject to review on a three-monthly basis and updated as necessary by HSE Department
to comply with current and best industry practice, to reflect audit recommendations and
incorporate current contact details.
It is the responsibility of the EERP copy holder; Chief Executive Officer (CEO), to maintain the
accuracy of this document. All updates should be promptly inserted and acknowledged
according to NEOM Management Procedures. The amendments to EERP will be maintained
and approved by the CEO. The following table will be used to record detail amendments
(reviews).
Revision No. Page(s)/ section(s) Amended By Date

Amended /Added
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
Definitions
Term Definition
Accident An incident which has resulted in actual injury or illness and/or damage
(loss) to assets, the environment or third party(ies).
Causal factor An event or condition that results in an effect. Anything that shapes or
influences the outcome.
Fatality A death results from a work-related injury or occupational illness.
First Aid case Any one-time treatment and any follow-up visit for the purpose of
observation of minor scratches, cuts, burns, splinters and so forth, which
do not ordinarily require medical care. Such a one-time treatment and the
follow-up visit for the purpose of observation are considered first aid even
though it is provided by a physician or registered medical professional
Hours of The total number of hours worked by all employees and contractors during
exposure the reporting period.
Incident An unplanned, undesired event that can result in physical harm and/or
property damage.
Medical It is an occupational injury/illness which is not classified as a lost time
Treatment injury but results in loss of consciousness or medical treatment other than
Case first aid. For example, loss of consciousness due to lack of oxygen/ high
temperatures /electrocution /head injury, penetrating eye injury, chemical
or hot burns, fracture not resulting from lost time injury, etc.
Near Miss Incidents with no injury, property or environmental damage, but having the
potential to cause it. This could include an unsafe act.
Occupational Any work-related abnormal condition or disorder, other than an injury,
Illness which is mainly caused by exposure to environmental factors associated
with employment. It includes acute and chronic illness or diseases which
may be caused by inhalation, absorption, ingestion or direct contact.
Whether a case involves a work-related injury or occupational illness is
determined by the nature of the original event or exposure which caused
the case, not by the resulting condition of the affected employee. An injury
results from a single event. Cases resulting from anything other than a
single event are considered occupational illnesses.
Property Damage to any assets including buildings, equipment, and/or vehicles.

damage
Root Causes One of multiple factors (events, conditions or organizational factors) that
contributed to or created the direct cause and subsequent undesired
outcome and, if eliminated, or modified would have prevented the
undesired outcome. Typically, multiple root causes contribute to an
undesired outcome
Work-related An injury to a person arising out of or in the course of work being done for
injury or on behalf of the Company. It includes injury to Company employees
whilst on company duties and injury to an employee of a company
approved contractor whilst engaged in work for or on behalf of the
Company
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose
This plan outlines procedures for emergency awareness, preparation, and response with the
purpose of preventing, minimizing and/or mitigating environmental impacts. The procedures
listed provide a framework for proper response to emergency situations that occur and may
have environmental impacts.
1.2 Scope
This procedure applies to Airport West Solar Park in NEOM for which potential accidents and
emergency situations may arise. The procedures for preventing and mitigating the following
emergency situations are described:
• Personnel injury;
• Site evacuation;
• Fire or explosion;
• Floods;
• Chemical spills; and
• High winds and dust.
1.3 Objectives
The EERP core objectives are to:
• Preserve life and ensure the safety of people;

• Minimise the impact on the environment;
• Minimise damage to property;
• Minimise the impact on operation continuity and reputation; and
• Minimise the impact on neighbouring industries and communities, if any.
1.4 Project Overview
The Airport West Solar Energy Park (Hereinafter “the Project”) is a project of Photovoltaic
solar energy with a maximum capacity of production of 2,082-megawatt located in NEOM
area. The site of this development is located 54 km south-west of the city of Tabuk (see Figure
1-1).
The area is adjacent to Douba – Tabuk road (Route 80) and the planned new international
airport that is now under development to the southeast.
NEOM provided with the defined site boundaries for the development that delimit an extension
of 52.6 km2.
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
Figure 1-1: Project location
Generally, the operation of the PV plant entails the production of power by conversion of solar
energy to electricity. The PV power generation process is primarily self-sufficient and is not in
need of constant supervision. The resources required for PV plant operation include:
• Solar radiation
• Water
• Consumables, including but not limited to: spare parts, equipment, detergents and fuel;
The outputs from the PV plant during routine operation include:
• Power
• Solid waste (hazardous and non-hazardous)
• Liquid effluents (hazardous and non-hazardous) such as domestic wastewater,
wastewater from washing PV panels if any ( dry-cleaning methods are favoured).
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
2 Emergency Response Team
The Emergency Response Team (ERT) will report through the normal, internal management
chain-of-command. The response teams are organized in a consistent manner with the
principles of the Incident Commander System (ICS). The ICS is a management system
designed to enable effective and efficient domestic incident management by integrating a
combination of facilities, equipment, personnel, procedures, and communications operating
within a common organizational structure, designed to enable effective and efficient domestic
incident management.
2.1 Emergency Response Team
2.1.1 Emergency Response Team during Construction
Prior to construction, Engineering, procurement, and construction (EPC) Contractor will

establish the ERT that may include some or all of the positions outlined below:
• Emergency Response Room – Duty Manager – 24 hours

• Construction Manager (Incident Commander)
• Engineering Project Manager (Deputy Incident Commander)
• HSE Manager (Planning Lead)
• Contractor Safety Manager (Operations Lead)
• Contractor Safety Coordinator (ERT Lead)
• Contractor Logistics Coordinator (Logistics Lead)
• Contractor Finance and Administration Manager (Financial Lead)
2.1.2 Emergency Response Team during Operation
EPC Contractor will update the EERP with the names and phone numbers of the ERT which
may include some or all of the positions outline below. These names and contact information
shall be made available throughout the site and to all site personnel, in addition to emergency
numbers such as police, ambulance, and firefighting.
Position Name Phone Email Address

Number
Emergency Response Room – Duty
Manager – 24 hours
Incident Commander
Deputy Incident Commander
Environment and Planning Lead
Logistics Lead
Finance and Administration Lead
Health and Safety Advisor
Safety Coordinator
Legal Manager
Security Manager
Media Relations Manager
2.2 Notification Procedure
The following 7-step Emergency Notification Procedure should be used during construction and
operations:
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
2.2.1 Notify the Duty Manager (Emergency Response Room)
All emergency situations should immediately be reported to the Duty Manager (Emergency
Response Room). The Duty Manager shall immediately notify the Incident Commander to
decide upon appropriate course of actions.
2.2.2 Description of emergency
Emergency description can be accomplished by using typically the following the categories:
• Fatality.
• Major illness (heart attack, not breathing, unconscious, etc.);
• Major injury (broken bone, loss of limb, severe cuts/bleeding, etc.);
• Minor injury (twisted ankle, foreign body in eyes, minor cuts, etc.);
• Bite/sting (snake, scorpion, etc.);
• Weather effect (effects of heat, sun, cold, wind chill, lightning strike, etc.); and/or
• Incident type (fall, crush, vehicle crash, fire, electric shock, etc.).
2.2.3 Location
Location of the emergency situation should be given to the Duty Manager (Emergency
Response Room) by referring to the nearest structure or road junction.
2.2.4 Call Emergency Services/Statuary Bodies
The Incident Commander will arrange for the required emergency service/statuary bodies to
respond. For non-urgent medical attention, the Incident Commander should arrange for site
transport to take the injured to the nearest hospital and notify the hospital that they are on their
way.
2.2.5 Notify ERT Leaders
The Incident Commander will contact the ERT Leaders, who will assist at the location of the
emergency. Jointly, the ERT Leaders will arrange for trained emergency responders to attend
the scene of the emergency, if required. The names of all emergency responders (e.g. first
aiders) should be made available to all the site personnel – first aiders should be identified by a
badge on their hard hats.
2.2.6 Coordinate
The ERT Leaders will send an employee to the nearest site access point to meet the emergency
services, and escort them to the location of the emergency.
2.2.7 Accompany
The ERT Leaders will continue to assist with the situation on site, and the Safety Coordinator
will accompany any injured personnel to the hospital. The employer can later require the injured
to make an appointment to see the Project Owner (NEOM) Doctor if confirmation of the extent
or nature of injuries, treatment, or disability is required.
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
3 Prevention
The key method employed to prevent the occurrence of incidents is the planned and controlled
execution of work processes. In summary, preventative measures include:
• Ensuring that adequate planning is undertaken including appropriate risk assessment.

• Ensuring that appropriate control measures are implemented and maintained.
• Complying with all legislative and industry requirements.
• Complying with all applicable internal system procedures.
• Complying with the requirements of the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and
its related sub-plans and procedures.
• Complying with the requirements of the Health and Safety Plan; and
• Complying with the requirements of this EERP
3.1 Risk Assessment methodology
3.1.1 Hazard Identification
There are a number of ways of identifying potential sources of injury or disease. Selection of
the appropriate procedure will depend on the type of work processes and hazards involved.
Procedures may range from a simple checklist for a specific piece of equipment or substance,
to a more open-ended appraisal for a group of related work processes.
Methods of identifying workplace hazards may include:
• Reviewing information from designers or manufacturers (work method statement);

• Analysing incident and injury data;
• Analysing work processes;
• Consulting with employees;
• Developing a hazard checklist;
• Conducting walk-through audit/surveys;
• Examining and considering material safety data sheets or product labels; and
• Seeking advice from specialist practitioner or representatives.
When determining hazards associated with the task, the hazard types below should be
considered:
• Physical hazards, e.g.: objects falling from heights, noise, etc.

• Electrical hazards, e.g.: direct electrocution, contact with overhead or underground
cables etc.
• Chemical hazards, e.g.: inhalation, chemical contact with skin or eyes, ingestion of
chemicals etc.
• Radiation hazards, e.g.: UV light, lasers
• Biological hazards, e.g.: infection, handling of waste etc.
3.1.2 Risk Assessment
The purpose of risk assessment is to identify potential hazards associated with site activities,
evaluate the degree of risk by quantitative assessment of the “likelihood” and “consequence”
and then to determine corresponding control measures required.
For ongoing identification of hazardous tasks that require risk assessment, the HSE Department
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
shall review the major site progress of the upcoming three months to identify the need for a risk
assessment update.
3.1.2.1 Purpose of Risk Assessment
The purpose and function of a risk assessment can be expressed as follows:
1. To identify operations, tasks and processes which may foreseeably cause harm to
employees and/or others on the site (hazards);
2. To identify the potential for the hazard to be realized, and the potential consequences
which might then occur (risks); and
3. To enable a risk assessment to be developed which will assist in eliminating or reducing
the exposure of the workers and others to the risk.
Risk evaluation is considered based on the principles of prevention and protection of all workers,
client, consultants, and all visitors. The principles, in summary are to:
1. Avoid risk;
2. Combat risk at the source;
3. Change the method of work to suit the individual;
4. Make use of technological developments;
5. Incorporate control measures into procedures within an overall planned structure to
reduce risks;
6. Give precedence to controls, which cover the whole workforce or activity; and
7. Provide information and training to all workers involved.
3.1.2.2 Definition of Hazard and Risk
Hazard: The potential to cause harm, including ill-health, physical injury, damage to plant,
equipment, property or the environment.
Risk: The likelihood that a specified undesired event will occur due to the realization of a hazard
by or during work activities, or by products and services created by work activities.
3.1.2.3 Risk Evaluation
Figure 3-1 shows an example of a risk evaluation matrix. Where the probability of occurrence is
categorized as follows:
Frequent 5 Likely to occur frequently

Occasional 4 May occur occasionally
Probable 3 Unlikely but possible to occur
Remote 2 So unlikely that occurrence may not be experienced
Improbable 1 Occurrence is rare
Hazard Severity
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
Negligible Slight/low Medium High Very High
A B C D E
Improbable
Low Low Low Low Low
1
Remote
Probability of
Low Low Low Medium Medium

occurrence
2
Probable
Low Low Medium Medium High
3
Occasional
Low Medium Medium High High
4
Frequent
Medium Medium High High High
5
Figure 3-1: Example of a risk evaluation matrix
Low (L) Acceptable, however review to see if risk can

be reduced further.
Medium (M) Task should only proceed with appropriate
management authorization after consultation
with specialist teams.
Efforts must be made to reduce the risk; the
cost of prevention should be measured. Risk
reduction measures should be implemented
within a defined time period.
Where a medium risk is linked with extremely
harmful consequences, further assessment
may be necessary to establish more
precisely the likelihood of harm to determine
the need for improved control measures
High (H) Task must not proceed. It should be
redefined, or further control measures put in
place to reduce risks. Work should not be
started until the risk has been reduced.
Considerable resources may be required to
reduce the risk. Where work is in progress,
urgent action should be taken. If it’s not
possible to reduce the risk, work has to
remain prohibited.
Figure 3-2: Risk Rating and Action criteria
3.2 Risk Control
3.2.1.1 Criteria of risk control
The following criteria shall be put into consideration while establishing control measures to
mitigate the risks. Preferred orders of control are as follows:
• Elimination – removing the hazard or hazardous work practice from the workplace.
• Substitution – substituting or replacing a hazard or hazardous work practice with a
less hazardous one;
• Isolation – isolating or separating the hazard or hazardous work practice from people
not involved in
• the work or the general work areas from the hazard. This can be done by installing
screens or barriers, or marking of hazardous areas with conspicuous colours;
• Engineering Control – if the hazard cannot be eliminated, substituted or isolated, an
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
engineering control is the next preferred measure. This may include modifications to
tools or equipment, providing guarding to machinery or equipment.
• Administrative Control – includes introducing work practices that reduce the risk. This
could include limiting the amount of time a person is exposed to a particular hazard,
control access into hazardous area by implementing a “permit to work” system; and
• Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) – should be considered only when other
control measures are not practicable or to increase protection of personnel.
3.2.1.2 Procedure of risk control
1. Break down the identified job into individual processes.

2. Identify potential hazards associated with each process.
3. Evaluate the risk level arising from each hazard based on the likelihood of occurrence
and consequences of the harm using the risk matrix
4. Determine control measures to eliminate the hazards or to further reduce the risk level.
5. Identify risk controllers.
6. Complete the risk assessment report and pass it to the HSE manager for approval and
endorsement. Communicate the risk assessment report to the identified risk
controllers, relevant subcontractors and concerned parties
7. Implement the control measures mentioned in the risk assessment reports;
8. The Safety Coordinator is to carry out periodical inspections to ensure the risk control
measures are being implemented properly; and
9. The Safety Coordinator to review the risk assessments wherever required.
3.2.1.3 Record and Review
Records of the risk assessments should be properly maintained. A register of risk assessment
shall be prepared for ease of reference. The risk assessments shall be reviewed when:
• Significant change to the working method.

• New technology, plant, equipment or material applied.
• Major accident or high potential incident has occurred.
• Change in applicable legislation.
• An industrial summons, suspension notice, or improvement notice has been received;
and
• Any other reason exists to suspect that the original assessment is no longer valid or
could be improved.
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
4 Preparedness
The site must be prepared for potential incidents or emergencies by:
• Developing and implementing Health, safety and Environment (HSE) and emergency
procedures.
• Providing adequate and ongoing training for site personnel.
• Conducting drills and exercises.
• Regular auditing of site activities.
• Ongoing and effective communication.
• Ongoing liaison with emergency service agencies.
• Identifying resources and equipment required for effective emergency response.
• Identifying roles and responsibilities of individuals.
• Identifying key personnel and reliable means of contacting them; and
• Maintaining documentation so potential incidents or emergencies can be properly
managed.
4.1 Training
4.1.1 Objective
In order to enhance employees’ safety and environmental protection awareness and knowledge
in accident prevention, adequate training will be provided to all employees including
subcontractors’ employees.
4.1.2 Orientation Training
All new or transferred employees, including subcontractor’s employees, shall attend an

orientation training provided by HSE Department, within seven days of their arrival on site. The
content of the orientation training shall include an introduction to this EERP and special
arrangements for emergency situations in place.
4.1.3 Training Programme
An example of typical training schedule of in-house training is presented in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1: Schedule of in-house training
Training Details Conducted by Participants Frequency

Emergency HSE In-Charge All staff Quarterly
procedure and
application of EERP
Fire Evacuation Drill HSE In-Charge Concerned staff Once every 6
months
4.2 Exercise and Drill
Only a structured drill and exercise programme can ensure the effectiveness and readiness of
the emergency resources (responders and equipment).
Drill and exercise will be tailored to suit the nature of site activities and will include, but not limited
to, the following emergency situations:
• Fire and evacuation.
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
• First Aid; and
• Spill response drills.
There are various methods employed to periodically test the response capability, including:
4.2.1 Table-top Exercise (Every 3 months)
A table-top exercise is a facilitated discussion or activity conducted in a conference room setting

involving the discussion of a scenario by the response team. The primary characteristic of a
table-top exercise is that it involves a verbal “walk-through” of a response to an incident. Table-
top exercises are also:
• Used for establishing policies, providing input to planning, developing procedures,

clarifying roles, and confirming knowledge.
• Conducted in a non-threatening learning environment; and
• Conducted by trained personnel to facilitate discussions and evaluate performance.
The purpose of a table-top exercise is to have participants practice problem solving skills,
resolve questions of coordination, and assign responsibilities in a non-threatening environment,
under minimum stress. A table-top exercise can be used in preparation for a functional or full-
scale exercise.
4.2.2 Functional Exercise (Every 6 Months)
A functional exercise is more extensive than a table-top exercise that the activities are
conducted beyond a conference room atmosphere. This type of exercise is often referred to as
a “drill” and focuses on a single response function. Functional exercises (drills) are characterized
by:
• Scenario-driven response activities;

• Simulation of non-participating parties;
• Limited mobilization of personnel and resources;
• Limited scope;
• Trained personnel to serve as controllers, evaluators, and simulators; and
• Hands-on experiential learning.
The purpose of a functional exercise (drill) is to exercise a specific function or a limited range of
functions of a response plan. Functional exercises (drills) enable those involved to validate key
functions/objectives and demonstrate individual team knowledge, skills and capabilities.
4.2.3 Functional Exercise (Annually)
A full-scale exercise is used to evaluate a response of the total, integrated, operational

capabilities involving all levels of management and could involve all aspects of a response
operation (e.g., notification, assessment, initial response, recovery, disposal, etc.).
Full-scale exercises are designed to mirror real-life incidents as closely as possible. This type
of activity enables the validation of a multitude of functions and teams, as well as to evaluate
the interaction and coordination among participants.
Exercises involve:
• Scenario-driven response activities.
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
• Variation in the number or type of participants;
• Simulation of non-participating parties;
• Arrangement of personnel and resource mobilization;
• Participation of multiple teams/management levels in integrated response;
• Extensive realism; and
• Trained personnel to serve as controllers and evaluators.
The purpose of a full-scale exercise is to practice the range of response functions in the EERP
to the maximum extent practical. A full-scale exercise will incorporate a high degree of realism,
extensive involvement of personnel and resources, and an increased level of stress on player
participants.
4.2.4 Lessons Learned
The Project Owner will develop a comprehensive management system to address all lessons
learned from drills and real-life incidents together with near misses. The lessons learned should
be incorporated into an action plan for measurement and focus on key issues.
4.3 Resources
Resources and equipment are readily located on-site to enable prompt response and effective
management of incidents or emergencies. Such resources and equipment include:
4.3.1 Adequately Trained Emergency Teams
The Project Owner will assign the following trained and qualified Emergency Teams to be
available and ready onsite in the event of any emergencies:
• Rescue Team;
• Fire Fighting Team;
• Security Team;
• Administration Team;
• First Aid Team; and
• Engineering Team.
4.3.2 Equipment
4.3.2.1 Fire Extinguishers
Enough number of fire extinguishers will be made available in appropriate places with the
following specifications:
• A fire extinguisher rated not less than 2A shall be provided for each 3,000 square foot
of building area and in each yard storage area. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher
shall not exceed 100 feet from any protected area.
• One or more extinguishers rated not less than 2A shall be located on each floor of a
multi-storied building. At least one 2A-rated extinguisher shall be located adjacent to
each stairway in a multi-storied building. Extinguishers rated not less than 10B will be
provided between 25 feet and 75 feet of any area in which more than 5 gallons of
flammable or combustible liquids or 5 pounds of flammable gas are used or stored.
• Extinguishers shall be conspicuously located where they will be readily accessible and
immediately available in case of a fire. Their locations shall be conspicuously marked.
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
Extinguishers shall be installed on hangers or in brackets provided and its height shall
not be more than 5 feet from the floor. Extinguishers weighing more than 40 pounds
shall be installed so that the top is not more than 3 ½ feet from the floor.
4.3.2.2 First Aid Box
Enough number of First Aid Boxes will be made available in appropriate places. The contents
of a first aid box typically include:
• 6 Triangular Bandages
• 2 Crepe Roller Bandages 2”
• 2 Crepe Roller Bandages 3”
• 24 Adhesive Dressing – Band-aid Style
• 1 Roll Surgical Adhesive Tape ½” – 1”
• 1 Packet individually wrapped Sterile Wound dressing (50 Nos)
• 2 Packet cotton Balls
• 20 Swab Sticks (in plastic container)
• 1 Bottle Antiseptic Liquid (250ml)
• 1 Tube Antiseptic Cream (30 gm)
• 2 Bottle Eye Pads
• Sterile Eye Pads
• 2 Small Towels
• 12 Safety Pins
• 1 Pair Scissors
• 1 Pair Forceps
• 1 Pair Tweezers
• 1 Kidney Dish Plastic (small)
• 1 Pair of pocket disposable Gloves
4.3.2.3 First Aid Room
Apart from enough number of First Aid Boxes, a suitable and adequately equipped First Aid
room shall be provided on site and it will be maintained as follows:
• A Stretcher
• Wheelchair
• A sink with cold and hot running water
• Drinking water
• Paper Towels, soap and nail brushers
• Clean garments for use by First Aiders
• Clinical Thermometer
• A cough with pillow and blankets frequently cleaned
• Dressing trolley
• Kidney tray;
• Splints of different size
• Oxygen Tank
• Sphygmomanometer
• Stethoscope
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
• Other necessary surgical items
4.3.2.4 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
MSDSs on all substances and chemicals used on site shall be maintained in folders and placed
in easily and readily accessible locations and should be regularly updated.
4.3.2.5 Oil and Chemical Spill Containment Equipment
Oil spill containment equipment and spill kits shall be placed in easily accessible and pertinent
locations throughout the site.
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
5 Emergency Response Activities
5.1 Emergency Response Procedures
In the event of an emergency, the following procedures will be implemented to ensure an

effective response:
• Immediate reactions (Initial response);

• Alerts and notifications;
• Assess situations;
• Initiate appropriate Environmental Emergency Response Plans (EERPs);
• Report to concerned/relevant authorities/parties; and
• Response to deactivation and debriefing.
5.1.1 Immediate Reactions (Initial Response)
Any person involved in or witnessing an incident must initiate appropriate action to ensure the
safety and immediate treatment of injured personnel and to prevent consequential injury or loss
at the incident site. In addition, Safety Coordinator must be notified to command and continue
the initial response activities. The priorities of initial response are to:
1. Ensure human health and safety;

2. In the event of an injury to any person;
• Stabilize injured person(s). If the person is able to move or there is the ability to
move the injured person, they shall be moved to the First Aid Room as early as
possible, irrespective of whether they have received First Aid treatment. If there is
no capacity to move the injured person, the First Aid Team shall be summoned to
the site of injury. First Aid should be administered by trained and approved first
aiders or medical staff;
• HSE Manager/Incident Commander should be immediately notified.
3. In the event of a fire, immediate actions shall be taken to:
• Stop all hot work activities;
• Shut down all electoral and fuel sources, if necessary;
• Assess the size of the fire and the resources available to suppress it; If the fire is
small enough, extinguish it;
• Notify others in the area;
• Notify immediate Supervisor/Foreman and the site designated Fire Marshal.
• Notify local fire department if necessary;
• Conduct a head count; and
• Evacuate the area, if necessary.
1. Preserve the environment;
2. In the event of a spill, immediate actions shall be taken to contain/clean up the spill
using sand, or other suitable absorbent material;
3. Minimize or prevent property damage;
4. Minimize or prevent equipment damage;
5. Secure the area/scene;
6. Immediate notification:
The type of accidents (indicative) that require immediate notification to the relevant local
authorities and the ambulance service are as follows:
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
• Fatality
• Any fracture other than finger, thumbs or toes
• Any amputations and dislocations of shoulder, hip, knee, or spine
• Loss of sight (temporary or permanent)
• A chemical or hot metal burn to the eye
• Penetrating eye injury
• Any injury resulting from an electric shock which causes unconsciousness
• Any injury resulting from an electric shock which requires resuscitation
• An injury resulting from an electric shock which requires hospital admittance for more
than 24 hours
• An injury that results in unconsciousness or the casualty needing resuscitation
• An injury resulting in the casualty being admitted to hospital for more than 24 hours
5.1.2 Alerts and Notifications
Safety Coordinator shall broadcast an alarm requiring all onsite personnel to gather at the
predetermined gathering place/assembly point/muster point to receive further instructions.
An alarm or an emergency notification system will be established as part of the Emergency

Preparedness to alert all employees at the site in the event of an emergency. According to site
practical conditions, the alarm or notification system could include lights, horns, sirens, or other
appropriate devices or operational forms to ensure that all employees are aware of site
emergencies.
5.1.3 Assess the Situation
Safety Coordinator shall assess the situation and establish contact with Incident Commander to
decide upon course of action and appropriate emergency response stagey/method.
5.1.4 Initiate appropriate EERPs
The Incident Commander shall decide to initiate one of the following ERPs:
• Personnel Injury
• Site Evacuation
• Fire or Explosion
• Floods
• Chemical or oil spillage
• High Winds and Dust
5.1.5 Report to Concerned/Relevant Authorities/Parties
The degree of reporting required in the event of an accident is determined by both the outcome
and the severity of the accident. Reporting of low potential incidents, including First Aid cases
and medical treatment cases of low severity is limited within the Site Safety Department through
the Site First Aid Room. Any accidents resulting in fatality, fire, or preventing personnel from
duty more than 3 days will be reported to concerned authorities by telephonic message or by
fax immediately following the accident and a more comprehensive report shall be prepared and
submitted to the authorities within 24 hours.
The procedure to be followed in accident reporting is as follows:
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
1. Injured persons shall be moved to the site’s First Aid Room as early as possible,
irrespective of whether they have received First Aid treatment;
2. Inform the Supervisor, Safety Department, and Incident Commander;
3. Inform the authorities if required;
4. A detailed investigative report will be prepared by the Safety Department and submitted
to the Incident Commander;
5. The Incident Commander will submit the report to the authorities concerned;
6. It is the responsibility of the supervisor to submit the preliminary report to the Safety
Department. The Safety Coordinator shall in turn investigate the incident and furnish
the detailed report to be submitted to the Incident Commander
During the accident investigation time, witness statements, the contributing causes, and root
causes are to be analysed. In addition, a compiled report with all the Learning Points arising
from the incident are to be passed on to all employees to raise awareness on the incident. A
Safety Summary Report will be prepared on a monthly basis incorporating all data related to
any type of accidents. The initial accident report will be issued within 48 hours and the final close
out report within 7 to 14 days.
5.1.6 Response Deactivation and Debriefing
Once the incident has been declared over, the Incident Commander chair the debriefing
activities and notify appropriate organisations of de-brief meeting time and location.
5.2 Environmental Emergency Response Plans (EERPs)
5.2.1 Personnel Injury
The following actions will be taken for personnel injuries:
• The Site Safety Coordinator or site designee, will be notified of the injury(ies) by the
employee(s) at the scene;
• A qualified First Aid Attendant will be summoned immediately to administer first aid until
medical assistance arrives;
• The Incident Commander or designee will notify local emergency services for
Ambulance and other relevant emergency services, if required;
• All key supervisors will be paged or called and informed of the injury;
• For off-site assistance, the HSE Manager or designee will meet the emergency
responders at a prearranged gate and direct them to the location of the emergency;
• Should an employee require off-site medical transportation, they will be accompanied by
a site representative such as First Aid Attendant/Nurse to give pertinent information
needed;
• As soon as possible, the HSE Department will carry out an accident investigation to
identify the root cause(s) and implement corrective measures;
• Once the root cause(s) have been identified, an incident briefing to all concerned
employees should be conducted by Management Team; and
• All necessary documentations regarding the incident should be filled out and sent the
HSE Department.
5.2.2 Site Evacuation
In the case of severe weather events, a potential threat to the site property or workers such as
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
a bomb threat, the site area may have to be evacuated. Once a decision is taken by the Incident
Commander to evacuate, the following procedures/actions must be taken:
• All employees will evacuate to predetermined area(s) unless the evacuation area is in
danger;
• The Site Safety Coordinator or designee will broadcast via all means available, such as
two-way short band radio and over cell phones, a predetermined alarm and convey the
specific egress and gathering area instructions and the nature of the emergency.
Acknowledgement from each on-site team leader and their crews will be required;
• The Site Incident Commander or designee will notify the concerned authorities;
• All visitors and vendors/subcontractors will be guided by their key on-site contact;
• Site ERT will proceed to the assembly area, perform a head count and provide further
instructions to evacuated personnel; and
• After all employees are accounted for, the employees must await instructions prior to
leaving the site or going back to work.
5.2.3 Fire or Explosion
All on-site employees are responsible for fire prevention and will be trained on firefighting
techniques and the use of fire extinguishers regularly in addition to the orientation training they
receive upon arriving to the site;
There is potential for an accidental fire to be caused by construction materials/waste or by

sparks thrown from cigarette smoking, welding or cutting torch;
There is also a risk associated with the use and storage of small quantities of flammable liquids
and compressed gases, including equipment fuels, paints, and cleaning solvents. Hazards
associated with these materials will be mitigated by following safety requirements found in
MSDSs or Health and Safety Specific Plan; and
The Project Owner will have fire extinguishers onsite to address any small fire which can be
extinguished in its infancy stages. For larger fires, firefighting services will be notified and
mobilized to the site of the fire.
Upon discovering the fire, the following actions will be taken;
Safety Coordinator to assess the size of the fire and the areas affected by it;
Determine the cause of the fire and apply corrective measures;
Prepare documentation in accordance with incident reporting requirements; and
Notify the Incident Commander.
5.2.4 Floods
The following list of actions shall be performed in the event of flooding:
• Site Safety Coordinator or designee will consult with concerned authorities to

determine the severity of local flooding;
• Construction material which can be damaged by water or pollute the water if
submerged will be moved to either enclosed areas or elevated areas above the short-
term local sheet flooding to remain dry; and
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
• If the flooding is severe, the site will be shut down and evacuated, if required.
5.2.5 Chemical Spillage
• General emergency response procedures in the event of spills:

• Identify the drum/can which is the source of the leak/spill;
• Cordon off the area of spillage;
• Use appropriate PPE (gloves, goggles, boots, etc.);
• If the chemical spill is in the form of a jet, immediately move the material from the
affected area. The workmen should wear the necessary PPE while doing so;
• Drain off the punctured drum/can into an appropriate container;
• After the drum is drained off completely, dispose of the drum appropriately. Wash off
the floor with water (use saw dust if required);
• If chemical has been spilt directly on soil, decontaminate saturated soil by removing
the top 2 to 3 inches of soil. This contaminated soil must be disposed of at a proper
disposal site. The decontaminated area should be covered with at least 2 inches of
lime and then topped with fresh topsoil.
• Contaminated spill material shall be collected in a separate bin and disposed of by an
approved waste disposal contractor; and
• All concerned staff shall be trained in the procedures for handling spills and shall be
made aware of Federal and local regulations.
5.2.6 High Winds and Dust
• When high wind creates a hazard to craftsmen or work being performed i.e. instability
in elevated areas, limited visibility due to dust or particles in the air, unmanageable
materials etc., supervisors will stop work activities, reassign work and area, properly
store and secure material which might be blown away, injure someone or damage
equipment, lower/tie down crane booms and obtain further instruction from Site
Management;
• Appropriate material should be available and stored on the site to facilitate the securing
of site property, materials, and equipment, i.e. rope, wire, boards / plywood; and
• Although the storm might have passed, hazards may still exist because of unstable
structures or other hazardous conditions. Therefore, a safety and property damage
loss assessment inspection shall be conducted on the site by supervisors and reported
to the Safety Team for planned clean-up prior to start-up or normal site activities.
AIRPORT -WEST -NCEC
9.8 Environmental Rehabilitation and Remediation Plan
After the end of the operating life of the project, the project owner shall carry out site closure
activities to meet the local requirements for the rehabilitation of the project site and the renewal
of vegetation cover after decommissioning. The project owner shall prepare a plan for closing,
re-vegetation and rehabilitation and submitting it to obtain the necessary permits from the
concerned authorities. The objectives of the environmental rehabilitation and treatment plan are
to describe the plans to stop operating the proposed project after its operations cease, and to
develop a methodology through which environmental conditions can be returned to the current
conditions before development. In general, the plan will be in compliance with relevant local
legislative and regulatory requirements (for example: Regulations for Environmental
Rehabilitation of Degraded Sites and Remediation of Contaminated Sites). This section of the
report provides a framework for an environmental rehabilitation and remediation plan that will
be prepared in more detail before proceeding with the Phase of shutdown of the proposed
project.
9.8.1 Purpose of the Plan
The goal of the plan is:
• Return the site to a condition as similar as possible to the natural environment or to the
end use specified in the race
• Ensure that all applicable environmental regulations and best practices are followed and
implemented
• Ensure that all areas are stable and that there are no erosion risks
9.8.2 Procedures and Measures
The various procedures and measures to be followed during the rehabilitation of the project site
will be specified in the plan. These procedures may cover aspects such as soil stabilization,
plants and animals, chemicals and waste management, as well as public safety. These actions
may include:
• All infrastructure, equipment, installations, fences, temporary services and foreign

materials must be removed from the site
• All troubled areas must be installed
• Waste will be completely removed from the project site and disposed of in a licensed
landfill. It will not be allowed to bury or incinerate on the site
• Any damage caused by erosion will be rehabilitated and measures to combat erosion
will be maintained
• No unauthorized construction equipment, vehicles or personnel are allowed to enter the
rehabilitated areas.
9.8.3 Monitoring plan
Various aspects will be monitored during the shutdown and rehabilitation activities. These
aspects include but are not limited to air emissions, noise levels, incoming and outgoing
chemicals, waste and site access. Frequency, location and items to be monitored will be
carefully selected, as appropriate, and will be reviewed and updated as needed.
9.8.4 Reports preparation
Reports on the progress of rehabilitation activities will be prepared regularly. The reports will
include the activities carried out during the reporting period, the results of monitoring activities,
and conclusions and recommendations.

9.8.5 emergency management plan
An emergency management plan will be prepared during rehabilitation activities. In principle,
the emergency management plan is expected to define emergency response procedures for the
purpose of preventing, reducing, and/or mitigating environmental impacts. The plan will cover
various scenarios such as personnel injury, fire or explosion, flood and site evacuation.


Neom - Ncec - Esia - Airport West Solar PV Plant - Rev00!24!09-2022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Neom - Ncec - Esia - Airport West Solar PV Plant - Rev00!24!09-2022

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Neom - Ncec - Esia - Airport West Solar PV Plant - Rev00!24!09-2022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT

Airport West Solar Energy Park

Rev 01, September 2022

REVISION C ODE: REV00 PAGE 1 OF 290

Revision code Description of changes Purpose of issue Date

Prepared by Reviewed by Approved by

Table 0-1: Summary of Impacts .................................................................................................. 19

Figure 2-1: NCEC ESIA Flow process ........................................................................................ 37

0.2 ESIA rationale

The Project is considered a Category 3 Project, “Projects with significant environmental

0.3 Project Justification

0.4 Project description summary

0.5 Project Phases

The Project will be completed in four phases:

0.6 Project Baseline

0.7 Impact summary

Environmental aspect Potential Impact

Natural vegetation cover vegetal cover removal

Air quality air quality degradation

Groundwater quality groundwater quality degradation

Hydrology and flood risk natural hydrologic system disturbance

Quality of soil Potential soil contamination

Terrestrial Biodiversity ecosystem disturbance and habitat destruction

Introduction of invasive species ecosystem disturbance and habitat destruction

risk of accidents and injuries during construction and

Landscape and visual comfort degradation of general landscape of the site

Land use modification of land use

non-hazardous and hazardous waste generation,

Climate change Reduction/increasing of GHGs

Creation of job opportunities

workers conflict with local communities

infectious disease spread

Traffic and transport volume of traffic rise and risk of accidents

Unplanned events Risk of oil/chemicals spill, vehicle accidents

Decommissioning Air quality, noise, traffic, job loss

1.1 General Information on The Study

1.2 Rationale, Objectives, and Scope of the Study

• Identification and analysis of sensitive components in the current environment.

1.3 Structure of the Study

The structure of the report is presented below:

Chapter 5: Provides a description of the surrounding environment

Chapter 6: Provides assessment of potential environmental and social impacts;

Chapter 9: provides an overview of the stakeholder participation process and a summary of

Chapter 10: Annexes

1.4 Permit Applicant Information

Project Proponent: NEOM

1.5 Information on the Service Provider that Prepared the Study

AH Environmental Consulting Office has been appointed by the Applicant as Sub-contractor

Table 1-2: Information about the environmental consultant

Table 1-3: Authors of the study

Consultant full name Position Task

Elyes Othman Environmental consultant Study preparation

2.1 Institutional Framework

2.1.1 Ministry of Environment, Water & Agriculture (MEWA)

The functions and responsibilities of implementing environmental regulation have been

2.1.2 The National Centre for Environmental Compliance

2.1.3 NEOM Regenerative Development Management System

• NEOM Environmental Codes of Practice for Construction (NEOM-NEV-TGD-702)

• Environmental and Social Risk Management Training and Awareness Program